A330 FCOM 07feb18 GENDSC TOMEII

A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL
The content of this document is the property of Airbus. It is supplied in confidence and commercial
security on its contents must be maintained. It must not be used for any purpose other than that for
which it is supplied, nor may information contained in it be disclosed to unauthorized persons. It must
not be reproduced in whole or in part without permission in writing from the owners of the copyright.
© AIRBUS 2005. All rights reserved.
REFERENCE: JAI A330/A340 FLEET FCOM ISSUE DATE: 07 FEB 18

UNCONTROLLED COPY
Intentionally left blank
UNCONTROLLED COPY

AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
UNCONTROLLED COPY
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW PRELIMINARY PAGES - TABLE OF CONTENTS
OPERATING MANUAL
DSC-23-10 General
DSC-23-10-10 Introduction
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-23-10-20 Radio Tuning

Description............................................................................................................................................................... A
Radio Management Panel....................................................................................................................................... B
DSC-23-10-30 Intercommunication System

Audio Management System.................................................................................................................................... A
Cabin Intercommunication Data System................................................................................................................. B
DSC-23-10-40 Cockpit Voice Recorder

Description............................................................................................................................................................... A
Controls and Indicators............................................................................................................................................B
DSC-23-10-50 Controls
Audio Control Panel.................................................................................................................................................A
Side Stick Radio Selector........................................................................................................................................B
Loudspeaker Volume Knob..................................................................................................................................... C
Audio Switching....................................................................................................................................................... D
DSC-23-20 Internal Communication

DSC-23-20-10 Flight Crew Interphone System
Flight Crew Interphone System............................................................................................................................... A
DSC-23-20-20 Cabin Interphone System

Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................A
Cabin Call System................................................................................................................................................... B
DSC-23-20-30 Service Interphone System

Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................A
Ground Mechanic Call............................................................................................................................................. B
DSC-23-20-40 Passenger Address

Passenger Address..................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-23-30 External Communication

DSC-23-30-10 Radio Communication
Description............................................................................................................................................................... A
VHF.......................................................................................................................................................................... B
HF............................................................................................................................................................................ C
SELCAL (Selective Calling).....................................................................................................................................D
Continued on the following page
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-PLP-TOC P 1/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Continued from the previous page

DSC-23-30-20 SATCOM
DSC-23-30-20-10 General
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-23-30-20-20 Controls and Indicators

ACP Interface...........................................................................................................................................................A
MCDU Interface....................................................................................................................................................... B
Overhead Panel PAX.............................................................................................................................................. C
DSC-23-30-30 ACARS
DSC-23-30-30-40 ACARS Functions
World Map ACARS Frequencies.............................................................................................................................A
DSC-23-40 Emergency Communication

DSC-23-40-10 Emergency Evacuation
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Purser Station.......................................................................................................................................................... B
DSC-23-40-30 Emergency Locator Transmitter

Controls and Indicators............................................................................................................................................A
DSC-23-47 Onboard Mobile Telephony System

Onboard Mobile Telephony System  ...............................................................................................................A

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW GENERAL - INTRODUCTION
OPERATING MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
Ident.: DSC-23-10-10-00019801.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The communications system comprises the following subsystems:

‐ VHF / HF transceivers
‐ Radio tuning systems (Radio Management Panels)
‐ Audio integrating system (Audio Management Unit, Audio Control Panels)
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW GENERAL - INTRODUCTION
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-10 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW GENERAL - RADIO TUNING
OPERATING MANUAL
DESCRIPTION
Ident.: DSC-23-10-20-00000038.0003001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: MSN 0888-0956
Identical RMPs :
• Give the flight crew control of all radio communication systems (VHF and HF frequency control).
• Back to FMGCs’ for controlling radio navigation systems (Refer to DSC-34-10-30-10 General).
Two RMPs are on the center pedestal, and a third on the overhead panel.
Each RMP can control any VHF or HF transceiver. RMP1 and 2 are connected directly to all VHF
and HF transceivers, whereas RMP3 is connected to them via RMP1 and 2. RMPs are connected
together so that each RMP is updated with the selections made on other RMPs.
Only RMP1 functions in EMER ELEC CONFIG.
If two RMPs fail, the remaining one controls all the VHF and HF transceivers.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-20 P 1/4

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
DESCRIPTION
Ident.: DSC-23-10-20-00000038.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Identical RMPs :
• Give the flight crew control of all radio communication systems (VHF and HF frequency control).
• Back to FMGCs’ for controlling radio navigation systems (Refer to DSC-34-10-30-10 General).
Two RMPs are on the center pedestal, and a third on the overhead panel.
Each RMP can control any VHF or HF transceiver. RMP1 and 2 are connected directly to all VHF
and HF transceivers, whereas RMP3 is connected to them via RMP1 and 2. RMPs are connected
together so that each RMP is updated with the selections made on other RMPs.
Only RMP1 functions in EMER ELEC CONFIG.
If two RMPs fail, the remaining one controls all the VHF and HF transceivers.
If ACARS or ATSU is installed, do not use VHF3 for voice communication.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-20 P 2/4

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
RADIO MANAGEMENT PANEL

Ident.: DSC-23-10-20-00000041.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) Frequency displays

• The ACTIVE display window shows the active frequency of the selected radio, which is
identified by a green light on the selection key.
• The STBY/CRS (standby / course display) display window shows a standby frequency that
the pilot can activate by pressing the transfer key or change by rotating the tuning knobs.
For a description of the CRS function Refer to DSC-34-10-30-30 Radio Management Panel
(RMP).
(2) Transfer key
Pressing this key moves the active frequency to the standby window and the standby
frequency to the active window.
This tunes the selected receiver to the new active frequency.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-20 P 3/4

FCOM B→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(3) Radio comm. selection keys

When the pilot presses one of these keys:
• The ACTIVE window displays the frequency set on that radio.
• The STBY/CRS window displays the selected frequency or course.
• The selected key displays a green monitor light.
(4) Frequency selector knobs
The pilot uses these concentric knobs to select the STBY frequency or CRS.
The outer knob controls whole numbers; the inner knob controls decimal fractions.
(5) AM pushbutton switch
If the aircraft has HF radios and the flight crew has selected an HF tranceiver, this switch
selects the AM mode. (The default mode is the SSB, or single side-band, mode).
This key displays a green monitor light when the AM mode is active.
(6) SEL indicator
The SEL indicator comes on in amber on both RMPs when a transceiver normally associated
with one RMP is tuned by another:
• VHF1 tuned by RMP2 or 3,
• VHF2 tuned by RMP1 or 3,
• VHF3, HF1, HF2  tuned by RMP1 or 2.
(7) NAV pushbutton switch (with transparent switchguard)
The pilot presses this key to be able to select navigation receivers and courses through the
RMP. lt does not affect the selection of communication radios and their frequencies Refer to
DSC-34-10-30-30 Radio Management Panel (RMP) for additional information.
(8) Radio navigation selection keys
The pilot presses one of these keys to select a navigation radio to control through this RMP.
This turns on the green monitor light in the key.
Refer to DSC-34-10-30-30 Radio Management Panel (RMP) for additional information.
(9) ON/OFF switch
This switch controls the power supply of the RMP.
Note: RMP3 is able to control VHF and HF transceivers through RMP1 and RMP2 even
when they are OFF.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-20 P 4/4

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW GENERAL - INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM
OPERATING MANUAL
AUDIO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Ident.: DSC-23-10-30-00019154.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The audio management system allows the flight crew to use :

‐ all the radio communication and radio navigation facilities installed on the aircraft in transmission
and reception mode.
‐ the interphone systems
‐ the call systems
‐ the passenger address system
The audio management system includes :
‐ an audio management unit (AMU)
‐ three or four audio control panels (ACPs)
‐ sockets at each pilot's station
• headset jack, boomset connector and hand microphone connector for pilot, copilot, third and
fourth occupant 
• headset jack for the fourth occupant
‐ one interphone jack socket at the ground power receptacle
‐ boomsets for the pilot, copilot, third and fourth occupant  and three or four hand microphones
.
‐ three cockpit oxygen mask microphones
‐ one radio press-to-talk switch on each sidestick
‐ one SELCAL code selection panel
‐ two cockpit loudspeakers with separate volume controls
‐ an audio switching facility
If audio channel 1 or 2 fails due to a failure either in an ACP or the corresponding AMU, the crew can
use the AUDIO SWITCHING selector to select the third audio channel.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-30 P 1/4

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-30 P 2/4

FCOM ←A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
COMPONENTS' LOCATION
CABIN INTERCOMMUNICATION DATA SYSTEM

Ident.: DSC-23-10-30-00019806.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The Cabin Intercommunication Data System (CIDS) provides signal transmission, control and
processing for the following cabin systems:
‐ Cabin and service interphone
‐ Passenger address
‐ Passenger signs
‐ Reading lights
‐ General cabin illumination
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-30 P 3/4

FCOM ← A to B → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
‐ Emergency evacuation signalling

‐ Lavatory smoke indication
‐ Passenger entertainment music and video
The CIDS includes the following main components:
‐ Two CIDS directors connected in parallel, one active and the other on standby.
‐ Forward Attendant Panel (FAP) to monitor and control the cabin systems.
It also includes a programming and test module which allows reprogramming in case of cabin
configuration changes.
‐ Attendant stations (FWD, MID, EXIT, AFT).
‐ Decoder / Encoder Units (DEUs) linked to the two directors.
• Type A units (for passengers) installed in three rows (left, center, right).
The loudspeakers, lighted signs, call buttons, call lights and general illumination ballast units are
divided into small groups, each connected to a type A DEU.
• Type B units (for attendants) installed on each cabin side. The Area Call panels, attendant
handsets, slide / door pressure sensors, attendant indicator panels, are connected to type B
DEUs.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-30 P 4/4

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW GENERAL - COCKPIT VOICE RECORDER
OPERATING MANUAL
DESCRIPTION
Ident.: DSC-23-10-40-00019179.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The cockpit voice recorder (CVR) records :

‐ direct conversations between crew members in the cockpit
‐ all aural warnings sounded in the cockpit
‐ communications received and transmitted by radio
‐ intercom conversations between crew members
‐ announcements transmitted over the passenger address system, if PA reception is selected on at
least one audio control panel.
Only the last 2 h of recording are retained.
The CVR system consists of :
‐ a remote microphone behind overhead panel,
‐ a crashproof four-track recorder, equipped with an underwater locating beacon, in the aft section
of the aircraft
‐ a control panel on the overhead panel.
It is energized automatically :
‐ on ground during the first 5 min after the aircraft electrical network is energized
‐ on ground with one engine running,
‐ in flight
It is stopped automatically 5 min after last engine shutdown.
On the ground, personnel can energize the CVR manually by pressing GND CTL pushbutton.
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-23-10-40-10-00019180.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-40 P 1/4

FCOM A to B → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(1) GND CTL sw (spring-loaded)

ON : The CVR and the digital flight data recorder (DFDR), and QAR  are energized.
The ON light comes on in blue.
AUTO : The CVR and DFDR, and QAR  are automatically energized according to the
logic
(Refer to DSC-23-10-40 Description).
The ON light goes off.
Ident.: DSC-23-10-40-10-00019181.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
(1) TEST pb
Pressed : This activates the test, if the CVR is energized.
The result of the test is visible on the test result indicator.
If an acoustic equipment is plugged into the jack, the test will be heard as
low-frequency signal.
(2) Test result indicator
Green and red LEDs compose the indicator.
Illumination of one or more green LEDs indicates that the test result is good.
(3) ERASE pb 
Pressed for 2 s : This erases the tape completely, if the aircraft is on the ground, and the
parking brake is on.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-40 P 2/4

FCOM ←B→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(4) Headset and Boomset jacks

When a headset or boomset is plugged into the jack:
‐ Cockpit sounds, picked up by the microphone, are audible.
‐ The test tone is audible, when the TEST pushbutton is pressed.
‐ The erase tone is audible when the ERASE pushbutton is pressed.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-40 P 3/4

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-40 P 4/4

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW GENERAL - CONTROLS
OPERATING MANUAL
AUDIO CONTROL PANEL

Ident.: DSC-23-10-50-00000075.0004001 / 19 DEC 12
(1) Transmission Keys

Pressed : The associated channel is selected for transmission.
The three green lines come on.
The pilot deselects the channel by pressing the pushbutton again, or by selecting
another channel.
CALL lt : The legend flashes amber (and buzzer sounds) when the SELCAL system detects
a call.
MECH lt: The legend flashes amber (and buzzer sounds) for a call from the nose gear bay.
The MECH light goes off after 60 s, if it is not reset.
ATT lt : The legend flashes amber for a call from a cabin attendant. The ATT light goes off
after 60 s, if it is not reset.
SAT : The legend flashes amber, when the SATCOM system detects a call.
CALL lt The three green lines flash during the establishment of air to ground calls, or when
SATCOM calls are on hold.
After call establishment, the three green lines remain steady.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-50 P 1/8

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(2) Reception knob

‐ Pressing and releasing the knob (knob out) selects the associated audio reception channel.
The integral white light comes on. Rotating the knob adjusts the volume. The ANN LT knob
controls the brightness.
‐ Pressing the knob (knob stays in) disconnects the associated audio reception channel.
Note: For reception of DME audio navigation signals associated to an ILS or MLS station,
the LS pb on the FCU must also be selected.
(3) RESET Key
Pressing this key extinguishes CALL, MECH and ATT light and cancels the buzzers.
(4) VOICE Key
This key allows the flight crew to inhibit the audio navigation signals (VOR, ADF).
Pressing this key filters out IDENT signals and turns on the green ON light.
(5) INT/RAD sw
This switch operates as a push-to-talk switch for boom mike or oxygen mask mike.
INT : Boom and mask mikes transmit on interphone regardless of which
transmission key is selected. For reception on interphone, the crew
member must have the INT selected (INT reception knob out).
Neutral : Reception is normal. Boom and mask mikes do not transmit.
RAD (press and : Boom and mask mikes transmit on the radio selected on the audio
hold) control panel.
(6) Passenger Address (PA) Function
PA transmission key and reception knob.
(Refer to DSC-23-20-40 Passenger Address - General)
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-50 P 2/8

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
AUDIO CONTROL PANEL

Ident.: DSC-23-10-50-00000075.0006001 / 12 FEB 13
(1) Transmission Keys

Pressed : The associated channel is selected for transmission.
The three green lines come on.
The pilot deselects the channel by pressing the pushbutton again, or by selecting
another channel.
CALL lt : The legend flashes amber (and buzzer sounds) when the SELCAL system detects
a call.
MECH lt: The legend flashes amber (and buzzer sounds) for a call from the nose gear bay.
The MECH light goes off after 60 s, if it is not reset.
ATT lt : The legend flashes amber (and buzzer sounds) for a call from a cabin attendant.
The ATT light goes off after 60 s, if it is not reset.
SAT : The legend flashes amber, when the SATCOM system detects a call.
CALL lt The three green lines flash during the establishment of air to ground calls, or when
SATCOM calls are on hold.
After call establishment, the three green lines remain steady.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-50 P 3/8

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(2) Reception knob

‐ Pressing and releasing the knob (knob out) selects the associated audio reception channel.
The integral white light comes on. Rotating the knob adjusts the volume. The ANN LT knob
controls the brightness.
‐ Pressing the knob (knob stays in) disconnects the associated audio reception channel.
Note: For reception of DME audio navigation signals associated to an ILS station, the LS pb
on the FCU must also be selected.
(3) RESET Key
Pressing this key extinguishes CALL, MECH and ATT light and cancels the buzzers.
(4) VOICE Key
This key allows the flight crew to inhibit the audio navigation signals (VOR, ADF).
Pressing this key filters out IDENT signals and turns on the green ON light.
(5) INT/RAD sw
This switch operates as a push-to-talk switch for boom mike or oxygen mask mike.
INT : Boom and mask mikes transmit on interphone regardless of which
transmission key is selected. For reception on interphone, the crew
member must have the INT selected (INT reception knob out).
Neutral : Reception is normal. Boom and mask mikes do not transmit.
RAD (press and : Boom and mask mikes transmit on the radio selected on the audio
hold) control panel.
(6) Passenger Address (PA) Function
PA transmission key and reception knob.
(Refer to DSC-23-20-40 Passenger Address - General)
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-50 P 4/8

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
SIDE STICK RADIO SELECTOR

Ident.: DSC-23-10-50-00000079.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
This selector has the same function as the INT/RAD switch on the ACP.
NEUTRAL : Boom and mask mikes are dead. Reception is normal.
(spring-loaded)
RADIO (aft position) : Boom and mask mikes transmit the equipment selected by the
transmission key on the ACP.
Note: If RADIO is selected on the side stick when the INT/RAD switch is on INT, the radio
function has priority over the interphone function.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-50 P 5/8

FCOM B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
LOUDSPEAKER VOLUME KNOB

Ident.: DSC-23-10-50-00000081.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
This knob adjusts the volume of the loudspeaker for radio communication.
OFF : Loudspeaker does not respond the signals from the aircraft's radio equipment.
Clockwise : Loudspeaker broadcasts signal from the aircraft's radio equipment at
rotation increasing volume.
Note: This knob does not control the loudness of aural alert and voice message. In the case of
acoustic feedback (i.e. Larsen effect) from the cockpit loudspeaker, the flight crew should
reduce the volume of the cockpit loudspeaker. However, the flight crew should ensure that
the volume of the cockpit loudspeaker is sufficient to hear radio communication.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-50 P 6/8

FCOM C 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
AUDIO SWITCHING
Ident.: DSC-23-10-50-00000084.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The crew can switch to the third audio channel if ACP1 or ACP2 fails.
When the crew does this, it takes away the third occupant's access to the acoustic equipment.
NORM : Each crew member uses his dedicated communication equipment.
CAPT ON 3: The pilot uses his acoustic equipment and the third occupant's ACP.
F/O ON 3 : The copilot uses his acoustic equipment and the third occupant's ACP.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-50 P 7/8

FCOM D 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-50 P 8/8

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW INTERNAL COMMUNICATION - FLIGHT CREW INTERPHONE SYSTEM
OPERATING MANUAL
FLIGHT CREW INTERPHONE SYSTEM

Ident.: DSC-23-20-10-00019811.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
This system allows the flight crew to communicate among themselves and, through a jack on the
external power panel, with the ground mechanic.
EXTERNAL POWER PANEL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-20-10 P 1/2

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW INTERNAL COMMUNICATION - FLIGHT CREW INTERPHONE SYSTEM
OPERATING MANUAL
COCKPIT OPERATION FOR GROUND MECHANIC COMMUNICATION

MECH TRANSMISSION INT RECEPTION PUSH TO TALK
INT/RAD SW ON ACP
KEY ON ACP KNOB ON ACP ON HANDMIKE
BOOMSET OR INT OR RAD
PRESSED OUT
OXYGEN MASK (maintained)
HANDMIKE PRESSED OUT PRESSED
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-20-10 P 2/2

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW INTERNAL COMMUNICATION - CABIN INTERPHONE SYSTEM
OPERATING MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
Ident.: DSC-23-20-20-00019175.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The system provides communication and call facilities between:

‐ flight crew and attendant stations
‐ two attendant stations
(1) CAB transmission key

Depressed : Three green lines come on.
Boomset, mask mikes and hand mike may be used for cabin interphone.
(2) CAB reception knob
Depressed and : The integrated white light comes on.
released(knob out) Audio signal from cabin is received.
Rotate knob to adjust volume.
Depressed (knob in) : The white light goes off.
Cabin interphone is disconnected.
COCKPIT OPERATION
CAB TRANSMISSION CAB RECEPTION INT/RAD PUSH TO TALK
KEY ON ACP KNOB ON ACP SW ON ACP ON HANDMIKE
BOOMSET OR
PRESSED AND RELEASED OUT RAD -
OXYGEN MASK
HANDMIKE PRESSED AND RELEASED OUT - PRESSED
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-20-20 P 1/4

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
CABIN CALL SYSTEM

Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-23-20-20-10-00019177.0001001 / 02 NOV 16
CALL FROM THE COCKPIT
(1) FLT REST  /CAB REST  /PURS/FWD/MID/EXIT/AFT pushbutton

Pressed: A steady pink light comes on, on the corresponding area call panel.
“CAPTAIN CALL” appears on the corresponding attendant indication panel, and
a green light comes on.
A high–low chime sounds through corresponding loudspeaker.
Note: The FLT REST/CAB REST call button is operative, if the
corresponding compartment is installed on the aircraft.
(2) ALL pb
Pressed: All stations respond as indicated above, and “CALL ALL CAPT” appears on the
attendant indication panels.
(3) EMER pb-sw (Guarded)
ON : A red or pink light comes on, at all area call panels.
“CALL PRIO CAPT” appears on all attendant indication panels, and a red light
comes on.
High–low chime is repeated three times, through all loudspeakers. The ATT
flashes in amber, on the Audio Control Panels.
ON lt : This light comes on in white for an emergency call from the cockpit or the cabin.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-20-20 P 2/4

FCOM B→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
CALL lt : This light comes on in amber for an emergency call from the cockpit.
For an emergency call from the cabin to the cockpit:
‐ The amber CALL light flashes.
‐ The ATT flashes in amber on the audio control panels.
‐ The buzzer is repeated three times in the cockpit.
The system resets, when the attendant hangs up the associated handset.
Ident.: DSC-23-20-20-10-00019178.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
CALL FROM THE CABIN
(1) CAPT key

Pressed: In the cockpit, the “ATT” lights up on the ACP, and a buzzer sounds.
In the cabin, “CAPTAIN” appears on the AIP, where the CAPT button was
pressed. The buzzer is inhibited during takeoff and landing.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-20-20 P 3/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(2) PRIO CAPT key

Pressed: This key is used for emergency calls. In the cockpit, the “ATT” lights up on the
ACP, and three buzzers sound.
In the cabin, “PRIO CAPTAIN” appears at the AIP, where the PRIO CAPT
button was pressed. The buzzer is inhibited during takeoff and landing. On the
CALLS panel, the white ON light and amber CALL light of the EMER pb-sw
(guarded) flash.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-20-20 P 4/4

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW INTERNAL COMMUNICATION - SERVICE INTERPHONE SYSTEM
OPERATING MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
Ident.: DSC-23-20-30-00019812.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The system provides communication between:

‐ the flight crew and the service interphone jacks
‐ the flight attendant stations and the service interphone jacks
‐ the different service interphone jacks
The service interphone system comprises:
‐ thirteen interphone jacks
‐ an OVRD switch located on the overhead panel
The audio lines from the interphone jacks are connected to both CIDS directors.
LOCATION OF INTERPHONE JACKS
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-20-30 P 1/6

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ON OVERHEAD PANEL

For maintenance purpose only.
(1) SVCE INT OVRD pb sw

Auto: Ground personnel can communicate with the flight crew by means of the
service interphone jacks after the aircraft has landed. The landing gear must be
compressed.
ON : Communication is possible when the landing gear is not compressed.
The ON light is white.
COCKPIT OPERATION
CAB TRANSMISSION CAB RECEPTION INT/RAD PUSH TO TALK SVCE INT
KEY ON ACP KNOB ON ACP SW ON ACP ON HANDMIKE OVRD PB SW
RAD
BOOMSET PRESSED OUT
(maintained) ON IF L/G NOT
COMPRESSED
HANDMIKE PRESSED OUT PRESSED
GROUND MECHANIC CALL

Ident.: DSC-23-20-30-00019813.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The system allows the flight crew and ground mechanics to communicate each other.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-20-30 P 2/6

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ON OVERHEAD PANEL
(1) MECH pb
Pressed (and : COCKPIT CALL lights up blue on the external power panel.
held) An external horn sounds.
Released : COCKPIT CALL remains lighted.
The ground mechanic can extinguish it by pressing the HORN RESET
pb on the external power panel. The external horn stops sounding.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-20-30 P 3/6

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ON EXTERNAL POWER PANEL
(1) COCKPIT CALL lt

The blue light appears when cockpit calls the ground mechanic. An external horn also
sounds.
(2) COCKPIT CALL pb
Pressed: This calls the cockpit.
The MECH lights flash amber on the ACPs and a buzzer sounds.
Released: The MECH lights go out after 60 s if they are not reset on the ACPs. The buzzer
stops.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-20-30 P 4/6

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(3) HORN RESET pb

Pressed: The COCKPIT CALL light goes out.
The external horn stops sounding.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-20-30 P 5/6

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-20-30 P 6/6

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW INTERNAL COMMUNICATION - PASSENGER ADDRESS
OPERATING MANUAL
PASSENGER ADDRESS
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-23-20-40-10-00000137.0002001 / 16 MAY 12
The passenger address system allows flight personnel to make passenger announcements in the
cabin via the loudspeakers. It can be operated from the cockpit (with ACP, or handset), or from the
cabin (attendant stations).
(1) PA Transmission Key

Pressed and held : The flight crew may use a boom, mask, or hand mike to make an
announcement.
Three green lines come on.
Note: The flight crew may use a cockpit handset to make PA announcements without action
on the ACPs.
(2) PA Reception Knob
Pressed and released : The message goes to the loudspeakers and the integral white light
(knob out) comes on.
The flight crew can rotate the knob to adjust the volume.
Pressed (knob in) : The PA reception to the loudspeaker is disconnected.
The white light goes out.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-20-40 P 1/4

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-23-20-40-10-00000147.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
COCKPIT HANDSET
The cockpit handset at the bottom of the pedestal is used for PA announcements.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-20-40 P 2/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-23-20-40-10-00000148.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
PA FROM COCKPIT
PA TRANSMISSION PA RECEPTION PUSH TO TALK PUSH TO TALK
KEY ON ACP KNOB ON ACP ON HANDMIKE ON HANDSET
BOOMSET
OR PRESSED
OUT - -
OXYGEN (maintained)
MASK
PRESSED
HANDMIKE (maintained)
OUT PRESSED -
HANDSET - - - PRESSED
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-20-40 P 3/4

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-20-40 P 4/4

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EXTERNAL COMMUNICATION - RADIO COMMUNICATION
OPERATING MANUAL
DESCRIPTION
Ident.: DSC-23-30-10-00019802.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
Each transceiver can be tuned by any of the three Radio Management Panels (RMPs). The flight
crew uses the Audio Control Panel (ACP) to select a VHF or HF system, and transmit. The ACP
operates via the Audio Management Unit (AMU). Each system is connected to the RMPs, for
frequency selection, and to the AMU for connection to the audio-integrating and SELCAL (selective
calling) systems.
VHF
Ident.: DSC-23-30-10-00019145.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The aircraft has three identical VHF communication systems. Each system has a transceiver in
the avionics compartment, and an antenna on the fuselage. Only VHF1 operates in EMER ELEC
CONFIG. The VHF1 range is from 118.0 to 136.975 MHz. The VHF has an alarm to indicate that
the microphone  is stuck. If a microphone is in the emission position for more than 30 s, an
interrupted tone sounds for 5 s, and the emission is turned off. To reactivate the emission, the crew
releases the push–to–talk button and presses it again.
Note: The Rockwell Collins’ In Flight Entertainment system (IFE) may cause an audible
background noise on frequencies : 121.500, 135.000, and 135.005. In addition, the squelch
may take a few seconds to close, once transmission on VHF3 frequency 135.005 is
finished.
HF
Ident.: DSC-23-30-10-00019146.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The aircraft is equipped with High Frequency (HF) communication system:

• HF1
• HF2 
Each HF is composed of a transceiver installed in the avionics compartment, and a common tuner
and antenna in the vertical stabilizer. The emission range is from 2.8 to 24.0 MHz.
Note: • Only HF1 is supplied in EMER ELEC CONFIG.
• HF is lost when LAND RECOVERY is selected ON.
HF DATALINK 
When in data mode, digital information is transmitted between HF1 and ATSU. HF must not be
used during refueling.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-30-10 P 1/2

FCOM A to C → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EXTERNAL COMMUNICATION - RADIO COMMUNICATION
OPERATING MANUAL
On ground, HF transmission is inhibited. The GND HF DATALINK pb, located on the overhead
panel, may override the inhibition.
SELCAL (SELECTIVE CALLING)

Ident.: DSC-23-30-10-00019803.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
Upon receiving a call code corresponding to that of the aircraft, the SELCAL system aurally and
visually advises the flight crew that a ground station is calling the aircraft. The aural signal is inhibited
during takeoff and landing.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-30-10 P 2/2

FCOM ← C to D 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EXTERNAL COMMUNICATION - SATCOM
OPERATING MANUAL
General
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-23-30-20-10-00000340.0004001 / 26 JUN 15
Applicable to: ALL
The Satellite Communication (SATCOM) system allows the exchange of information between the
aircraft and the ground network.
It provides both voice and data channels:
One or several channels are used for voice transmissions (cockpit or cabin voice). The cockpit
voice function must be activated, in order for it to be available. The cabin telephone system must be
installed, to be able to use cabin voice function.
One channel is used for data transmissions (ATSU or ACARS).
ACARS or ATSU communications normally transmit via VHF 3. They automatically switch to
SATCOM when VHF 3 is not available.
The cockpit voice interface is controlled by the Audio Control Panels (ACPs) for call set-up and call
termination, and by the MCDU for the call number selection. It allows the crew:
‐ To initiate air to ground calls and to receive ground to air calls
‐ To select the call priority, in case of air to ground calls
‐ To use manual dial or pre-recorded phone numbers.
SATCOM functions are programmed through the Owner Requirement Table (ORT), according to
airline needs.
Due to the highly customized programming, the SATCOM functions may vary for different airlines
and are, therefore, not described in detail.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-30-20-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-30-20-10 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Controls and Indicators
ACP INTERFACE
Ident.: DSC-23-30-20-20-00000342.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
Refer to DSC-23-10-30 Audio Management System
MCDU INTERFACE
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-23-30-20-20-A-00000346.0004001 / 26 JUN 15
SATCOM MAIN MENU PAGE

The crew accesses this page by selecting SAT on the MCDU MAIN page.
2L (4L) (Label This field displays the SATCOM channel 1 (2)  status:
line) ‐ READY TO CONNECT : The channel is ready to support a call
‐ NOT AVAILABLE : The channel is not available (failed or not logged)
‐ DIALING : Cockpit call in progress
‐ INCOMING CALL : Advises of an incoming ground to air call
‐ CONNECTED : The circuit is connected
‐ CALL FAILED : The transmission is interrupted.
2L (4L) (Data This field displays:
line) ‐ The title of the selected phone number, in case of an air to ground call
‐ The number, if the MANUAL DIAL option is used
‐ GRND-AIR CALL, in case of a ground to air call.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-30-20-20 P 1/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
5R This key provides access to the Manual Dial page. This page allows the dialing of
a phone number.
6L This key provides access to the SATCOM STATUS page, which contains LOG
ON and channel status information.
6R This key provides access to the SATCOM DIRECTORY page.
Ident.: DSC-23-30-20-20-A-00000352.0002001 / 10 JAN 11
SATCOM DIRECTORY PAGE

This page provides access to 4 phone number lists, where phone numbers can be memorized,
according to their priority.
1L : EMERGENCY for Priority 1 - Reserved for emergency and distress phone numbers only.
2L : SAFETY for Priority 2 - Reserved for regulatory and flight safety phone numbers
only.
3L : NON-SAFETY for Priority 3 - Reserved for non flight safety phone numbers.
4L : PUBLIC for Priority 4 - Reserved for personal phone numbers.
6L : This key is used to return to the SATCOM MAIN MENU
page.
Ident.: DSC-23-30-20-20-A-00000356.0002001 / 10 JAN 11
SATCOM CATEGORY NUMBERS PAGE

The CATEGORY NUMBERS page provides access to the pre-recorded phone numbers.
As an example, the following figure shows the SAFETY CATEGORY NUMBER page.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-30-20-20 P 2/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
1L, 2L, 3L, 4L, 5L These fields display the phone numbers and their titles.
When pressed, they dial the corresponding phone number.
There are two types of numbers:
‐ Protected: Displayed in green
‐ Unprotected
: Displayed in blue brackets.
1R This field displays the selected SATCOM channel.

4R This function alphabetically sorts the phone numbers, within the category,
by title.
5R This function automatically searches for a phone number from the
beginning of this category, by entering up to the first three letters of the
title into the scratchpad, and by pressing 5R.
6L This key is used to return to the SATCOM DIRECTORY page.
Ident.: DSC-23-30-20-20-A-00002685.0001001 / 26 JUN 15
SATCOM MANUAL DIAL PAGE

The MANUAL DIAL PAGE enables the crew to initiate an air to ground call by manually entering a
phone number.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-30-20-20 P 3/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
2L (data line) This field displays the phone number in blue brackets, after having been
entered in the scratchpad.
4L If two channels are available, this field displays the selected SATCOM
channel. If only one channel is available, this field is blank.
5L This field displays the priority for the manual dial number. The priority can be
changed by pressing the slew up or down keys on the MCDU keyboard.
6L This key is used to return to the SATCOM MAIN MENU page.
OVERHEAD PANEL PAX

Ident.: DSC-23-30-20-20-00013155.0001001 / 16 MAR 11
OFF : The PAX SATCOM system is in reset.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-30-20-20 P 4/4

FCOM ← B to C 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EXTERNAL COMMUNICATION - ACARS
OPERATING MANUAL
ACARS Functions
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-30-30-40 P 1/4

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
WORLD MAP ACARS FREQUENCIES

Ident.: DSC-23-30-30-40-00000334.0002001 / 19 DEC 12
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-30-30-40 P 2/4

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
The table below defines the world zone abbreviations, indicates their associated Service Provider,
MCDU label, and ACARS frequency.
ABBREVIATION SERVICE PROVIDER MCDU LABEL FREQUENCY Family
SP SITA PACIFIC SIT-PAC 131.550 MHz SITA
SN SITA NORTH AMERICA SIT-NAM 136.850 MHz SITA
SL SITA LATIN AMERICA SIT-LAM 131.725 MHz SITA
SE SITA EUROPE SIT-E/A 131.725 MHz SITA
DE DEPV BRAZIL DEPV 131.550 MHz SITA
AV AVICOM AVICOM 131.450 MHz SITA
AM ARINC AMERICA ARI-AM 131.550 MHz ARINC
AE ARINC EUROPE ARI-EUR 136.925 MHz ARINC
AF ARINC AFRICA ARI-AFR 126.900 MHz ARINC
AK ARINC KOREA ARI-KOR 131.725 MHz ARINC
AS ARINC ASIA ARI-ASI 131.450 MHz ARINC
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-30-30-40 P 3/4

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-30-30-40 P 4/4

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EMERGENCY COMMUNICATION - EMERGENCY EVACUATION
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-23-40-10-00000151.0001001 / 08 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL
(1) COMMAND pb (guarded)

ON : In the cockpit : EVAC light flashes red.
In the cabin : ‐ EVAC RESET light flash at all attendant panels.
‐ “EVACUATION ALERT” appears on all attendant indication
panels and a red light flashes.
‐ Specific evacuation tone sounds.
Off : The alert is stopped.
The EVAC light flashes red when the alert is activated.
(2) HORN SHUT OFF pb
This button silences the cockpit horn (generated when evacuation is activated from the cabin).
(3) CAPT and PURS/CAPT sw
CAPT and PURS : The alert may either be activated from the cockpit or the cabin.
CAPT : The alert may only be activated from the cockpit.
If one of the cabin EVAC CMD keys is pressed, only the cockpit horn
sounds for 3 s.
PURSER STATION
Ident.: DSC-23-40-10-00000157.0002001 / 01 APR 11
Applicable to: ALL
Refer to CCOM/03-010 System Components.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-40-10 P 1/2

FCOM A to B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EMERGENCY COMMUNICATION - EMERGENCY EVACUATION
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-40-10 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340 EMERGENCY COMMUNICATION -
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

Ident.: DSC-23-40-30-00019800.0003001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
OVERHEAD PANEL
(1) ELT switch

ON : The Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) transmits an emergency signal.
ARMED : In case of impact, the ELT transmits an emergency signal (on 121.5, 243
and 406.025 MHz ).
TEST/RESET : Starts the ELT autotest.
Note: If the ELT is unduly triggered in ARMED mode (by an external impact, hard
landing, etc), select the TEST/RESET position to reset the ELT and stop signal
transmission.
(2) ON TEST light
This light comes on, either when the emergency signal is transmitted, or during the ELT test.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-40-30 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340 EMERGENCY COMMUNICATION -
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-40-30 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW ONBOARD MOBILE TELEPHONY SYSTEM
OPERATING MANUAL
ONBOARD MOBILE TELEPHONY SYSTEM 

Ident.: DSC-23-47-00015737.0001001 / 05 JAN 15
Applicable to: ALL
GENERAL
The Onboard Mobile Telephony System (OMTS) enables passengers to use their mobile
telephones for voice and data services during the cruise phase of flight.
OMTS uses satellite networks for interconnection with the ground. The system is controlled by the
cabin crew via a control panel located in the cabin. A cockpit pushbutton is installed for the flight
crew on the overhead panel (for description of PORTABLE EQPT & WIRELESS pb-sw, Refer to
DSC-25-20-50-20 PORTABLE EQPT & WIRELESS pb-sw (If Installed)). This pushbutton-switch
enables the flight crew to take control over the system.
The NO MOBILE signs located next to the FASTEN SEAT BELT signs indicate to the passengers
when the use of mobile phones is allowed or prohibited.
The Onboard Mobile Telephony System is automatically inhibited:
‐ Below 3 000 m AGL (approximately 10 000 ft)
‐ In some geographical areas (refer to the "Regional Operation Data for the Onboard Mobile
Telephony System" document for the identification of the geographical areas).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-47 P 1/2

FCOM A 18 MAR 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW ONBOARD MOBILE TELEPHONY SYSTEM
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM 18 MAR 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY

AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
UNCONTROLLED COPY
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
DSC-24-10 Description
DSC-24-10-10 General
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-24-10-20 Generation of Electrical Power

DSC-24-10-20-10 AC Generation
Engine-Driven Generators....................................................................................................................................... A
APU Generator and External Power....................................................................................................................... B
Emergency Generator............................................................................................................................................. C
Static Inverter...........................................................................................................................................................D
DSC-24-10-20-20 DC Generation
Transformer Rectifiers (TR).....................................................................................................................................A
Batteries................................................................................................................................................................... B
DSC-24-10-20-30 Contactors
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
AC and DC Contactor Control.................................................................................................................................B
No Break Power Transfer....................................................................................................................................... C
Monitoring and Indicating........................................................................................................................................ D
DSC-24-10-20-40 Circuit Breakers

Circuit Breakers....................................................................................................................................................... A
DSC-24-10-30 Operations
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-24-10-30-20 Normal Configuration

No Break Power Transfer (NBPT) Description....................................................................................................... A
In Flight.................................................................................................................................................................... B
On Ground............................................................................................................................................................... C
DSC-24-10-30-30 Abnormal Configuration

Failure of One Engine Generator............................................................................................................................A
Failure of the AC BUS 1......................................................................................................................................... B
TR Failures.............................................................................................................................................................. C
Emergency Generation after Loss of All Main Generators..................................................................................... D
Flight with Batteries Only........................................................................................................................................ E
On Ground, Batteries Only...................................................................................................................................... F
DSC-24-10-30-40 Distribution Table

Distribution Table..................................................................................................................................................... A

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

DSC-24-20 Controls and Indicators
Overhead Panel....................................................................................................................................................... A
ELEC EMER Panel..................................................................................................................................................B
Forward Cabin......................................................................................................................................................... C
External Power Panel..............................................................................................................................................D
ELEC AC ECAM Page............................................................................................................................................ E
ELEC DC ECAM Page............................................................................................................................................ F
C/B ECAM Page..................................................................................................................................................... G
C/B Pulled................................................................................................................................................................H
Memo Display............................................................................................................................................................I

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - GENERAL
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-24-10-10-00017983.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The electrical power system consists of a three phase 115/200 V 400 Hz constant-frequency AC
system and a 28 V DC system. Electrical transients are acceptable for equipment. Commercial
supply has secondary priority.
In normal configuration, the electrical power system provides AC power. The electrical power system
is constituted of 2 engine generators and 1 APU generator. Each generator can provide AC power to
all electrical bus bars. A part of this AC power is converted into DC power for certain applications.
In the event that normal AC power is not available, an emergency generator can provide AC power.
In the event that all AC power is not available, the electrical power system can invert DC power from
the batteries into AC power.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-10 P 1/2

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-10 P 2/2

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - GENERATION OF ELECTRICAL POWER
OPERATING MANUAL
AC Generation
ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATORS
Ident.: DSC-24-10-20-10-00004813.0004001 / 18 MAR 11
Applicable to: ALL
Two three-phase AC generators (GEN1, GEN2), driven by the engine through an integrated drive,
supply aircraft electrical power. Each generator can supply up to 115 KVA of three phase 115/200 V
400 Hz power.
Two Generator Control Units (GCU) control the output of generator. The GCU:
‐ Controls the frequency and voltage of the generator output.
‐ Protects the network by controlling the associated generator line contactor (GLC).
APU GENERATOR AND EXTERNAL POWER

Ident.: DSC-24-10-20-10-00017991.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
An APU generator (APU GEN), driven directly by the APU and producing up to 115 KVA of three
phase 115/200 V 400 Hz power, can replace one or more main engine generators at any time.
Two ground power connectors near the nosewheel allow ground power to be supplied to all busbars
(with some galleys shed in case of overload). Two ground power units (90 KVA MAX each) can
supply the aircraft.
A Ground Power Control Unit (GPCU):
‐ Protects the network by controlling the External Power Contactor
‐ Generates a reference frequency used by GCU for synchronisation before No Break Power
Transfer (NBPT), or
A Ground and Auxiliary Power Control Unit (GAPCU)  :
‐ Regulates, via the APU Electronic Control Box, the frequency and voltage of the APU generator
when the No Break Power Transfer (NBPT) is required.
‐ Protects the network by controlling the external power contactor and the APU Generator Line
Contactor.
EMERGENCY GENERATOR
Ident.: DSC-24-10-20-10-00000042.0002001 / 18 MAR 11
Applicable to: ALL
The green hydraulic circuit drives an emergency generator that automatically supplies emergency
AC power to the aircraft electrical system, if all main generators fail. This generator supplies 8 KVA of
three-phase 115/200 V 400 Hz power, except when the Ram Air Turbine powers the green hydraulic
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-20-10 P 1/2

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
circuit, and the aircraft speed is below 260 kt; in this case, the emergency generator supplies
3.5 KVA, leading to some shedding.
A Generator Control Unit (GCU):
‐ Keeps the emergency generator at a constant speed
‐ Controls the generator's output voltage
‐ Protects the network by controlling the emergency generator line contactor
‐ Controls the emergency generator start-up.
When the emergency generator is automatically or manually coupled, the emergency generator
continues to supply DC ESS and AC ESS buses, even if one or more main generators are
recovered.
STATIC INVERTER
Ident.: DSC-24-10-20-10-00000044.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
A static inverter transforms DC power from the DC ESS bus into 2.5 KVA of single-phase 115 V
400 Hz AC power, which is then supplied to part of the AC essential bus. In flight, the inverter is
automatically activated, if nothing but the batteries is supplying electrical power to the aircraft,
regardless of the position of the BAT 1 and BAT 2 pushbuttons.
On ground, the inverter is activated, if only the batteries are supplying electrical power to the aircraft,
and both BAT 1 and BAT 2 pushbuttons are on.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-20-10 P 2/2

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
DC Generation
TRANSFORMER RECTIFIERS (TR)

Ident.: DSC-24-10-20-20-00000048.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Two main Transformer Rectifiers TR1 and TR2 and one essential TR supply the aircraft’s electrical
system with DC current.
A fourth TR is dedicated to APU start or APU battery charging.
Each TR controls its contactor by internal logic.
BATTERIES
Ident.: DSC-24-10-20-20-00000050.0003001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Two main batteries, each with a normal capacity of 40 Ah, are permanently connected to the two hot
busses.
An identical third battery (40 Ah) is dedicated to APU start.
Each battery has an associated Battery Charge Limiter (BCL).
The BCL monitors battery charging and controls its battery contactor.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-20-20 P 1/2

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-20-20 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Contactors
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-24-10-20-30-00017992.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Two identical Electrical Contactor Management Units (ECMUs) provide:

‐ AC and DC contactors control (excepted TR contactors, which are controlled by the TR itself)
‐ Galley shedding control
‐ No Break Power Transfer control (NBPT)
‐ Monitoring and indicating.
For this purpose, each ECMU receives the following information:
‐ Voltage of all normal busbars
‐ Position of all AC and DC contactors
‐ Availability of all generators, or power source (from GCU, GPCU or GAPCU  )
‐ Position of all galleys' contactors
‐ TR status
‐ Pushbutton position (BUS TIE, GALLEY SHED and COMMERCIAL)
‐ Flight/ground signal from associated LGCIU.
AC AND DC CONTACTOR CONTROL

Ident.: DSC-24-10-20-30-00000055.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
ECMU 1 : ‐ The Generator Line Contactor (GLC) 1.

controls : ‐ The AC Bus Tie Contactor (BTC) 1.
‐ The APU Generator Contactor.
‐ Both DC Tie Contactors.
‐ The BUS TIE Contactor
‐ The External Power Contactor B
ECMU 2 : ‐ The Generator Line Contactor (GLC) 2.
controls : ‐ The AC Bus Tie Contactor (BTC) 2.
‐ The External Power Contactor A.
‐ Both DC tie Contactors.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-20-30 P 1/2

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
NO BREAK POWER TRANSFER

Ident.: DSC-24-10-20-30-00017994.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
This function avoids busbar power interruption during supply source transfer on ground in normal
configuration. It is inhibited in flight.
The ECMU controls the simultaneous connection of the two sources for a short time. To achieve this,
both sources are synchronized on a frequency reference signal sent by the GPCU or GAPCU  .
Synchronization may take up to 15 s for the APU GEN with GPU, and some milliseconds in all other
cases.
If synchronization is not achieved within the allowed time, transfer is performed anyway (without
simultaneous connection of two sources). This function has a backup in the GCU.
MONITORING AND INDICATING

Ident.: DSC-24-10-20-30-00000066.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Each ECMU sends the following information to the ECAM:

‐ Busbars supplied or not
‐ Contactor status
‐ Galley supply status, and galley switch position.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-20-30 P 2/2

FCOM C to D 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Circuit Breakers
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Ident.: DSC-24-10-20-40-00000069.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
All circuit breakers are in the electronic equipment bay.

A Circuit Breaker Monitoring Unit (CBMU) monitors the circuit breaker status. It sends this
information to the ECAM system.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-20-40 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-20-40 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - OPERATIONS
OPERATING MANUAL
General
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-24-10-30-10-00000073.0002001 / 22 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Each AC BUS is supplied in priority order by :

‐ the corresponding engine generator.
‐ the APU generator or the external power A (if both are connected, the APU generator has priority
for the left side bars, and the external power has priority for the right side bars).
‐ the external power B (if both external powers are connected, B has priority for the left side bars
and A has priority for the right side bars).
‐ the other side engine generator.
The APU generator or an external power may supply all the network.
One generators can supply all the network (with galley shedding in case of overload detection).
The generators cannot be connected in parallel (except on ground during No Break Power
Transfers).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-30-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-30-10 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Normal Configuration
NO BREAK POWER TRANSFER (NBPT) DESCRIPTION

Ident.: DSC-24-10-30-20-00012806.0001001 / 09 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL
As per design, the NBPT function is effective provided that the power supply sources
connections/disconnections are done according to the below table.
If the flight crew does not follow the sequences provided in this table, power transfers without NBPT
can be observed.
IN FLIGHT
Ident.: DSC-24-10-30-20-00000074.0002001 / 09 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL
Each engine driven generator supplies its associated AC BUS (1 and 2) via its Generator Line
Contactor (GLC 1 and GLC 2).
AC BUS 1 normally supplies the AC ESS BUS via a contactor.
AC BUS 1 supplies TR 1 which normally supplies DC BUS 1, DC BAT BUS.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-30-20 P 1/6

FCOM A to B → 08 NOV 12
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
AC BUS 2 supplies TR 2 which normally supplies DC BUS 2.

AC BUS 1 supplies ESS TR which normally supplies DC ESS BUS.
The two batteries are connected to the DC BAT BUS if they need charging. When they are fully
charged the Battery Charge Limiter disconnects them.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-30-20 P 2/6

FCOM ←B 08 NOV 12
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ON GROUND
Ident.: DSC-24-10-30-20-00000076.0002001 / 09 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL
Either the APU generator or external power may supply the complete system (with some galley
shedding in case of overload).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-30-20 P 3/6

FCOM C→ 08 NOV 12
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-30-20 P 4/6

FCOM ←C→ 08 NOV 12
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
If external power A, external power B and the APU generator supply the entire system, the APU
generator has priority over external power B.
The display is then the same as the one for APU generator plus external power.
On ground, when only ground services are required, external power can supply the AC and DC
GND/FLT buses directly, without supplying the aircraft's entire network.
This configuration is selected via the MAINT BUS switch, located in the forward entrance area.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-30-20 P 5/6

FCOM ←C→ 08 NOV 12
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-30-20 P 6/6

FCOM ←C 08 NOV 12
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Abnormal Configuration
FAILURE OF ONE ENGINE GENERATOR

Ident.: DSC-24-10-30-30-00004811.0001001 / 28 AUG 15
Applicable to: ALL
ECMU provides automatic reconfiguration.

Complete network remains supplied.
Note: If a generator is lost due to overcurrent detection, reconfiguration does not occur and the
related AC BUS is lost.
The system automatically replaces the failed generator with :
‐ The APU generator if available or,
‐ The other engine generator (automatically shedding part of the galley load and some commercial
loads).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-30-30 P 1/10

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
FAILURE OF THE AC BUS 1

Ident.: DSC-24-10-30-30-00009199.0001001 / 14 FEB 11
Applicable to: ALL
The AC BUS 2 supplies the AC ESS BUS and the ESS TR automatically.
TR FAILURES
Ident.: DSC-24-10-30-30-00000097.0002001 / 14 FEB 11
Applicable to: ALL
The contactor of each TR automatically opens, in case of :

‐ Overheat
‐ Minimum current
‐ Overcurrent
‐ Open or short circuit.
The ECMU provides automatic reconfiguration (except for APU TR).
Note: If a TR is lost due to overcurrent detection, reconfiguration does not occur and the related
DC BUS is lost.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-30-30 P 2/10

FCOM B to C → 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
FAILURE OF ONE TR
• TR 1 or 2 lost : The available TR replaces the faulty one.
• ESS TR lost : TR 1 replaces the ESS TR.
FAILURE OF ESS TR AND TR 1 (OR TR 2)

The remaining TR supplies the two DC norm busses and the DC BAT bus.
The DC ESS bus is lost.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-30-30 P 3/10

FCOM ←C→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
EMERGENCY GENERATION AFTER LOSS OF ALL MAIN GENERATORS

Ident.: DSC-24-10-30-30-00017995.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
 In case of main generators loss:

The emergency generator automatically supplies AC power to the aircraft electrical system.
The green hydraulic pressure, which powers the emergency generator, is provided by:
‐ Engine(s) driven pump(s), if at least one engine is running, or
‐ The Ram Air Turbine (RAT), if both engines are lost. In this failure case, the RAT automatically
extends.
 If powered by the RAT only:
The EMER GEN is inhibited when slats are extended.
The flight crew can also manually activate the emergency generator by pushing the MAN ON pb.
Emergency generator deactivation occurs only automatically :
‐ In flight : At slats extension ; if powered by the RAT only (both engines are lost) it can be
reactivated after slats retraction via the MAN ON pushbutton.
‐ On the ground : after both engines shutdown.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-30-30 P 4/10

FCOM ← C to D → 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
The EMER GEN TEST pushbutton allows to activate the emergency generator and to connect it to
the essential network. This test is inhibited when the slats are extended.
• If the green hydraulic system, which actuates the emergency generator, is powered by an
engine-driven pump, the emergency generator supplies the :
‐ AC ESS BUS,
‐ AC ESS SHED.
And, through the ESS TR, the :
‐ DC ESS BUS,
‐ DC ESS SHED.
• If the green hydraulic system is powered by the Ram Air Turbine, the emergency generator
supplies the :
‐ AC ESS BUS,
‐ DC ESS BUS, through the ESS TR.
All LAND RECOVERY AC and DC BUS bars are shed. They are recovered when the LAND
RECOVERY pushbutton is ON.
The AC ESS GND is lost.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-30-30 P 5/10

FCOM ←D→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-30-30 P 6/10

FCOM ←D 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
FLIGHT WITH BATTERIES ONLY

Ident.: DSC-24-10-30-30-00004812.0003001 / 14 FEB 11
Applicable to: ALL
When emergency generator is not available, the batteries supply :

‐ the DC ESS BUS
‐ the DC LAND RECOVERY (whatever the LAND RECOVERY pushbutton position is)
and through the STAT INV :
‐ the AC ESS BUS
‐ the AC LAND RECOVERY (whatever the LAND RECOVERY pushbutton position is)
The AC ESS SHED, the DC ESS SHED and the SHED LAND RECOVERY are not supplied.
The AC ESS GND is lost.
Example : flight with batteries only.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-30-30 P 7/10

FCOM E 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ON GROUND, BATTERIES ONLY

Ident.: DSC-24-10-30-30-00018017.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Provided they are both selected AUTO, batteries supply the :

‐ DC ESS BUS
‐ DC BAT BUS
‐ DC LAND RECOVERY (whatever the position of the LAND RECOVERY pushbutton)
And, through the static inverter, the :
‐ AC ESS BUS, and
‐ AC ESS GND
‐ AC LAND RECOVERY (whatever the LAND RECOVERY pushbutton position is)
The AC ESS SHED, the DC ESS SHED and the SHED LAND RECOVERY are not supplied.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-30-30 P 8/10

FCOM F→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Note: ELEC AC ECAM page is identical to the one for flight with batteries only.
Battery Discharge Warning 
On ground, an external horn is activated, if the following conditions are met :
‐ External power contactor OFF (ground power unit disconnected, or EXT PWR pushbutton at OFF ;
‐ Generators not running ;
‐ BAT pushbutton switched at auto, and batteries connected to the aircraft network.
If the batteries are not switched off, the horn automatically stops after 5 min.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-30-30 P 9/10

FCOM ←F 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-30-30 P 10/10

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Distribution Table
DISTRIBUTION TABLE
Ident.: DSC-24-10-30-40-00018020.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) Lost in case of overcurrent on the faulty TR.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-30-40 P 1/4

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(2) In case of differential protection failure :

• The affected generator is not replaced ;
• The associated TR is switched off.
White compartments : Same supply as in normal configuration.
Shaded : Back up supply.
compartments
EMER CONFIG AC AC AC AC AC AC
BUS 1 BUS 2 ESS ESS ESS LAND
BUS GND SHED REC
• BATTERIES ONLY – – STAT INV BAT 1-2 – – STAT INV
(in flight) BAT 1-2
• EMER GEN – – EMER GEN – EMER GEN EMER GEN(1)
SUPPLIED BY
ENGINE DRIVEN
PUMP
• EMER GEN – – EMER GEN – – EMER GEN(1)
SUPPLIED BY RAT
(1) Supplied when LAND RECOVERY pushbutton is at ON.
EMER CONFIG DC DC DC DC DC DC SHED
BUS 1 BUS 2 BAT ESS ESS LAND LAND
BUS BUS SHED REC REC
• BATTERIES ONLY – – (2) BAT 1-2 – BAT 1-2 –
(in flight)
• EMER GEN – – – ESS TR ESS TR ESS TR ESS TR
SUPPLIED BY EMER GEN EMER GEN EMER EMER GEN(1)
GEN(1)
ENGINE DRIVEN
PUMP
• EMER GEN – – – ESS TR – ESS TR –
SUPPLIED BY RAT EMER GEN EMER
GEN(1)
(1) Supplied when LAND RECOVERY pushbutton is at ON.
(2) Lost after 7 s.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-30-40 P 2/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ON GROUND AC AC AC AC AC AC
BUS 1 BUS 2 ESS ESS ESS LAND
BUS GND SHED REC
BAT only, V>50 kt – – STAT INV – – STAT INV
BAT 1-2 BAT 1-2
BAT only, V<50 kt – – STAT INV STAT INV – STAT INV
BAT 1-2 BAT 1-2 BAT 1-2
ON GROUND DC DC DC DC DC DC SHED
BUS 1 BUS 2 BAT ESS ESS LAND LAND
BUS BUS SHED REC REC
BAT only, V>50 kt – – – BAT 1-2 – BAT 1-2 –
BAT only, V<50 kt – – BAT 1-2 BAT 1-2 – BAT 1-2 –
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-30-40 P 3/4

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-10-30-40 P 4/4

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
OVERHEAD PANEL
Ident.: DSC-24-20-00018022.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) BAT 1(2 or APU) selector

Selects the battery for voltage indication.
(2) BAT 1 (2 or APU) Voltage Indication
Selected battery voltage.
(3) BAT 1(2) pb-sw
Controls the operation of the corresponding Battery Charge Limiter.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-20 P 1/24

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Auto : The Battery Charge Limiter controls automatically the connection and the
disconnection of the corresponding battery to the DC BAT BUS by closing and
opening of the battery line contactor.
‐ The batteries are connected to the DC BAT BUS in the following cases:
• Battery voltage below 26.5 V (battery charge). The charging cycle ends
when battery charge current goes below 4 A (for 10 s on ground, 15 min in
flight).
• On the ground (with speed below 50 kt), when batteries only are supplying
the aircraft.
• In flight DC generation lost (limited to 7 s).
‐ The batteries are connected to the DC ESS BUS when batteries only are
supplying:
• In flight
• On the ground (speed below 50 kt) provided they are both selected auto.
Note: 1. In normal configuration the batteries are disconnected most of the
time.
2. A battery automatic cut off logic prevents batteries from discharging
completely when the aircraft is on the ground (parking).
Automatic battery contactors open when:
‐ The aircraft is on the ground.
‐ The main power supply (external power plus all generators) is cut
off.
‐ The battery voltage is lower than 23 V for more than 16 s.
The flight crew can reset the contactors by switching the BAT pb-sw
to OFF then to AUTO.
OFF : The Battery Charge Limiter is not operating, the DC ESS BUS is not connected to
the battery (except in flight in emergency configuration).
OFF comes on white if the DC BAT BUS is powered.
Hot buses remain supplied.
FAULT lt : Comes on amber associated with an ECAM caution, when the charging current
for corresponding battery is outside limits.
In this case the battery contactor opens.
(4) APU BAT pb-sw
Controls the operation of the APU Battery Charge Limiter.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-20 P 2/24

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
AUTO : The APU Battery Charge Limiter automatically controls the closure/opening of the
line APU BAT contactor.
The battery is connected in the following cases:
• To ensure battery charge (as for BAT 1 or 2)
• When the APU start sequence is initiated.
Note: Automatic cut off, as for BAT 1 or 2, is provided.
OFF : The Battery Charge Limiter is not operating, the battery line contactor is open.
OFF light illuminates.
FAULT lt : Comes on amber associated with an ECAM caution as for BAT 1 or 2.
In this case the battery contactor opens.
(5) AC ESS FEED pb-sw (guarded)
Normal : The AC ESS BUS is supplied from AC BUS 1.
It is automatically supplied by the AC BUS 2 when the AC BUS 1 is lost.
ALTN : The AC ESS BUS is supplied from AC BUS 2.
FAULT lt : Comes on amber associated with an ECAM caution when the AC ESS BUS is not
electrically supplied.
Note: In case of total loss of main generators the AC ESS BUS is
automatically supplied by the emergency generator or by the static
inverter if the emergency generator is not available.
(6) GALLEY pb-sw

AUTO : The galleys are normally supplied. The ECMU automatically controls the
shedding of one or more galleys in case of generator(s) failure or in case of
overload detection. On ground when APU generator or the external power
supplies, all galleys are supplied provided no overload is detected.
OFF : All galleys and the IFE System  are shed. Water/Waste (drain mast) ice
protection is lost.
The electrical supply of the heating floor panels is shed.
FAULT lt : Comes on amber associated with an ECAM caution in case of overload detection
if the automatic shedding is not performed.
Note: Switching OFF then AUTO resets the galleys which have been
automatically shed by the ECMU.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-20 P 3/24

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(7) COMMERCIAL pb
OFF : The following equipment is shed:
‐ Galleys
‐ Cargo loading system
‐ Electrical service
‐ Escape slide lock mechanism ice protection
‐ Water/waste (drain mast) ice protection
‐ Lavatory and cabin lights
‐ Water heater
‐ In-seat power supply 
‐ Passenger entertainment system (music and video) 
(8) IDG 1 (2, 3 or 4) (Integrated Drive Generator) pb (guarded)
CAUTION 1. If the pushbutton is pressed for more than about 3 s , damage may occur to
the disconnection mechanism.
2. IDG disconnection is inhibited when the engine is stopped or below idle.
IDG switches are normally spring loaded out.
Pressing this switch disconnects the IDG from its drive shaft. Only maintenance personnel can
reconnect it.
FAULT lt : Comes on amber associated with an ECAM caution in case of:
• IDG oil outlet overheat (above 185 °C), or
• IDG oil pressure low. Inhibited when the engine is stopped or below idle.
It goes off when the IDG is disconnected.
(9) GEN 1(2) pb
On : The generator field is energized and the line contactor closes, provided electrical
parameters are normal.
OFF/R : The generator field is de-energized and the line contactor opens.
The associated Generator Control Unit (GCU) is reset.
FAULT lt : Comes on amber associated with an ECAM caution in the event of protection trip
initiated by the associated Generator Control Unit (GCU).
The line contactor opens.
Note: If the protection trip is initiated by a differential fault, the reset action has
no effect after two attempts.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-20 P 4/24

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(10) APU GEN pb-sw

On : The APU generator field is energized and the line contactor closes provided
parameters are normal.
Each bus tie contactor 1 and (or) 2 automatically closes if its associated
generator is not operative.
OFF/R : The generator field is de-energized and the line contactor opens. The associated
Generator Control Unit (GCU) is reset.
FAULT lt : Same as GEN FAULT.
APU GEN FAULT light is inhibited when APU speed is too low.
(11) BUS TIE pb-sw
AUTO : The three BUS TIE contactors open or close automatically according to the
priority logic in order to maintain power supply to all AC buses. The three
contactors close when:
‐ only one engine generator supplies the aircraft, or
‐ only the APU generator or single ground power unit supplies the aircraft.
OFF : The three BUS TIE contactors open.
(12) EXT A pb
AVAIL lt : Illuminates green provided external power parameters are normal.
Momentarily : ‐ If the AVAIL light was on:
pressed • The external power line contactor closes
• The AVAIL light goes off
• The ON light comes on blue
‐ If the ON light was illuminated:
• The external power line contactor opens
• The ON light goes off
• The AVAIL light comes on.
(13) EXT B pb
AVAIL lt : Illuminates green provided external power parameters are normal.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-20 P 5/24

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Momentarily : ‐ If the AVAIL light was on:

pressed • Provided the APU generator is off the external power line contactor
closes
• The AVAIL light goes off
• The AUTO light comes on.
‐ If the AUTO light was on:
• The external power line contactor opens
• The AUTO light goes off
• The AVAIL light comes on.
Note: 1. The APU generator has priority over external power (A and B) for AC BUS 1.
The external power A has priority over the APU generator for AC BUS 2.
The APU generator has priority over external power B for AC BUS 2.
The engine generators have priority over the external power or APU.
The external power B has priority over external power A for AC BUS 1.
2. When external power B is selected AUTO, AUTO light remains illuminated even
when the APU generator has taken over.
ELEC EMER PANEL

Ident.: DSC-24-20-00018024.0005001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) MAN ON pb (guarded)

AUTO : In case of normal AC supply loss in flight, the emergency generator is automatically
started.
Pressed: The emergency generator runs and is connected to the aircraft network.
(2) EMER GEN FAULT lt
The light comes on red, if the emergency generator is not supplying and normal AC supply is
lost in flight.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-20 P 6/24

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(3) TEST pb (guarded)

Pressed and : The emergency generator runs (provided the green hydraulic system is
held pressurized) and supplies the DC ESS BUS and the AC ESS BUS.
(4) LAND RECOVERY pb-sw
ON When pressed, with the emergency generator running, the AC LAND RECOVERY
and the DC LAND RECOVERY buses are recovered and the following equipment
are restored:
‐ LGCIU 1
‐ SFCC 1 (flap channel is not recovered, if the emergency generator is powered by
the RAT).
‐ BSCU channel 1 (not recovered, if the emergency generator is powered by the
RAT)
‐ LH windshield anti-ice (not recovered, if the emergency generator is powered by
the RAT)
‐ LH landing light (not recovered, if the emergency generator is powered by the
RAT)
The remaining fuel pump (if any) is lost.
Note: The remaining fuel pump will be shed at 260 kt, if the emergency
generator is powered by the RAT, or at LAND RECOVERY selection,
whichever occurs first.
When the LAND RECOVERY pb-sw is pressed in EMER ELEC configuration, ADR
3 is lost, and consequently, AP 1 is lost.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-20 P 7/24

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
FORWARD CABIN
Ident.: DSC-24-20-00000995.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
This switch allows maintenance and ground service personnel to energize electrical circuits for
ground servicing, without energizing the aircraft's entire electrical system.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-20 P 8/24

FCOM C→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ON : The selector latches magnetically, provided the external power A parameters are normal
(AVAIL light is on). The AC and DC GRND/FLT busbars are supplied and the following
services can be energized :
‐ Passenger compartment lighting
‐ Galley lighting
‐ Entrance area lights
‐ Lavatory lighting and service
‐ Vacuum cleaner outlets
‐ Flight compartment service outlets
‐ Flight compartment flood lighting
‐ Fuel quantity indications
‐ Refueling
‐ Lower deck cargo compartment lighting and power outlets.
‐ Main and nose landing gear compartment lighting
‐ Hydraulic compartment lighting
‐ Landing gear compartment service outlets
‐ Ground call
‐ Equipment compartment lights and service outlets
‐ Navigation lights
‐ Escape slide locking mechanism ice protection 
‐ Parking brake
‐ Cargo door hydraulic pump
The switch trips, when the external source is removed.
OFF : The AC and DC GRND/FLT busbars are connected to AC BUS 2 and DC BUS 2.

Ident.: DSC-24-20-00000997.0001001 / 17 FEB 11
Applicable to: ALL
(This panel is located closed to the external power connector)
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-20 P 9/24

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(1) EXT PWR A (B) not in Use

This white light comes on to inform the ground personnel that the ground power unit is not
supplying the aircraft network and can be disconnected. It goes off if EXT A (B) is in use.
(2) EXT PWR A (B) Avail
This amber light comes on to indicate that external power is available and the voltage is
correct.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-20 P 10/24

FCOM ←D 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ELEC AC ECAM PAGE

Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-24-20-A-00018028.0001001 / 29 JUN 16
FLIGHT CONFIGURATION
(1) IDG Indications
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-20 P 11/24

FCOM E→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(A)
IDG Indication:
‐ normally white
‐ amber in case of:
• IDG outlet temperature overheat (above 185 °C) or,
• IDG oil low pressure or,
• IDG disconnection.
(B)
IDG number:
‐ white if associated engine is running
‐ amber if stopped.
(C)
Outlet oil temperature:
‐ Normally green.
‐ Green, pulsing in case of advisory (above 151 °C).
‐ Amber in case of overheat (above 185 °C).
(D)
DISC/LO PR indication:
‐ DISC appears in amber, if the IDG is disconnected.
‐ LO PR appears in amber, if an oil low pressure occurs when the IDG is connected.
It is inhibited at low engine speed (N2 below 14 %).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-20 P 12/24

FCOM ←E→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(2) GEN 1 (or 2) indications

When the GEN pushbutton is OFF:
(A) The GEN number is white, if the associated engine is running. It becomes amber,
when the associated engine stops.
(B) The GEN indication is amber.
(C) The OFF indication is white.
When the GEN pushbutton is ON:
(A) The arrow indication is green, when the generator line contactor is in line.
(B) The GEN number is white, if the associated engine is running. It becomes amber,
when the associated engine stops.
(C) The GEN indication is normally white. It becomes amber, when the generator fails,
or when the associated engine stops.
(D) The GEN load is normally green. It becomes amber, if the load is greater than
108 %, for more than 10 s.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-20 P 13/24

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(E) The GEN voltage is normally green. It becomes amber below 110 V, or above
120 V.
(F) The GEN frequency is normally green. It becomes amber below 390 Hz, or above
410 Hz.
(3) Bus bar indication
The bus bar indication is normally green. It becomes amber, when the corresponding bar is
not powered.
(4) TR indication
The TR indication is normally white. It becomes amber, when the TR fails or in case of
abnormal current.
(5) Galley indication
The following legend appears in white, when applicable, depending on the order of priority
(1: highest priority):
1. COMMERCIAL OFF
2. GALLEY SHED
3. GALLEY PARTIALLY SHED
Ident.: DSC-24-20-A-00001000.0002001 / 09 OCT 12
GROUND CONFIGURATION
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-20 P 14/24

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(1) APU Generator

‐ When APU MASTER SW pushbutton is off:
‐ When APU MASTER SW pushbutton is ON and APU GEN pushbutton is OFF:
‐ When APU MASTER SW pushbutton is ON and APU GEN pushbutton is on:
(A)
‐ green when APU generator supplies one or more AC bus bar
‐ white otherwise
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-20 P 15/24

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(B) same logic as engine generator

(2) External power A (External power B symbol appears beside with the same principle):
(only displayed when aircraft is on ground)
‐ When external power is not available
‐ When external power is available
(A)
‐ green when external power supplies one or more bus bar
‐ white otherwise
(B) white
(C) same as engine generator
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-20 P 16/24

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-24-20-A-00001026.0001001 / 16 MAR 11
EMER CONFIGURATION
(1) Emergency Generator

‐ When the emergency generator contactor is closed:
(A) same logic as engine generator

(B) green
‐ When the EMER GEN Contactor is open:
EMER : It is white.
GEN▹
EMER GEN : It becomes amber when faulty.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-20 P 17/24

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(2) Static Inverter

Same logic as the emergency generator.
(3) AC ESS BUS
‐ It is normally green
‐ It becomes amber when the bus is not supplied.
(4) SHED Indication
It appears in amber, when AC ESS SHED BUS is not supplied.
(5) LND RCVRY indication
Appears in green when LAND RECOVERY pushbutton is pressed.
ELEC DC ECAM PAGE

Ident.: DSC-24-20-00001028.0002001 / 22 MAY 12
Applicable to: ALL
NORMAL CONFIGURATION
(1) TR 1 (or TR 2 or APU TR) Power Supply

‐ It is normally white
‐ its becomes amber when the busbar is not powered.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-20 P 18/24

FCOM ← E to F → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(2) ESS TR Power Supply
(A) Appears in white, when the AC 1 busbar supplies the TR.

(B) Appears in white, when the AC 2 busbar supplies the TR.
(C) Appears in white, when the emergency generator is not failed, and supplies the ESS
TR.
Appears in amber, when the emergency generator is failed, and is connected to the
ESS TR.
(D) Appears in amber in all other cases (ESS TR not supplied, or information not
available).
(3) Transformer Rectifier (1, 2, APU, and ESS)
(A) TR Indication:
‐ Appears in white
‐ Appears in amber, when the voltage or the current (value) is abnormal, or when the
TR is failed (overheat, minimum current, overcurrent, open or short circuit).
(B) Voltage:
‐ Appears in green
‐ Appears in amber, when the voltage is less than 25 V, or greater than 31 V.
Note: For APU TR, voltage indication remains green, even if abnormal during
APU start.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-20 P 19/24

FCOM ←F→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(C) Current:
‐ Appears in green
‐ Appears in amber, when the TR is failed or the current is less than 2 A.
(4) DC BUS bars
‐ normally green
‐ amber if no voltage on the bar
(5) Batteries
‐ if BAT pb is selected OFF
‐ if BAT pb is selected AUTO
(A) BAT Indication

‐ normally white
‐ amber if the battery is faulty
(B) Voltage
‐ normally green
‐ amber below 25 V or above 31 V
(C) Current (charge or discharge):
‐ normally green
‐ amber if discharge current is above 5 A.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-20 P 20/24

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Note: For APU battery, even if voltage or current is abnormal, the values remain green
during APU start.
EMERGENCY CONFIGURATION
(1) DC BAT–BAT Connection

‐ Battery Line Contactor open:
nothing displayed
‐ Battery Line Contactor closed:
↓ : battery charge
green
↑ : battery discharge
amber
(2) DC ESS–BAT Connection
↓ : appears when the contactor is closed. (Batteries supplying DC ESS bus)
amber
(3) Static Inverter
‐ normally white
‐ amber when the static inverter is faulty.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-20 P 21/24

FCOM ←F 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
C/B ECAM PAGE

Ident.: DSC-24-20-00001049.0001001 / 17 FEB 11
Applicable to: ALL
NO C/B PULLED
(1) Displayed in green when no circuit breaker is pulled.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-20 P 22/24

FCOM G 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
C/B PULLED
Ident.: DSC-24-20-00018032.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) Open Circuit Breaker Identification
The last tripped Circuit Breakers is displayed on the top of the screen.
All Circuit Breakers are monitored except commercial Circuit Breakers.
(2) Circuit Breakers Page Overflow Symbol
Displayed in green when pulled Circuit Breakers list is not closed.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-20 P 23/24

FCOM H→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Note: 1. To display the next page, press again Circuit Breaker pushbutton or CLEAR
pushbutton on the ECAM control panel.
2. A maximum of three pages is available.
MEMO DISPLAY
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-24-20-B-00017192.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
ELEC EXT PWR : This memo appears in green if external power is available. It becomes
amber if more than one engine is running.
Ident.: DSC-24-20-B-00017193.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
EMER GEN : This memo appears in green when emergency generator is running.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-24-20 P 24/24

FCOM ← H to I 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY

AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
UNCONTROLLED COPY
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
DSC-25-10 Flight Deck

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Principles for pushbuttons with Integrated Indications............................................................................................ B
General Arrangement.............................................................................................................................................. C
DSC-25-10-20 Cockpit Plan

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Right Rear Corner................................................................................................................................................... B
Left Rear Corner......................................................................................................................................................C
DSC-25-10-30 Seats
Pilot Seats................................................................................................................................................................A
Third Occupant Seat................................................................................................................................................B
Pilot and Third Occupant Seat Mechanical Adjustment..........................................................................................C
Pilot Seat Electrical Adjustment.............................................................................................................................. D
Headrest Adjustment............................................................................................................................................... E
Pilot Seat Inboard Armrest Adjustment................................................................................................................... F
Pilot Seat Outboard Armrest Adjustment................................................................................................................G
Fourth Occupant Seat............................................................................................................................................. H
DSC-25-10-40 Main Instrument Panel

Main Instrument Panel - Captain Side.................................................................................................................... A
Main Instrument Panel - First Officer Side..............................................................................................................B
DSC-25-10-50 Pedestal
Pedestal................................................................................................................................................................... A
DSC-25-10-60 Overhead Panel

Overhead Panel....................................................................................................................................................... A
DSC-25-10-70 Foot Warmer

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Controls.................................................................................................................................................................... B
DSC-25-20 Pax Entertainment & Connectivity Systems

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-25-20-20 In Seat Power Supply System (ISPSS) (If Installed)

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

PAX PERSONAL ELEC SPLY pb-sw  ............................................................................................................A
DSC-25-20-30 Video Control Center (VCC) (If Installed)

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-25-20-40 In-Flight Entertainment Center (IFEC) (If Installed)

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-25-20-50 Cabin Connectivity System (If Installed)

DSC-25-20-50-10 Introduction
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................A

PASSENGER INFORMATION pb-sw  ............................................................................................................ A
PAX COM pb-sw  ............................................................................................................................................B
PORTABLE EQPT & WIRELESS pb-sw  ....................................................................................................... C

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FLIGHT DECK - GENERAL
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-25-10-10-00020758.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The aircraft and system controls, required for piloting the aircraft, are arranged in such a way that
the crew faces forward and all crewmembers can monitor instruments and systems. The designers
concentrated system controls on the overhead panel by making extensive use of pushbuttons,
directly installed in the system synoptic.
Note: This chapter describes the panels and equipment of the basic aircraft configuration, and
may not correspond to the customized configuration of a specific aircraft.
For more information on the installed equipment or panels, refer to the relevant chapter's
system description.
PRINCIPLES FOR PUSHBUTTONS WITH INTEGRATED INDICATIONS

Ident.: DSC-25-10-10-00000082.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
Whenever possible, pushbuttons used for corrective actions, have integrated status and failure
indications.
The pushbutton positions, and their illuminated indications, follow the “lights out” principle.
‐ While corresponding to particular aircraft configurations, indications also have the following color
codes :
• Warnings
RED : A failure requiring immediate action.
• Cautions
AMBER : A failure, of which the flight crew should be aware, but does not call for
immediate action.
• Indications
GREEN : For normal system operation.
BLUE : For normal operation of a system used temporarily.
WHITE : ‐ For an abnormal pushbutton position.
‐ For a test result or maintenance information.
When the aircraft is in normal configuration, only green lights can be permanently lit, whereas
blue lights can be lit intermittently.
‐ Pushbutton positions :
POSITION BASIC FUNCTION
Pressed In ON, AUTO, OVRD
Released Out OFF, MAN
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-10-10 P 1/2

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FLIGHT DECK - GENERAL
OPERATING MANUAL
Note: 1. Certain pushbutton lights have two dots, indicating that the corresponding part of the
pushbutton is not used.
2. Certain pushbuttons do not remain pressed in. These are referred to as “Momentary
Action” pushbuttons.
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
Ident.: DSC-25-10-10-00019027.0001001 / 20 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-10-10 P 2/2

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FLIGHT DECK - COCKPIT PLAN
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-25-10-20-00000085.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The cockpit can accomodate two crew members plus two other occupants.
The two pilot seats are mounted on columns.
The third occupant seat is also mounted on column and can rotate.
The fourth occupant seat is a folding seat.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-10-20 P 1/4

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
RIGHT REAR CORNER

Ident.: DSC-25-10-20-00000088.0001001 / 20 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-10-20 P 2/4

FCOM B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
LEFT REAR CORNER

Ident.: DSC-25-10-20-00019028.0001001 / 20 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-10-20 P 3/4

FCOM C 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-10-20 P 4/4

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FLIGHT DECK - SEATS
OPERATING MANUAL
PILOT SEATS
Ident.: DSC-25-10-30-00019030.0002001 / 20 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The pilot seats are column-mounted and electrically adjustable.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-10-30 P 1/6

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
THIRD OCCUPANT SEAT

Ident.: DSC-25-10-30-00019040.0002001 / 20 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
PILOT AND THIRD OCCUPANT SEAT MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT

Ident.: DSC-25-10-30-00000096.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
To adjust a seat mechanically, the occupant must lift the appropriate control handle. This unlocks
the seat so that it may be moved. Releasing the control handle returns it to the springloaded locked
position. Pilot seat mechanical adjustment is a backup : The seat should be adjusted electrically.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-10-30 P 2/6

FCOM B to C → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
When aligned with the aircraft's centerline, and in the maximum forward position, the third occupant's
seat can be rotated by using the rotation lever, located on the seat base.
PILOT SEAT ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT

Ident.: DSC-25-10-30-00000098.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
To adjust a seat electrically, the occupant must press the appropriate control switch in the desired
direction, and release it when the seat reaches the desired position. The switch then returns to the
springloaded neutral position.
To adjust the vertical position of the lumbar cushion, the occupant must :
‐ Pull the control out to the unlocked position,
‐ Turn the control to adjust the position of the cushion, and
‐ Push the control into the locked position.
HEADREST ADJUSTMENT
Ident.: DSC-25-10-30-00000101.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
To adjust the headrest in inclination, the occupant must press the inclination control button, and
release it to lock the position.
To control the height of the headrest, the occupant must push it horizontally, then adjust the height.
Once released, it locks the position.
PILOT SEAT INBOARD ARMREST ADJUSTMENT

Ident.: DSC-25-10-30-00000102.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
To adjust the inboard armrest, the occupant must turn the knurled knob, located on the bottom
surface of the armrest.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-10-30 P 3/6

FCOM ← C to F 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
PILOT SEAT OUTBOARD ARMREST ADJUSTMENT

Ident.: DSC-25-10-30-00000103.0001001 / 20 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-10-30 P 4/6

FCOM G→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
The position of the armrest is adjustable as follows :

A - Height adjustment
B - Pitch adjustment
The armrest also has a memory display (C) that shows pitch and height.
FOURTH OCCUPANT SEAT

Ident.: DSC-25-10-30-00019041.0001001 / 20 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The fourth occupant seat is a folding seat.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-10-30 P 5/6

FCOM ← G to H 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-10-30 P 6/6

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FLIGHT DECK - MAIN INSTRUMENT PANEL
OPERATING MANUAL
MAIN INSTRUMENT PANEL - CAPTAIN SIDE

Ident.: DSC-25-10-40-00019117.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-10-40 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FLIGHT DECK - MAIN INSTRUMENT PANEL
OPERATING MANUAL
MAIN INSTRUMENT PANEL - FIRST OFFICER SIDE

Ident.: DSC-25-10-40-00019143.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-10-40 P 2/2

FCOM B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FLIGHT DECK - PEDESTAL
OPERATING MANUAL
PEDESTAL
Ident.: DSC-25-10-50-00019170.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-10-50 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FLIGHT DECK - PEDESTAL
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-10-50 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FLIGHT DECK - OVERHEAD PANEL
OPERATING MANUAL
OVERHEAD PANEL
Ident.: DSC-25-10-60-00019193.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-10-60 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FLIGHT DECK - OVERHEAD PANEL
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-10-60 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FLIGHT DECK - FOOT WARMER
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-25-10-70-00019209.0001001 / 20 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The foot warmer system  has a heating panel attached to each pedal. The temperature of the
heating panels is about 20 °C (68 °F).
CONTROLS
Ident.: DSC-25-10-70-00019210.0001001 / 20 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The Foot Warmer ON/OFF control switch  is located on the main instrument panel, on the
captain's and first officer's side.
FOOT WARMER SW
Operation of the associated heating panel on captain's pedals or first officer's pedals.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-10-70 P 1/2

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FLIGHT DECK - FOOT WARMER
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-10-70 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW PAX ENTERTAINMENT & CONNECTIVITY SYSTEMS - GENERAL
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-25-20-10-00015512.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The following table provides the list of controls dedicated to Pax Entertainment & Connectivity
Systems.
For each pb-sw / sw that is set to OFF, the table provides the associated equipments (functions) that
are cut-off.
P/B  EQUIPMENTS (FUNCTIONS) DESCRIPTIONS
IFEC IFE Refer to DSC-25-20-40 General
NO PED Signs Refer to DSC-33-40-10 Overhead Panel
PASSENGER INFORMATION Airshow, telephony Refer to DSC-25-20-50-20 PASSENGER
INFORMATION pb-sw (If Installed)
PAX BBAND Mobile, Wifi (Elec) Refer to DSC-26-59-10 Smoke Detection
PAX COM Mobile, Wifi (Elec) Refer to DSC-25-20-50-20 PAX COM
pb-sw (If Installed)
PAX PERSONAL Mobile, Wifi, Supply Refer to DSC-25-20-20-20 PAX
ELEC SUPPLY PERSONAL ELEC SPLY pb-sw (If
Installed)
Refer to DSC-26-56-20 Cabin System
PAX SYS Mobile, Wifi, IFE, Seat actuators, PED
Panel
PORTABLE EQPT Mobile, Wifi (Function) Refer to DSC-25-20-50-20 PORTABLE
& WIRELESS EQPT & WIRELESS pb-sw (If Installed)
VCC IFE Video Part Refer to DSC-25-20-30 General
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-20-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW PAX ENTERTAINMENT & CONNECTIVITY SYSTEMS - GENERAL
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-20-10 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
A330/A340 PAX ENTERTAINMENT & CONNECTIVITY SYSTEMS - IN
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL SEAT POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM (ISPSS) (IF INSTALLED)
General
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-25-20-20-10-00015513.0001001 / 05 JAN 15
Applicable to: ALL
The In-Seat Power Supply System (ISPSS) provides electrical power to the In-Seat Power Supply
Unit (ISPSU) outlets, located in the passenger seats, and enables the use of Portable Electronic
Devices  (PED).
It is possible to simultaneously disconnect power from all ISPSUs via a single switch  located in
the cockpit or a pushbutton  located in the forward cabin (FAP or VCC).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-20-20-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 18 MAR 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
FLIGHT CREW
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-20-20-10 P 2/2

FCOM 18 MAR 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
FLIGHT CREW
PAX PERSONAL ELEC SPLY PB-SW 

Ident.: DSC-25-20-20-20-00015514.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The pushbutton-switch described here below is installed on the 272 VU panel on the overhead panel.
Note: The ISPSU is controlled by the PAX PERSONAL ELEC SPLY pb-sw or by the PAX SYS
pb-sw (for description of PAX SYS pb-sw, Refer to DSC-26-56-20 Cabin System Panel).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-20-20-20 P 1/2

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
FLIGHT CREW
AUTO : Powers all ISPSUs.

Note: • In case of rapid decompression, the system is automatically
disconnected.
• In case of slat extensions (during landing or takeoff) the system can
automatically deactivates all PED outlets  .
OFF : The following equipments are cut-off:

• ISPSU,
• Seat actuators,
• PED  .
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-20-20-20 P 2/2

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
A330/A340 PAX ENTERTAINMENT & CONNECTIVITY SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL - VIDEO CONTROL CENTER (VCC) (IF INSTALLED)
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-25-20-30-00015522.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The Video Control Center (VCC)  delivers the audio and video features of the IFE.
For description of VCC pb-sw  , Refer to DSC-26-56-20 Cabin System Panel.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-20-30 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL - VIDEO CONTROL CENTER (VCC) (IF INSTALLED)
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-20-30 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
A330/A340 PAX ENTERTAINMENT & CONNECTIVITY SYSTEMS -
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT CENTER (IFEC) (IF INSTALLED)
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-25-20-40-00015586.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The In-Flight Entertainment Center (IFEC)  delivers entertainment features such as: music,
video, and games.
For description of IFEC pb-sw  , Refer to DSC-26-56-20 Cabin System Panel.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-20-40 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
A330/A340 PAX ENTERTAINMENT & CONNECTIVITY SYSTEMS -
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL IN-FLIGHT ENTERTAINMENT CENTER (IFEC) (IF INSTALLED)
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-20-40 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL - CABIN CONNECTIVITY SYSTEM (IF INSTALLED)
Introduction
INTRODUCTION
Ident.: DSC-25-20-50-10-00015711.0001001 / 05 JAN 15
Applicable to: ALL
The Cabin Connectivity System provides a connection to the World Wide Web for passengers and
connected cabin systems. The passengers can access the Internet wireless or, optionally, by wire.
In addition, the Cabin Connectivity System provides, optionally, telephone connection to passengers.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-20-50-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 18 MAR 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
FLIGHT CREW
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-20-50-10 P 2/2

FCOM 18 MAR 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
FLIGHT CREW
PASSENGER INFORMATION PB-SW 

Ident.: DSC-25-20-50-20-00015589.0001001 / 05 JAN 15
Applicable to: ALL
OFF : The Airshow and the Air-to-ground telephone are cut-off. When the pushbutton-switch
is released, the OFF light comes on in white.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-20-50-20 P 1/4

FCOM A 18 MAR 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
FLIGHT CREW
PAX COM PB-SW 

Ident.: DSC-25-20-50-20-00015588.0001001 / 05 JAN 15
Applicable to: ALL
OFF : The Cabin Connectivity system is cut-off. When the pushbutton-switch is released, the
OFF light comes on in white.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-20-50-20 P 2/4

FCOM B 18 MAR 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
FLIGHT CREW
PORTABLE EQPT & WIRELESS PB-SW 

Ident.: DSC-25-20-50-20-00015712.0001001 / 05 JAN 15
Applicable to: ALL
The pushbutton-switch here below is installed on the 265 VU panel on the overhead panel.
The flight crew can disable the Cabin Connectivity System (Internet and Mobile telephony) by
using the PORTABLE EQPT & WIRELESS pb-sw  .
OFF : When pressed, it inhibits the Cabin Connectivity System.
Note: Depending on aircraft customization, the ECAM displays GSM < 4 MN,
meaning that the disconnection could take up to 4 min.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-20-50-20 P 3/4

FCOM C→ 18 MAR 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT
FLIGHT CREW
ON : When pressed again, it activates the Cabin Connectivity System.

Note: During the takeoff roll and the landing roll, the connection is automatically
inhibited.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-25-20-50-20 P 4/4

FCOM ←C 18 MAR 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY

AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
UNCONTROLLED COPY
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
DSC-26-10 General
Description............................................................................................................................................................... A
DSC-26-20 Engine and APU

DSC-26-20-10 System Description
Fire Detection...........................................................................................................................................................A
Fire Extinguishing.................................................................................................................................................... B
Fire Detection and Detection Fault Logic............................................................................................................... C
DSC-26-20-20 Controls and Indicators

ENG FIRE Panel..................................................................................................................................................... A
APU FIRE Panel......................................................................................................................................................B
ENG MASTER Panel.............................................................................................................................................. C
External Power Panel..............................................................................................................................................D
Maintenance Panel.................................................................................................................................................. E
DSC-26-30 Avionics Bay

Smoke Detection......................................................................................................................................................A

VENTILATION Panel............................................................................................................................................... A
DSC-26-40 Lavatory
Waste Bin Fire Extinguishing.................................................................................................................................. B
DSC-26-50 Cargo Compartments

Fire Extinguishing.................................................................................................................................................... B

CARGO SMOKE Panel........................................................................................................................................... A
DSC-26-56 VCC/IFEC Smoke Detection


FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

Cabin System Panel................................................................................................................................................ A
DSC-26-59 Broadband System


Cabin System Panel................................................................................................................................................ A

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW GENERAL
OPERATING MANUAL
DESCRIPTION
Ident.: DSC-26-10-00000376.0002001 / 27 JAN 11
Applicable to: ALL
Aircraft Fire Protection Systems Include:

‐ Fire and overheat detection and extinguishing systems for the:
• Engines
• APU
‐ Smoke detection and extinguishing for the:
• Cargo compartments
• Lavatories
‐ Smoke detection for the:
• Avionic bay
‐ Portable fire extinguishers for the:
• Flight compartment
• Passenger cabin
• Avionic bay

FCOM A 07 APR 11
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW GENERAL
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM 07 APR 11
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW ENGINE AND APU - SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
FIRE DETECTION
Ident.: DSC-26-20-10-00000381.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The engines and the APU each have a fire and overheat detection system consisting of :
‐ Two identical gas detection loops (A and B) mounted in parallel.
‐ A Fire Detection Unit (FDU).
The gas detection loops consist of :
‐ Four sensing elements for each engine, located in the pylon nacelle, in the engine core (gearbox
and turbine) sections.
‐ One sensing element in the APU compartment.
When a sensing element is subjected to heat, it sends a signal to the fire detection unit.
As soon as loops A and B detect temperature at a preset level, it triggers the fire warning system.
A fault in one loop (break or loss of electrical supply) does not affect the warning system. The
unaffected loop still protects the aircraft.
If the system detects an APU fire while the aircraft is on the ground, it shuts down the APU
automatically and discharges extinguishing agent.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-20-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW ENGINE AND APU - SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
FIRE EXTINGUISHING
Ident.: DSC-26-20-10-00021202.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
ENGINES
Each engine has two extinguisher bottles equipped with electrically-operated squibs to discharge
their agents. Each squib has a dual electric supply. The flight crew controls the discharge of the
extinguisher bottles from the ENG FIRE panel in the cockpit.
APU
The APU has one fire extinguisher bottle that has two electrically-operated squibs to discharge its
agent.
The flight crew controls the discharge from the APU FIRE panel in the cockpit.
When an APU fire is detected on the ground, the APU automatically shuts down, and the
extinguisher bottle discharges automatically.
FIRE DETECTION AND DETECTION FAULT LOGIC

Ident.: DSC-26-20-10-00021201.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
Fire detection units process all the warnings and cautions originating in the sensing elements:
‐ A fire warning appears if:
• Both loop A and B send a fire signal, or
• One loop sends a fire signal and the other one is failed, or
• Breaks occur in both loops within 5 s of each other (flame effect), or
• A test is performed on the associated FIRE panel
‐ A loop-fault caution appears if:
• One loop is failed, or
• Both loops are failed, or
• The FDU fails.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-20-10 P 2/2

FCOM B to C 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW ENGINE AND APU - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
ENG FIRE PANEL

Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-26-20-20-10-00021185.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Ident.: DSC-26-20-20-10-00021186.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
ENG FIRE PB
The pushbutton normal position is in, and guarded. When the flight crew pushes it, the pushbutton
is released and sends an electrical signal that performs the following for the corresponding engine:
‐ Silences the aural fire warning
‐ Arms the fire extinguisher squibs
‐ Closes the low-pressure fuel valve
‐ Closes the hydraulic fire shut off valve
‐ Closes the engine bleed valve
‐ Closes the pack flow control valve
‐ Cuts off the FADEC power supply
‐ Deactivates the IDG.
The red lights come on, regardless of the pushbutton position, whenever the fire warning of the
corresponding engine is activated.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-20-20 P 1/8

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-26-20-20-10-00021187.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
AGENT 1(2) PB-SW

Both AGENT pushbutton-switches of an affected engine become active when the flight crew
releases the ENG FIRE pb.
A brief push on the pushbutton-switch discharges the corresponding fire agent.
‐ "SQUIB" comes on white when the flight crew releases the associated ENG FIRE pb to help the
flight crew identify the AGENT pb-sw to be activated
‐ "DISCH" comes on amber when the corresponding fire extinguisher bottle has lost pressure.
Ident.: DSC-26-20-20-10-00021188.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
TEST PB
This pushbutton tests the operation of the fire detection and extinguishing system for the engines.
When pressed:
‐ A continuous repetitive chime sounds
‐ The MASTER WARNING lights flash
‐ The ENG FIRE warning appears on ECAM
‐ On the ENG FIRE panel:
• The ENG FIRE pushbuttons light up red
• The SQUIB lights come on white if discharge supplies are available
• The DISCH lights come on amber
‐ On the ENG MASTER panel (pedestal):
• The FIRE lights come on red.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-20-20 P 2/8

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
APU FIRE PANEL

Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-26-20-20-20-00021189.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Ident.: DSC-26-20-20-20-00021190.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
APU FIRE PB
The pushbutton normal position is in, and guarded. When the flight crew pushes it, the pushbutton
is released and sends an electrical signal that performs the following for the APU:
‐ Shuts down the APU
‐ Silences the aural warning
‐ Arms the squib on the APU fire extinguisher
‐ Closes the low-pressure fuel valve
‐ Shuts off the APU fuel pump
‐ Closes the APU bleed valve and X bleed valve and deactivates the APU generator.
The red lights come on, regardless of the pushbutton position, whenever an APU fire warning is
activated.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-20-20 P 3/8

FCOM B→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-26-20-20-20-00021191.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
AGENT PB-SW
The APU AGENT pb-sw becomes active when the flight crew releases the APU FIRE pb.
A brief push on the pushbutton-switch discharges the corresponding fire agent.
‐ "SQUIB" comes on white when the flight crew releases the APU FIRE pb
‐ "DISCH" comes on amber when the fire extinguisher bottle has lost pressure.
Note: A red disk, which is outside at the rear of the fuselage, signals that the agent is not
discharged overboard due to bottle overpressure.
Ident.: DSC-26-20-20-20-00021192.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
TEST PB
This pushbutton tests the operation of the APU fire detection and extinguishing system.
When pressed:
‐ A continuous repetitive chime (CRC) sounds
‐ The APU FIRE warning appears on ECAM.
‐ On the APU FIRE panel:
• The APU FIRE pb lights up red
• The SQUIB light comes on white if discharge supplies are available
• The DISCH light comes on amber.
Note: The automatic shutdown of the APU on the ground will not occur while the flight crew is
performing this test.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-20-20 P 4/8

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ENG MASTER PANEL

Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-26-20-20-30-00021193.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Ident.: DSC-26-20-20-30-00021194.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
ENG FIRE LIGHT

This light identifies the engine to be shutdown in the case of fire.
The light comes on red when an engine fire warning is triggered.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-20-20 P 5/8

FCOM C 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-26-20-20-40-00021195.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Ident.: DSC-26-20-20-40-00021196.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
APU FIRE LIGHT

The red APU FIRE light comes on and an external warning horn sounds when the system detects
an APU fire.
The APU fire extinguisher discharges automatically 3 s after the appearance of the fire warning.
The light goes out when the fire has been extinguished.
Ident.: DSC-26-20-20-40-00021197.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
APU SHUT OFF PB

This pushbutton is guarded.
When there is an APU fire and this button is pressed, it confirms that the APU has shut down
automatically and silences the external warning horn.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-20-20 P 6/8

FCOM D 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
MAINTENANCE PANEL
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-26-20-20-50-00021198.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Ident.: DSC-26-20-20-50-00021199.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
APU AUTO EXTING RESET PB

Pressing this button resets the automatic shutdown function.
During the test or if the fire signal is active, the reset is inoperative.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-20-20 P 7/8

FCOM E 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-20-20 P 8/8

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW AVIONICS BAY - SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
SMOKE DETECTION
Ident.: DSC-26-30-10-00021204.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The smoke detection system of the avionics bay consists of:

‐ Two smoke detectors, in the air extraction duct of the avionics ventilation system
‐ A Smoke Detection Control Unit (SDCU)  or a Cabin Intercommunication Data System (CIDS)
with a Smoke Detection Function (SDF)  , that receives signals from the smoke detectors, and
transmits them to the ECAM.
The avionics smoke warning triggers, if:
‐ Both smoke detectors detect smoke for more than 5 s, or
‐ One smoke detector detects smoke for more than 5 s, and the other smoke detector is inoperative.
If smoke is detected in the avionics bay:
‐ A Repetitive Chime (CRC) sounds
‐ The ECAM SMOKE AVNCS VENT SMOKE alert triggers
‐ The SMOKE light, on the VENTILATION panel, comes on.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-30-10 P 1/2

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW AVIONICS BAY - SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-30-10 P 2/2

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW AVIONICS BAY - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
VENTILATION PANEL
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-26-30-20-10-00021205.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Ident.: DSC-26-30-20-10-00021206.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
AVNCS SMOKE LIGHT

SMOKE light : Comes on red along with a warning on ECAM, when smoke is detected in the
avionics ventilation duct.
Note: For test, Refer to DSC-26-50-20 TEST pb.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-30-20 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW AVIONICS BAY - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-30-20 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW LAVATORY - SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
SMOKE DETECTION
Ident.: DSC-26-40-10-00021207.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The smoke detection system of the lavatory consists of:

‐ Smoke detectors, in the air extraction duct of each lavatory
with a Smoke Detection Function (SDF)  that triggers the applicable alerts (cockpit and cabin).
In the case of smoke in a lavatory, the smoke detector sends a signal to the SDCU or the CIDS-SDF,
which transmits it to the Flight Warning Computer (FWC) for warning in the cockpit and in the cabin.
WASTE BIN FIRE EXTINGUISHING

Ident.: DSC-26-40-10-00000452.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
There is an automatic fire extinguishing system in the wastebin of each lavatory.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-40-10 P 1/2

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW LAVATORY - SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-40-10 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW CARGO COMPARTMENTS - SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
SMOKE DETECTION
Ident.: DSC-26-50-10-10-00021209.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The smoke detection system of the cargo compartments consists of:

‐ Smoke detectors, that are housed in pairs in cavities within the cargo compartment ceiling panels
There are:
• Two cavities in the forward cargo compartment
• Two cavities in the aft cargo compartment
• One cavity in the bulk cargo compartment.
with a Smoke Detection Function (SDF)  , that receives signals from the smoke detectors, and
transmits them to the ECAM.
If smoke is detected in the cargo compartment:
‐ The Continuous Repetitive Chime (CRC) sounds
‐ The associated cargo compartment SMOKE alert is triggered
‐ The COND SD page is displayed
‐ On the CARGO SMOKE panel, the associated SMOKE light comes on in amber.
When the cargo smoke warning triggers, the isolation valves of the cargo ventilation system  of
the affected compartment close automatically, and the extraction fan stops.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-50-10 P 1/4

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-26-50-10-10-00021213.0003001 / 17 MAR 17

The cargo smoke warning triggers, if:

‐ Both smoke detectors detect smoke, or
‐ One smoke detector detects smoke, and the other smoke detector is inoperative
‐ Two smoke detectors detect smoke in different cavities.
Ident.: DSC-26-50-10-10-00021213.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
The cargo smoke warning triggers, if:

‐ Both smoke detectors detect smoke, or
‐ One smoke detector detects smoke, and the other smoke detector is inoperative.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-50-10 P 2/4

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
FIRE EXTINGUISHING
Ident.: DSC-26-50-10-00021210.0003001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
A fire extinguishing system protects the cargo compartments.

Two fire bottles with two discharge heads, one for each compartment, supply four nozzles:
‐ Two nozzles in the forward cargo compartment
‐ One nozzle in the aft cargo compartment
‐ One nozzle in the bulk cargo compartment.
Pressing the AGENT pb, associated with the FWD (AFT/BULK) compartment, ignites the squib of the
two bottles. Bottle 1 discharges its extinguishing agent into that compartment, and then bottle 2.
Bottle 1 discharges in approximately 60 s. A flow metering system controls the discharge of bottle 2,
to ensure sufficient agent concentration for 260 min.
The SDCU  or the CIDS-SDF  monitors squib integrity and bottle pressure.
When bottle 1(2) is discharged, the BTL1(BTL2) light comes on white.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-50-10 P 3/4

FCOM B→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-50-10 P 4/4

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW CARGO COMPARTMENTS - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
CARGO SMOKE PANEL

Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-26-50-20-10-00021215.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Ident.: DSC-26-50-20-10-00021216.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
FWD(AFT) AGENT PB-SW

This pushbutton-switch is guarded.
When pressed, the associated squib is ignited for discharge of the extinguishing agent in the
associated cargo compartment (FWD or AFT/BULK).
SMOKE light : Comes on red, along with an associated ECAM warning, when smoke is
detected in the associated compartment.
SQUIB light : Comes on white, in case of a positive test.
Ident.: DSC-26-50-20-10-00021217.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
DISCH LIGHT
The BTL1(2) light comes on white, when the associated bottle has discharged.
Ident.: DSC-26-50-20-10-00021218.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
TEST PB
Tests the operation of the cargo smoke detection system.
When pressed for at least 3 s, and until it is released:
‐ The smoke detectors in the FWD, AFT, and BULK CARGO compartment and the avionics bay
are tested in sequence
‐ The isolation valves of the cargo ventilation system  close
‐ BTL1(2) lights come on white
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-50-20 P 1/2

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW CARGO COMPARTMENTS - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
‐ SQUIB lights come on white, provided that one of the two squib filaments is serviceable
‐ SMOKE lights (AFT, FWD CARGO, and AVNCS) come on red on the overhead panel, the
ECAM displays the associated warnings, and a continuous repetitive chime sounds.
Note: Each SDCU  channel or SDF  controller generates its own warning, which
lasts approximately 25 s, with a delay of approximately 30 s between both. The test is
successful if an ECAM smoke warning is triggered at least once for each compartment
(avionics bay, forward, aft, and bulk cargo compartments).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-50-20 P 2/2

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW VCC/IFEC SMOKE DETECTION - SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
SMOKE DETECTION
Ident.: DSC-26-56-10-00021234.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The Video Control Center (VCC)  and the In-Flight Entertainment Center (IFEC)  each have a
smoke detection system.
When smoke is detected, the ECAM displays a warning in the cockpit.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-56-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW VCC/IFEC SMOKE DETECTION - SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-56-10 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW VCC/IFEC SMOKE DETECTION - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
CABIN SYSTEM PANEL

Ident.: DSC-26-56-20-00021235.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The pushbuttons described here below are installed on the cabin related panel (272 VU) on the
overhead panel.
The PAX SYS pb-sw can include the SMOKE warning label. In this case, only one pushbutton is
installed. Otherwise, the PAX SYS pb-sw can be associated to either VCC  pb-sw and/or IFEC
pb-sw  .
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-56-20 P 1/2

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW VCC/IFEC SMOKE DETECTION - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
PAX SYS OFF light : The following equipments are cut-off:

‐ ISPSU  (PED  , seat actuators)
‐ VCC 
‐ IFEC  .
VCC/IFEC OFF light : Electrical power to VCC  / IFEC  is cut-off.
SMOKE light : When smoke is detected in VCC  / IFEC  , the SMOKE light
comes on red, and the ECAM triggers the associated smoke warning.
Note: ISPSS, seat actuators, and PED  do not generate smoke
indication in the cockpit.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-56-20 P 2/2

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW BROADBAND SYSTEM - SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
SMOKE DETECTION
Ident.: DSC-26-59-10-00015686.0001001 / 05 JAN 15
Applicable to: ALL
The smoke detection system consists of two optical smoke detectors located in the ventilation
system of the corresponding Broadband System in the avionics compartment.
When smoke is detected, the smoke light on the PAX BBAND pb-sw on the overhead panel comes
on red along with the smoke ECAM warning.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-59-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW BROADBAND SYSTEM - SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-59-10 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW BROADBAND SYSTEM - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
CABIN SYSTEM PANEL

Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-26-59-20-10-00021249.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Ident.: DSC-26-59-20-10-00021250.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
PAX BBAND PB-SW 

SMOKE light : When smoke is detected in the Broadband System, the SMOKE light comes on
red, along with the corresponding ECAM warning.
If the pushbutton-switch is not pressed approximately 3 s following the smoke
warning activation, the ventilation extraction fan will automatically stop and
electrical power to the Broadband System is shut down.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-59-20 P 1/2

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FIRE PROTECTION
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW BROADBAND SYSTEM - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
OFF : Electrical power to the Broadband System is cut-off.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-26-59-20 P 2/2

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY

AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
UNCONTROLLED COPY
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
DSC-27-10 General
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Basic Principle......................................................................................................................................................... B
Control Surfaces...................................................................................................................................................... C
Cockpit Controls...................................................................................................................................................... D
Computers................................................................................................................................................................E
DSC-27-10-20 Architecture
General Architecture................................................................................................................................................ A
Pitch Control............................................................................................................................................................ B
Roll Control.............................................................................................................................................................. C
Speedbrake and Ground Spoiler Control................................................................................................................D
Yaw Control............................................................................................................................................................. E
DSC-27-20 Flight Control System

DSC-27-20-10 Normal Law
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-27-20-10-20 Pitch Control

Ground Mode........................................................................................................................................................... A
Flight Mode.............................................................................................................................................................. B
Flare Mode...............................................................................................................................................................C
Protections............................................................................................................................................................... D
DSC-27-20-10-30 Lateral Control

Lateral Normal Law................................................................................................................................................. A
Bank Angle Protection............................................................................................................................................. B
Sideslip Target.........................................................................................................................................................C
DSC-27-20-10-40 Maneuver Load Alleviation (MLA)

Maneuver Load Alleviation (MLA)........................................................................................................................... A
DSC-27-20-10-60 Turbulence Damping Function

Turbulence Damping Function................................................................................................................................ A
DSC-27-20-10-80 Aircraft Trimming

GENERAL................................................................................................................................................................ A

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

DSC-27-20-20 Reconfiguration Control Laws
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-27-20-20-20 Alternate Law

Abnormal Control Laws - In Detail-Alternate Law...................................................................................................A
ALT 1....................................................................................................................................................................... B
ALT 2....................................................................................................................................................................... C
DSC-27-20-20-30 Direct Law

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Reconfiguration Control Laws - PFD Display..........................................................................................................B
DSC-27-20-20-40 Abnormal Attitude Laws

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-27-20-20-50 Mechanical Back Up

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Pitch......................................................................................................................................................................... B
Lateral...................................................................................................................................................................... C

Pedestal................................................................................................................................................................... A
Lateral Consoles...................................................................................................................................................... B
Glareshield............................................................................................................................................................... C
Overhead Panel.......................................................................................................................................................D
Side Stick Indications on PFD.................................................................................................................................E
ECAM F/CTL Page.................................................................................................................................................. F
Memo Display..........................................................................................................................................................G
DSC-27-30 Flaps and Slats

DSC-27-30-10 Description
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Main Components....................................................................................................................................................B
Architecture.............................................................................................................................................................. C
Configurations.......................................................................................................................................................... D
Automatic Retraction System (ARS)....................................................................................................................... E
Flap Load Relief System (FLRS)............................................................................................................................ F
Retraction/Extension Schematic..............................................................................................................................G
Slats Alpha/Speed Lock Function........................................................................................................................... H
Signals to Other Systems......................................................................................................................................... I

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

Pedestal................................................................................................................................................................... A
ECAM Upper Display...............................................................................................................................................B

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW GENERAL - GENERAL
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-27-10-10-00000140.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The fly-by-wire system was designed and certified to render the new generation of aircraft even more
safe, cost effective, and pleasant to fly.
BASIC PRINCIPLE
Ident.: DSC-27-10-10-00000141.0002001 / 27 JAN 11
Applicable to: ALL
The flight control surfaces are all :

‐ Electrically-controlled, and
‐ Hydraulically-activated.
The stabilizer can also be mechanically-controlled.
Pilots use the sidesticks to fly the aircraft in pitch and roll (and in yaw, indirectly, through turn
coordination).
Computers interpret pilot input and move the flight control surfaces, as necessary, to follow their
orders.
However, when in normal law, regardless of the pilot's input, the computers will prevent excessive
maneuvers and exceedance of the safe envelope in pitch and roll axis.
However, as on conventional aircraft, the rudder has no such protection.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-10-10 P 1/6

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
CONTROL SURFACES
Ident.: DSC-27-10-10-00000156.0004001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
PITCH AXIS
Elevator control = Electrical
Stabilizer control = Electrical for normal or alternate control.
Mechanical for manual trim control
ROLL AXIS
Aileron control = Electrical
Spoiler control = Electrical
YAW AXIS
Rudder control = Electrical
OTHER CONTROLS
Speedbrakes = Electrical
Note: All surfaces are hydraulically-actuated.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-10-10 P 2/6

FCOM C 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
COCKPIT CONTROLS
Ident.: DSC-27-10-10-00000158.0002001 / 27 JAN 11
Applicable to: ALL
‐ Two sidestick controllers are used for pitch and roll manual control. One is on the CAPT's lateral
console, the other is on the FO's lateral console.
The two controllers are springloaded to neutral, and are not mechanically coupled.
Each controller independently sends electrical signals to the flight control computers.
‐ Two pairs of rigidly interconnected pedals ensure electrical control of the rudder.
‐ A speedbrake control lever is provided in the center pedestal.
‐ Two handwheels, on the center pedestal, are used to mechanically control the THS.
‐ A switch, installed on the center pedestal, ensures the rudder trim control.
‐ No manual aileron trim switch is provided.
COMPUTERS
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-27-10-10-A-00000159.0001001 / 27 JAN 11
GENERAL
Five flight control computers process pilot and autopilot inputs according to normal, alternate or
direct flight control laws.
The computers are:
Ident.: DSC-27-10-10-A-00000160.0003001 / 21 MAR 16
3 PRIM computers
(Flight Control Primary Computer – FCPC), each of which is used for :
‐ Normal, alternate, and direct control laws.
‐ Speedbrake and ground spoiler control.
‐ Protection speed computation.
‐ Rudder travel limit.
Ident.: DSC-27-10-10-A-00000162.0001001 / 27 JAN 11
2 SEC COMPUTERS
(Flight Control Secondary Computer – FCSC) for :
‐ Direct control laws, including yaw damper function.
‐ Rudder trim, and rudder travel limit.
One computer of any type is capable of controlling the aircraft and of assuring safe flight and
landing.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-10-10 P 3/6

FCOM D to E → 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
In normal operation, one PRIM computer is declared to be the master (P1). It processes the orders
and sends them to the other computers (P1 / P2 / P3 / S1 / S2), which will then execute them on
their related servo-control.
If one computer is unable to execute the orders sent by the master, another computer executes
the task of the affected computer (except for spoiler control).
If the master computer (P1) cannot be the master, then P2 (or P3, if P2 is not available) becomes
the master.
Note: When the green hydraulic system is lost, P2 replaces P1 as the master computer.
In case all PRIM computers are lost, each SEC is its own master and controls its associated
servoloop in direct law.
A single SEC can provide complete aircraft control in direct law.
Ident.: DSC-27-10-10-A-00000172.0004001 / 23 JUN 14
2 FCDC COMPUTERS
The FCDCs acquire data from the PRIMs and SECs and send this data to the EIS and CMC.
Note: On ground, a spurious "RUD TRV LIM" could be displayed on INOP SYS ECAM status
page, in case of one FCDC does not detect its ground condition. This message will
disappear as soon as the rudder control is pressurized by hydraulic.
Ident.: DSC-27-10-10-A-00003939.0001001 / 27 JAN 11
1 BACKUP CONTROL MODULE (BCM) COMPUTER

The BCM computer provides yaw damping, and direct rudder command with pedals, via an
independent unit, in case of:
‐ Total electrical failure, or
‐ Loss of rudder control due to a Flight Control Computer (PRIM and SEC) failure.
It includes:
‐ Its own electrical generator, referred to as the Backup Power Supply (BPS), which is supplied
by the B or Y hydraulic system
‐ Its own sensors (gyrometers and pedals deflection)
‐ Control of the B and Y hydraulic actuators.
When activated, as in yaw alternate law, there is no turn coordination.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-10-10 P 4/6

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-27-10-10-A-00003940.0003001 / 27 JAN 11
SCHEMATICS
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-10-10 P 5/6

FCOM ←E 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-10-10 P 6/6

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW GENERAL - ARCHITECTURE
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL ARCHITECTURE
Ident.: DSC-27-10-20-00000184.0003001 / 21 MAR 16
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-10-20 P 1/14

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-10-20 P 2/14

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
PITCH CONTROL
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-27-10-20-A-00000185.0001001 / 27 JAN 11
GENERAL
Two elevators and the trimmable horizontal stabilizer (THS) control the aircraft in pitch. The
maximum elevator deflection is 30 ° nose up and 15 ° nose down. The maximum THS deflection is
14 ° nose up and 2 ° nose down.
Ident.: DSC-27-10-20-A-00000187.0001001 / 30 JAN 13
ELECTRICAL CONTROL
‐ In normal operations, the PRIM 1 controls the elevators and the horizontal stabilizer, and the
green hydraulic jacks drive the left and right elevator surfaces.
The THS is driven by N° 1 of three electric motors.
‐ If a failure occurs in PRIM 1 or the associated hydraulic systems or hydraulic jacks, the system
shifts pitch control to PRIM 2. PRIM 2 then controls the elevators via the blue and yellow
hydraulic jacks and controls the THS via the N° 2 electric motor.
‐ If neither PRIM 1 nor PRIM 2 are available, the system shifts pitch control to SEC 1 for elevator
control, and to PRIM 3 for THS control via the N° 3 electric motor.
‐ In case of 3 PRIM failure, SEC 1 controls the elevator. Electrical control of THS is lost. THS
actuation is still available through manual pitch trim wheel control.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-10-20 P 3/14

FCOM B→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-27-10-20-A-00000188.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
MECHANICAL CONTROL
Mechanical control of the THS is available from the pitch trim wheel, at any time, if either the blue
or the yellow hydraulic system is functioning.
Mechanical control from the pitch trim wheel has priority over electrical control.
Ident.: DSC-27-10-20-A-00000212.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
ACTUATION
Elevators
‐ Two electrically controlled hydraulic servojacks drive each elevator.
Each servojack has three control modes :
• Active : Jack position is electrically controlled.
• Damping : Jack follows surface movement.
• Centering : Jack is hydraulically maintained in neutral position.
‐ In normal operation:
• One jack is in active mode.
• The other jack is in damping mode.
• Some maneuvers cause the second jack to become active.
‐ If the active servojack fails, the damped one becomes active and the failed jack is automatically
switched to the damping mode.
If neither jack is being controlled electrically nor hydraulically, both are automatically switched to
the damping mode.
If neither of the four jacks is being controlled electrically, the four jacks are automatically
switched to the centering mode.
Stabilizer
‐ A screwjack driven by two hydraulic motors drives the stabilizer.
‐ The two hydraulic motors are controlled by :
• one of three electric motors, or
• the mechanical trim wheel.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-10-20 P 4/14

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-27-10-20-A-00000213.0001001 / 22 MAY 12

L3 SCHEMATIC
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-10-20 P 5/14

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ROLL CONTROL
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-27-10-20-B-00000215.0002001 / 09 OCT 12
GENERAL
Two ailerons and five spoilers on each wing control the aircraft about the roll axis.
The maximum deflection of the ailerons is 25 °.
Ailerons extend when the flaps are extended (aileron droop).
The maximum spoiler deflection is 35 °.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-10-20 P 6/14

FCOM C→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-27-10-20-B-00000216.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
ELECTRICAL CONTROL
‐ Inner ailerons are normally controlled by PRIM 1 (LH) and 2 (RH) with each of these computers
being capable of controlling both sides. SEC 1 and 2 provide the back up control in case of
PRIM 1 and 2 failure.
‐ The outboard ailerons are normally controlled by PRIM 3. SEC 1 and 2 provide the backup
control in case of PRIM 3 failure.
‐ The SECs control the N° 3 and 6 spoilers ; the PRIMs control the N° 2, 4 and 5 spoilers.
Ident.: DSC-27-10-20-B-00000223.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
ACTUATION
AILERONS
Two electrically-controlled hydraulic servojacks drive each aileron.
Each servojack has two control modes :
‐ Active : Jack position is electrically controlled.
‐ Damping : Jack follows surface movement.
The system automatically selects damping mode, in the event of green and yellow or blue and
green low pressure, or if the respective computer fails.
At high speed (above 190 kt, in CONF 0), the outboard ailerons are controlled to zero deflection.
In some failure cases, in autopilot mode, the outboard ailerons are used up to 300 kt.
When the emergency generator is only supplied by the RAT, the outer ailerons are controlled in
damping mode to reduce hydraulic power consumption.
SPOILERS
A servojack positions each spoiler. Each servojack receives hydraulic power from either the
green, yellow, or blue hydraulic system, controlled by the PRIM or SEC (Refer to DSC-27-10-20
Speedbrake and Ground Spoiler Control - Roll Control-Schematic).
The system automatically retracts the spoilers to their zero position, if it detects a fault or loses
electrical control.
If the system loses hydraulic pressure, the spoiler retains the deflection it had at the time of the
loss, or a lesser deflection if aerodynamic forces push it down.
When a spoiler surface on one wing fails, the symmetric one on the other wing is inhibited
(except for spoilers 4 and 6).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-10-20 P 7/14

FCOM ←C 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
SPEEDBRAKE AND GROUND SPOILER CONTROL

Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-27-10-20-C-00000234.0005001 / 20 SEP 13
SPEEDBRAKE CONTROL
The pilot controls the speedbrakes with the speedbrake control lever. The speedbrakes involve
spoilers 1 to 6. Speedbrake extension is inhibited, if:
‐ Maneuver Load Alleviation (MLA) is activated
‐ Angle-of-attack protection is active
‐ Low speed stability is active
‐ At least one thrust lever above MCT
‐ Alpha floor is activated.
If an inhibition occurs when the speedbrakes are extended, they automatically retract and stay
retracted until the inhibition condition disappears, and the pilot resets the lever. (The speedbrakes
can be extended again, 5 s after the lever is reset). When a speedbrake surface on one wing fails,
the symmetric speedbrake surface on the other wing is inhibited.
L3
Maximum : 25 ° for spoiler 1
deflection 30 ° for spoilers 2 to 6
Reduced in CONF 2, 3 and FULL
For surfaces 2 to 6 (that perform roll and speedbrake functions), the roll function has priority:
When the sum of a roll order and a simultaneous speedbrake order on one surface is greater than
the maximum deflection achievable in flight, the symmetrical one is retracted until the difference
between the two surfaces is equal to the roll order.
Ident.: DSC-27-10-20-C-00000239.0004001 / 13 MAY 14
GROUND SPOILER CONTROL

Spoilers 1 to 6 act as ground spoilers.
When a ground spoiler surface on one wing fails, the symmetric one on the other wing is inhibited.
ARMING
The pilot arms the ground spoiler function by pulling the speedbrake control lever up into the
armed position.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-10-20 P 8/14

FCOM D→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
FULL EXTENSION - REJECTED TAKEOFF PHASE

‐ If the ground spoilers are armed and the speed exceeds 72 kt, the ground spoilers will
automatically extend as soon as all thrust levers are set to idle.
‐ If the ground spoilers are not armed and the speed exceeds 72 kt, the ground spoilers will
automatically extend as soon as reverse is selected on at least one engine (remaining engine
at idle).
FULL EXTENSION - LANDING PHASE / BOUNCE
‐ If the ground spoilers are armed and all thrust levers are at idle, the ground spoilers will
automatically extend as soon as both main landing gears have touched down.
‐ If the ground spoilers are not armed and both main landing gears have touched down, the
ground spoilers will automatically extend as soon as reverse is selected on at least one
engine (remaining engine at idle).
PARTIAL EXTENSION
The ground spoilers partially extend when reverse is selected on at least one engine (other
engine at idle) and one main landing gear is compressed.
This partial extension, by decreasing the lift, will ease the compression of the second main
landing gear, and consequently will lead to the normal ground spoiler extension.
RETRACTION
The ground spoilers retract when:
‐ One thrust lever is above idle, or
‐ All thrust levers are at forward idle, and the speedbrake control lever is pushed down.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-10-20 P 9/14

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-27-10-20-C-00000241.0001001 / 09 OCT 12

L3 SCHEMATIC
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-10-20 P 10/14

FCOM ←D 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
YAW CONTROL
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-27-10-20-D-00000243.0002001 / 04 MAR 14
GENERAL
Yaw control is achieved by one rudder surface.

Ident.: DSC-27-10-20-D-00000251.0002001 / 04 MAR 14
ELECTRICAL RUDDER CONTROL

‐ In normal operation, PRIM 1 controls the green hydraulic servo control, PRIM 2 controls the blue
hydraulic servo control, and PRIM 3 controls the yellow hydraulic servo control.
‐ If all the 3 PRIMs fail, SEC 1 controls the green hydraulic servo control.
‐ In case of a total electrical failure, or loss of rudder control due to flight control computers
failure, the Backup Control Module (BCM) controls the yellow hydraulic servo control, or the blue
hydraulic servo control, if the yellow hydraulic servo control is not available.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-10-20 P 11/14

FCOM E→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-27-10-20-D-00000253.0002001 / 04 MAR 14
RUDDER ACTUATION
The rudder is actuated by 3 independent hydraulic servo controls operating in parallel.
‐ In normal operation, the 3 servo controls are simultaneously in active mode.
‐ In case of an electrical or hydraulic failure, the corresponding servo control is in damping mode.
Ident.: DSC-27-10-20-D-00000255.0003001 / 19 MAR 14
RUDDER TRAVEL LIMIT

The maximum rudder travel deflection gradually reduces as the speed increases, to avoid high
structural loads :
In the case of a failure that causes loss of the Rudder Travel Limit function, the rudder deflection
limit stops at the last value reached. At slats' extension, full rudder authority is recovered.
In all cases, the available rudder deflection provides sufficient yaw control within the entire flight
envelope. This includes the case of maximum asymmetric thrust.
Ident.: DSC-27-10-20-D-00015248.0002001 / 04 MAR 14
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN SIDESLIP/RUDDER DEFLECTION/ RUDDER PEDAL TRAVEL

Regardless of the aircraft speed, therefore the maximum rudder deflection, full rudder pedal travel
remains available. However, except at low speed, maximum rudder deflection is achieved before
reaching maximum rudder pedal travel.
Ident.: DSC-27-10-20-D-00000256.0005001 / 04 MAR 14
RUDDER TRIM
Inside the PFTU, artificial feel and rudder trim are achieved by two electric motors that position
the artificial feel unit. In normal operation SEC 1/MOTOR 1 operate with SEC 2/MOTOR 2
synchronized as a backup.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-10-20 P 12/14

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
In manual flight, the pilot can apply rudder trim via the RUD TRIM rotary switch located on the
pedestal.
A button is provided on the RUD TRIM panel to reset the rudder trim to zero.
Note: With the autopilot engaged, rudder trim orders are computed by PRIM and transmitted to
the SEC for actuation. The rudder trim switch and the rudder trim reset pushbutton are
not active.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-10-20 P 13/14

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-27-10-20-D-00000258.0006001 / 09 OCT 12

L3 SCHEMATIC
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-10-20 P 14/14

FCOM ←E 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM - NORMAL LAW
OPERATING MANUAL
General
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-27-20-10-10-00000268.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
Flight control normal law provides:

‐ 3 Axis control
‐ Flight envelope protection
‐ Maneuver load alleviation
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-10-10 P 1/4

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
One of the PF's primary tasks is to maintain the aircraft within the limits of the normal flight envelope.
However, some circumstances, due to extreme situations or aircraft mishandling, may provoke the
violation of these limits.
Despite system protections, the PF must not deliberately exceed the normal flight envelope. In
addition, these protections are not designed to be structural limit protections (e.g. opposite rudder
pedal inputs). Rather, they are designed to assist the PF in emergency and stressful situations,
where only instinctive and rapid reactions will be effective.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-10-10 P 2/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Protections are intended to:

• Provide full authority to the PF to consistently achieve the best possible aircraft performance in
extreme conditions
• Reduce the risks of overcontrolling, or overstressing the aircraft
• Provide PF with an instinctive and immediate procedure to ensure that the PF achieves the best
possible result.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-10-10 P 3/4

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-10-10 P 4/4

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Pitch Control
GROUND MODE
Ident.: DSC-27-20-10-20-00000269.0003001 / 21 MAR 16
Ground mode is active on ground. It is a direct relationship between the sidestick deflection and
elevator deflection without auto trim. The THS is automatically set at 4 ° up (inside the green band).
Manual setting according to CG has priority for take off.
The rotation maneuver is flown in direct law, with full authority.
Immediately after the aircraft becomes airborne, the flight mode is progressively blended in. The
reverse process occurs after touchdown.
GROUND MODE
Ident.: DSC-27-20-10-20-00000269.0004001 / 16 MAR 11
Ground mode is active on ground. It is a direct relationship between sidestick deflection and elevator
deflection without auto trim.
The THS is automatically set at 4 ° UP (inside the green band). Before departure, as soon as the
three hydraulic systems are available, the THS is automatically set to the takeoff value, calculated
by the PRIM, according to the ZFWCG entered in the MCDU and the fuel distribution. This automatic
setting occurs only one time, and the flight crew can override it at any time.
The rotation maneuver is flown in direct law, with full authority.
Immediately after the aircraft becomes airborne, the flight mode is progressively blended in. The
reverse process occurs after touchdown.
FLIGHT MODE
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-27-20-10-20-A-00000271.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
GENERAL
The normal law flight mode is a load factor demand law with auto trim and full flight envelope
protection.
In manual flight, it provides elevator and THS control from the sidestick controllers to achieve a
load factor proportional to stick deflection, independent of speed.
With the sidestick at neutral and the wings level, the system maintains 1 g in pitch corrected for
pitch attitude. There is no need for the pilot to trim with speed or configuration changes. Therefore
pilots only need to perform minor corrections on the sidestick, if the aircraft deviates from its
intended flight path. If the pilot senses an overcontrol, the sidestick should be released.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-10-20 P 1/12

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Airbus Pitch Characteristic
With the autopilot engaged, it provides elevator and THS control according to autopilot and load
factor demand. Pitch trim is automatic in both manual and autopilot mode.
In normal turns (up to 33 ° of bank), no pitch correction is required once the turn is established.
The flight mode is active from takeoff to landing, according to the logic (Refer to DSC-27-20-10-10
General).
Automatic pitch trim is frozen in the following cases:
‐ Manual trim order
‐ Radio height below 100 ft for flare
‐ Load factor lower than 0.5 g
‐ In high speed protection.
When the angle of attack protection is active, the THS is limited between setting at entry in
protection and 2 ° nose down (i.e. further nose up trim cannot be applied).
Similarly, when the load factor is higher than 1.3 g, or when the bank angle is outside ± 33 °, the
THS is limited between the actual setting and 2 ° nose down.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-10-20 P 2/12

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-27-20-10-20-A-00000270.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
CONTROL WITH AUTOPILOT ENGAGED

‐ The autopilot orders are limited by the PRIM
‐ A force must be overcome to move the sidestick with the autopilot engaged. If the pilot moves
the sidestick to overcome this force, the autopilot will disconnect.
‐ All protections remain effective.
FLARE MODE
Ident.: DSC-27-20-10-20-00000273.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
When the aircraft passes 100 ft RA, the THS is frozen and the normal flight mode changes to flare
mode as the aircraft descends to land. Flare mode is essentially a direct stick-to-elevator relationship
(with some damping provided by the load factor and the pitch rate feedbacks). At 50 ft, a slight pitch
down elevator order is applied. Consequently, to flare the aircraft, a gentle nose-up action by the pilot
is required.
PROTECTIONS
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-27-20-10-20-B-00000275.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
GENERAL
The normal law provides complete flight envelope protection as follow :
‐ Load factor limitation
‐ Pitch attitude protection
‐ High angle of attack (AOA) protection
‐ High speed protection
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-10-20 P 3/12

FCOM ← B to D → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-27-20-10-20-B-00000276.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
LOAD FACTOR LIMITATION

On commercial aircraft, high load factors can be encountered during evasive maneuvers due to
potential collisions, or CFIT …
Pulling "g" is efficient, if the resulting maneuver is really flown with this "g" number. If the aircraft is
not able to fly this trajectory, or to perform this maneuver, pulling "g" will be detrimental.
The load factor is automatically limited to :
+2.5 g to -1 g, slats retracted
+2 g to 0, slats extended
Airbus Load Factor Protection and Safety
On most commercial aircraft, the potential for an efficient 2.5 g maneuver is very remote.
Furthermore, as G Load information is not continuously provided in the cockpit, airline pilots are
not used to controlling this parameter. This is further evidenced by inflight experience, which
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-10-20 P 4/12

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
reveals that: In emergency situations, initial PF reaction on a yoke or sidestick is hesitant, then
aggressive.
With load factor protection, the PF may immediately and instinctively pull the sidestick full aft: The
aircraft will initially fly a 2.5 g maneuver without losing time. Then, if the PF still needs to maintain
the sidestick full aft stick, because the danger still exists, then the high AOA protection will take
over. Load factor protection enhances this high AOA protection.
Load factor protection enables immediate PF reaction, without any risk of overstressing the
aircraft.
Flight experience has also revealed that an immediate 2.5 g reaction provides larger obstacle
clearance, than a hesitant and delayed high G Load maneuver (two-second delay).
Ident.: DSC-27-20-10-20-B-00000278.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
PITCH ATTITUDE PROTECTION

Excessive pitch attitudes, caused by upsets or inappropriate maneuvers, lead to hazardous
situations:
• Too high a nose-up ▸ Very rapid energy loss
• Too low a nose-down ▸ Very rapid energy gain
Furthermore, there is no emergency situation that requires flying at excessive attitudes. For these
reasons, pitch attitude protection limits pitch attitude to plus 30 °/minus 15 °.
Pitch attitude protection enhances high speed protection, high load factor protection, and high
AOA protection.
Ident.: DSC-27-20-10-20-B-00000280.0005001 / 17 MAR 17
HIGH ANGLE-OF-ATTACK PROTECTION

In normal law, the aircraft is protected against stall, in dynamic maneuvers or gusts. When the
current angle-of-attack becomes greater than αPROT, the high angle-of-attack (AOA) protection
activates.
Without pilot input, the F/CTL computers will maintain the angle-of-attack equal to αPROT. The
AOA can be further increased by pilot input, up to a maximum value equals to αMAX. When the
High AOA protection is activated, the normal law demand is modified and the side stick input is an
angle-of-attack demand, instead of a load factor demand.
The PF must not deliberately fly the aircraft in the High AOA, except for brief periods, when the
maximum maneuvering speed is required.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-10-20 P 5/12

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Airbus AOA Protection
Vα PROT, Vα MAX, and αfloor condition are mainly computed based on the AOA, and therefore
they vary with configuration, weight and load factor. The Vα PROT and Vα MAX, displayed on the
PFD, are computed by the PRIM. The αfloor activation logic is provided by the PRIM.
Refer to DSC-22_10-50-20 Characteristic Speeds for more information.
The angle-of-attach will not exceed αMAX, even if the pilot gently pulls the sidesitck all way back.
The pilot can hold full back stick, if it is needed, and the aircraft stabilizes at an angle-of-attack
close to but less of the 1 g stall. When flying at the αMAX, the PF can make gentle turns, if
necessary. If the pilot releases the sidestick, the angle -of attack returns to the αPROT and stays
there. As the aircraft enters the protection at the amber and blacks trip (αPROT), the system
inhibits further nose-up trim beyond the point already reached. The nose-down trim remains
available, if the pilot pushes the stick forward.
Note: At takeoff, the αPROT is equal to the αMAX for 8 s.
This High AOA protection has priority over all other protections.
The aircraft can also enter αPROT at a high level, where it protects the aircraft from the buffet
boundary. As at the low speed or low level, if the sidestick is merely released to neutral, the
aircraft maintains the alpha for αPROT. This value of alpha is not the same as the value used at
the low speed. The alpha for αPROT is reduced as a function of Mach, therefore, the aircraft may
climb with the sidestick fee, when leaving a turn after entering αPROT.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-10-20 P 6/12

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
If the pilot flies into αPROT, he should leave it as soon as other considerations allow, by easing
forward on the sidestick to reduce alpha below the value of αPROT, while simultaneously adding
power (if the αfloor has not yet been activated, or has been cancelled).
The aircraft leaves angle-of-attack protection when the:
‐ Sidestick is pushed more than 8 ° forward, or
‐ Sidestick is pushed more than 0 ° forward for at least 1 s, when α < αMAX, or
‐ The sidestick is at neutral or pushed forward, for at least 0.5 s, when α < αPROT.
Between αPROT and αMAX, the αfloor protection may automatically set go-around thrust.
The αfloor will usually be triggered just after entering the αPROT, and go-around thrust will
automatically be applied. Therefore, if the sidestick is held aft, either inadvertently or deliberately,
the aircraft will start to climb at a relatively constant low airspeed. To recover a normal flight
condition, the αPROT should be exited by easing forward on the sidestick, as described above,
and the αfloor should be cancelled by using the disconnect pushbutton on either thrust lever
as soon as a safe speed is regained. Refer to DSC-22_30-90 A/THR Mode Reversion for more
information.
GPWS / WINDSHEAR CASE:
In the case of application of GPWS or windshear procedures, the aircraft protections provide
maximum lift / maximum thrust / maximum drag. Therefore, CFIT escape maneuvers will be
much more efficient.
Protected A/C Versus Non-protected A/C Go-around Trajectory
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-10-20 P 7/12

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
The above-illustrated are typical trajectories flown by protected or not protected aircraft, when
the PF applies the escape procedure after an aural " GPWS PULL UP" alert.
The graph demonstrates the efficiency of the protection, to ensure a duck-under that is 50 %
lower, a bucket-distance that is 50 % shorter, a safety margin that more than doubles (due to
a quicker reaction time), and a significant altitude gain (± 250 ft). These characteristics are
common to all protected aircraft, because the escape procedure is easy to achieve, and enables
the PF to fly the aircraft at a constant AOA, close to the max AOA. It is much more difficult to fly
the stick shaker AOA on an aircraft that is not protected.
Ident.: DSC-27-20-10-20-B-00000281.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
HIGH SPEED PROTECTION

The aircraft automatically recovers following a high speed upset. Depending on the flight
conditions (high acceleration, low pitch attitude), the High Speed Protection is activated at/or
above VMO/MMO.
When it is activated, the pitch trim is frozen. Positive spiral static stability is introduced to 0 ° bank
angle (instead of 33 ° in normal law), so that with the sidestick released, the aircraft always returns
to a bank angle of 0 °. The bank angle limit is reduced from 67 ° to 45 °.
As the speed increases above VMO/MMO, the sidestick nose-down authority is progressively
reduced, and a permanent nose-up order is applied to aid recovery to normal flight conditions.
Therefore, in a dive situation:
• If there is no sidestick input, the aircraft will slightly overshoot VMO/MMO and fly back towards
the envelope.
• If the sidestick is maintained full forward, the aircraft will significantly overshoot VMO/MMO. At
approximately VMO +16/MMO +0.04, the pitch nose-down authority smoothly reduces to zero
(which does not mean that the aircraft stabilizes at that speed).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-10-20 P 8/12

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
The PF, therefore, has full authority to perform a high speed/steep dive escape maneuver, when
required, via a reflex action on the sidestick.
The High Speed Protection is deactivated when the aircraft speed decreases below VMO/MMO,
where the usual normal control laws are recovered.
The autopilot disconnects at VMO +12 kt and MMO + 0.03.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-10-20 P 9/12

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Note: 1. An OVERSPEED ECAM warning is provided at VMO + 4 kt and MMO + 0.006.

2. At high altitude, this may result in activation of the angle of attack protection.
Ident.: DSC-27-20-10-20-B-00000282.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
LOW ENERGY AURAL ALERT

A low energy aural alert “SPEED SPEED SPEED” repeated every 5 s indicates to the pilot that the
aircraft energy becomes lower than a threshold under which to recover a positive flight path angle
through pitch control, the thrust must be increased.
It is available in configuration 2, 3 and full between 100 and 2 000 ft.
For example, if the aircraft decelerates at 1 kt/sec, and:
‐ The FPA is -3 °, the alert will trigger at approximately VLS -8,
‐ The FPA is -4 °, the alert will trigger at approximately VLS -2.
This alert draws the PF's attention to the SPEED scale, and indicates the need to adjust thrust.
It comes immediately before the ALPHA Floor.
The low energy aural alert is computed by the PRIM's from the following inputs:
‐ Aircraft configuration
‐ Air speed deceleration rate
‐ Flight path angle
It is inhibited when:
‐ TOGA is selected
‐ Below 100 ft RA
‐ Above 2 000 ft RA
‐ Alpha floor or GPWS alert is triggered
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-10-20 P 10/12

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
‐ In alternate or direct law

‐ If both RA are failed
The low energy aural alert is triggered during deceleration before alpha floor (unless alpha floor is
triggered by stick deflection), the delay between the two alerts depends on deceleration rate.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-10-20 P 11/12

FCOM ←D 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-10-20 P 12/12

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Lateral Control
LATERAL NORMAL LAW

Ident.: DSC-27-20-10-30-00000312.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
When the aircraft is on the ground (in “on ground” mode), the sidestick commands the aileron and roll
spoiler surface deflection. The amount of control surface deflection that results from a given amount
of sidestick deflection depends upon aircraft speed. The pedals control rudder deflection. The aircraft
smoothly transitions to “in flight” mode shortly after liftoff.
When the aircraft is in the “in flight” mode, normal law combines control of the ailerons, spoilers
(except N° 1 spoilers), and rudder (for turn coordination) in the sidestick. The pilot does not need
to use rudder for turn coordination. While the system thereby gives the pilot control of the roll and
heading, it also limits the roll rate and bank angle, coordinates the turns, and damps the dutch roll.
The roll rate requested by the pilot during flight is proportional to the sidestick deflection, with a
maximum rate of 15 °/s when the sidestick is at the stop.
When the aircraft is in “flare” mode, lateral control is the same as in “in flight” mode. After touchdown,
the aircraft smoothly transitions from “in flight” mode to “ground” mode.
BANK ANGLE PROTECTION

Ident.: DSC-27-20-10-30-00000313.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
Inside the normal flight envelope, the system maintains positive spiral static stability for bank angles
above 33 °. If the pilot releases the sidestick at a bank angle greater than 33 °, the bank angle
automatically reduces to 33 °. Up to 33 °, the system holds the roll attitude constant when the
sidestick is at neutral. If the pilot holds full lateral sidestick deflection, the bank angle goes to 67 ° and
no further.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-10-30 P 1/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
During a normal turn (bank angle less than 33 °), in level flight:
• The PF moves the sidestick laterally (the more the sidestick is moved laterally, the greater the
resulting roll rate - e.g. 15 °/s at max deflection)
• It is not necessary to make a pitch correction
• It is not necessary to use the rudder.
In the case of steep turns (bank angle greater than 33 °), the PF must apply:
• Lateral pressure on the sidestick to maintain bank
• Aft pressure on the sidestick to maintain level flight.
If angle-of-attack protection, or high speed protection, or negative pitch attitude protection is
operative, the bank angle will not go beyond 45 °, when the pilot maintains full lateral deflection on
the sidestick. If high speed protection is operative, the system maintains positive spiral static stability
from a bank angle of 0 °, so that with the sidestick released, the aircraft always returns to a bank
angle of 0 °.
When bank angle protection is active, auto trim is inoperative.
If the bank angle exceeds 45 °, the autopilot disconnects and the FD bars disappear. The FD bars
return when the bank angle decreases to less than 40 °.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-10-30 P 2/4

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
SIDESLIP TARGET
Ident.: DSC-27-20-10-30-00000314.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
Should an engine failure occur, the sideslip indication is slightly modified to ensure that optimum pilot
rudder application is made to achieve optimum climb performance (ailerons to neutral and spoilers
retracted).
In the case of an engine failure at takeoff, or at go-around, the sideslip index on the PFD changes
from yellow to blue (Refer to DSC-31-40 Attitude Data that provides the conditions for the blue
display of the sideslip target).
In flight, the lateral normal law commands some rudder surface deflection to minimize the sideslip.
Crew response is normal and instinctive:
‐ Zero, the beta target value for optimum performance with appropriate rudder application
‐ Accelerate if beta target cannot be zeroed with full rudder.
The computation is made by the PRIM.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-10-30 P 3/4

FCOM C 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-10-30 P 4/4

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Maneuver Load Alleviation (MLA)
MANEUVER LOAD ALLEVIATION (MLA)

Ident.: DSC-27-20-10-40-00000320.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The purpose of MLA is to redistribute the lift over the wing to relieve structural loads on the outer
wing surfaces (bending moment).
The demanded load factor is maintained.
MLA utilises spoilers 4, 5, and 6 and the ailerons.
The MLA becomes active when the sidestick is pulled more than 8 °, and the load factor is more than
2 g, in which case :
‐ The ailerons are symmetrically-deflected upwards :
• Maximum of 11 ° is added to roll demand, if any.
‐ Spoilers 4, 5, 6 are symmetrically-deflected :
• Maximum of 9 ° is added to roll demand, if any.
• Deflection is proportional to load factor, in excess of 2 g.
‐ An elevator demand is simultaneously applied to compensate for the pitching moment induced by
spoilers and ailerons.
The load alleviation is only available, when :
‐ The aircraft speed is above 250 kt.
‐ The FLAPS lever is in the 0 position.
‐ In normal or alternate law flight mode.
The MLA has priority over the speedbrakes.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-10-40 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-10-40 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Turbulence Damping Function
TURBULENCE DAMPING FUNCTION

Ident.: DSC-27-20-10-60-00000322.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The purpose of the turbulence damping function is to damp the structural modes induced by
atmosphere turbulence.
The function uses the Nz accelerometer and two dedicated Ny accelerometers. The PRIMs compute
a turbulence damping command, which is added to the normal law command for the elevator and the
yaw damper.
This function is automatically monitored and becomes inoperative for the remainder of the flight,
when a failure is detected. In addition, it may be manually inhibited by switching off the TURB DAMP
pushbutton on the overhead panel, when it is considered that comfort is degraded instead of being
improved, and no failure is detected.
It is only available if the following conditions are met :
‐ Aircraft in flight.
‐ Aircraft speed greater than 200 kt.
‐ Autopilot engaged or normal law active.
‐ Aircraft within the normal flight envelope.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-10-60 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-10-60 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Aircraft Trimming
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-27-20-10-80-00001960.0002001 / 10 DEC 09
Applicable to: ALL
When the aircraft is :

‐ In normal cruise range,
‐ In straight flight,
‐ With the autopilot engaged,
‐ With symmetrical engine thrust, and
‐ With fuel in the wing tanks distributed symmetrically,
the rudder trim should stay between 1.9 ° right and 1.6 ° left.
Note: This indication corresponds to a true rudder deflection within ± 1 °, taking into account the
permanent offset of rudder trim indication when the aircraft is in cruise conditions (0.9 °
right, 0.6 ° left).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-10-80 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-10-80 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM - RECONFIGURATION CONTROL LAWS
OPERATING MANUAL
General
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-27-20-20-10-00000324.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
Depending on the type of failures affecting the flight control system, or its peripherals, there are 3
possible reconfiguration levels:
‐ Alternate law (ALT 1 or ALT 2)
‐ Direct law, or
‐ Mechanical.
(*) Only in case the AOA, of the remaining ADRs, disagrees with the AOA (as computed by the
PRIM's).
(1) Protection is totally lost, in case of VS 1g computation failure (loss of weight, or slat/flap
position).
(2) Protection is lost, in case of a dual ADR failure (or ADR DISAGREE).
(3) Protection is lost, in case of a triple ADR failure (or ADR DISAGREE).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-20-10 P 1/4

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(4) Bank angle limitation remains effective in ALT 1, which uses roll normal.
However, since ALT 1 is generally an unprotected law, all protection marks on the PFD are in
amber for simplicity.
(5) When both elevators have failed, only pitch mechanical backup is available, by using the
manual pitch trim (THS). “MAN PITCH TRIM ONLY” is displayed in red on the PFDs.
Note: 1. In case of dual RA failure, flare law is introduced when the landing gear is extended and
both autopilots are disengaged. The specific normal law pitch down effect at 50 ft no
longer applies.
2. A jerk may be felt, in the case of flight control computers reconfiguration (due to hydraulic
failure, computer failure, electrical transient...).
INDICATIONS ON THE ECAM
 In ALTN Law:
FLT CTL ALTN LAW (PROT LOST)
A330 : MAX SPEED 330 kt/M 0.82
 In Direct Law:
FLT CTL DIRECT LAW (PROT LOST)
MAN PITCH TRIM USE
INDICATIONS ON THE PFD
The PFD enhances the flight crew's awareness of the status of flight controls
Specific symbols, and specific formatting of low speed information on the speed scale in normal
law, indicate which protection are available.
When protections are lost, amber crosses (X) appear, instead of the green protection symbols (=).
When automatic pitch trim is no longer available, the PFD indicates this with an amber "USE MAN
PITCH TRIM" message below the FMA.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-20-10 P 2/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Fly-by-Wire Status Awareness via the PFD
Therefore, by simply looking at this main instrument (PFD), the flight crew is immediately aware of
the status of flight controls, and the operational consequences.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-20-10 P 3/4

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-20-10 P 4/4

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Alternate Law
ABNORMAL CONTROL LAWS - IN DETAIL-ALTERNATE LAW

Ident.: DSC-27-20-20-20-00001949.0004001 / 22 APR 16
Applicable to: ALL
ALTERNATE LAW
PITCH
Alternate law in pitch is almost the same for the pilot, as normal control law.
However, alternate law does not maintain any of the protections, except maneuver protection.
As a result, the pilot must fly the aircraft more attentively to avoid inadvertently exceeding the
normal limits.
Alternate law reduces MMO to0.82.
At low speed, the change in the speed scale is very noticeable. VLS remains, but Vα PROT and
Vα MAX disappear, replaced by a single black and red strip, the top of which is stall warning
speed. Unlike VLS, which is stable, VSW is g sensitive so as to give additional margin in turns.
As mentioned above, ALTERNATE reverts to FLARE law for landing at 100 ft.
ROLL
Roll control is direct. The roll rate is generally higher than with normal law and, at first, the
aircraft appears to be very sensitive.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-20-20 P 1/4

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Bank stability and limits are no longer active, and the flight crew should be careful to remain
within normal limits.
ALT 1
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-27-20-20-20-A-00000329.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
PITCH CONTROL
GROUND MODE
Identical to normal law ground mode.
FLIGHT MODE
Flight law is a load factor demand law, similar to normal law, with limited pitch rate feedback and
gains, depending on the speed and configuration.
FLARE MODE
Flare law is identical to normal flare law.
Ident.: DSC-27-20-20-20-A-00000330.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
LATERAL CONTROL
Lateral control is similar to normal law, except that alterations of positive spiral static stability will
not occur due to the loss of high AOA and high speed protection.
Ident.: DSC-27-20-20-20-A-00000331.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
PROTECTIONS
LOW SPEED STABILITY
At low speed, a nose down demand is introduced in reference to IAS, instead of angle of attack,
and alternate law changes to direct law.
It is available, whatever the slats/flaps configuration, and it is active from about 5 kt up to
about 10 kt above the stall warning speed, depending on the aircraft's weight and slats/flaps
configuration.
A gentle progressive nose down signal is introduced, which tends to keep the speed from falling
below these values. The pilot can override this demand.
Bank angle compensation is provided.
In addition, aural stall alert (“STALL, STALL” synthetic voice then cricket) is triggered at an
appropriate margin from the stall condition.
The PFD speed scale is modified to show a black/red barber pole below the stall warning.
Vα prot and Vα max are replaced by Vsw (stall warning speed).
The α floor protection is inoperative.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-20-20 P 2/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
HIGH SPEED STABILITY

Above VMO/MMO, a nose up demand is introduced to avoid an excessive increase in speed.
The pilot can override this demand.
The high speed protection symbol (VMO + 4) disappears.
In addition, the overspeed warning (VMO + 4 or MMO + 0.006) remains available.
PITCH ATTITUDE PROTECTION
Lost.
ALT 2
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-27-20-20-20-B-00000343.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
PITCH CONTROL
Identical to ALT 1 law.
Ident.: DSC-27-20-20-20-B-00000344.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
LATERAL CONTROL
ROLL DIRECT LAW
Provides a direct stick-to-surface position relationship. The gains are automatically set
according to the slats/flaps configuration.
The maximum roll rate is approximately 20 to 25 °/s, depending on the speed and configuration.
Spoilers 2, 3 and 6 are inhibited, except in case of some additional failures affecting the lateral
control.
YAW ALTERNATE LAW
The dutch roll damping function is available, and damper authority is limited to ± 4 ° rudder
(CONF 0) and ± 15 ° (other configuration).
Turn coordination is also provided, except in CONF 0.
Ident.: DSC-27-20-20-20-B-00000345.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
PROTECTIONS
Identical to protections in ALT 1, except that :
1. There is no bank angle protection in ALT 2 law.
2. In case of failure of 2 ADRs, there is no low speed stability.
3. In case of failure of 3 ADRs, there is no high speed stability.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-20-20 P 3/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-20-20 P 4/4

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Direct Law
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-27-20-20-30-00000353.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Pitch direct law is a direct stick to elevator relationship (elevator deflection is proportional to stick
deflection).
In all configurations, the maximum elevator deflection varies as a function of the CG.
It is a compromise between the adequate controllability at forward CG, and the not-so-sensitive
controllability at aft CG.
As there is no automatic trim, the pilot has to use manual trim.
The “USE MAN PITCH TRIM” amber message is displayed on the PFD.
All protections are inoperative.
The α floor function is inoperative.
As per alternate law, overspeed and stall warnings are available.
RECONFIGURATION CONTROL LAWS - PFD DISPLAY

Ident.: DSC-27-20-20-30-00000354.0003001 / 22 MAY 12
Applicable to: ALL
(1) Bank angle and pitch limitation is replaced by an amber X.

(2) Overspeed protection symbol (=) disappears.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-20-30 P 1/2

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(3) Vα prot and Vα max are replaced by Vsw.

(4) USE MAN PITCH TRIM (amber) displayed in direct law, or in flare law without RA.
(5) MAN PITCH TRIM ONLY (red) displayed, if a L + R elevator fault is detected.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-20-30 P 2/2

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Abnormal Attitude Laws
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-27-20-20-40-00000360.0001001 / 18 JAN 17
Applicable to: ALL
If for any reason the aircraft goes far outside the normal flight envelope and reaches an extreme
attitude, the flight control law will be modified.
The abnormal attitude law will engage and will provide the PF with maximum efficiency to recover
normal attitude.
The abnormal attitude law engages when one of the following values is reached:
‐ Pitch attitude > 50 ° nose up or 30 ° nose down
‐ Bank angle > 125 °
‐ Angle of attack > 30 ° or < -10 °
‐ Speed > 440 kt or < 60 kt
‐ Mach > 0.96 or < 0.1
When the abnormal attitude law engages:
‐ The pitch alternate law is active with no protection, except load–factor protection and without
Autotrim
‐ The roll direct law is active
‐ The yaw alternate law is active.
When the aircraft returns within the normal flight envelope, the abnormal attitude law disengages and
the following conditions remains for the remainder of the flight:
‐ The pitch alternate law is active
‐ The roll direct law is active
‐ The yaw alternate law is active.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-20-40 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-20-40 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Mechanical Back Up
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-27-20-20-50-00000361.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The purpose of the backup is to achieve all safety objectives in MMEL dispatch condition: To
manage a temporary and total electrical loss, the temporary loss of five fly-by-wire computers, the
loss of both elevators, or the total loss of ailerons and spoilers.
It must be noted that it is very unlikely that the backup will be used, due to the fly-by-wire
architecture. For example, in case of electrical emergency configuration, or an all-engine flameout,
alternate law remains available.
PITCH
Ident.: DSC-27-20-20-50-00000362.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
Pitch mechanical control is achieved through the THS, using manual trim control.
«MAN PITCH TRIM ONLY» is displayed in red on the PFDs.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-20-50 P 1/2

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
LATERAL
Ident.: DSC-27-20-20-50-00000363.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The Backup Control Module (BCM) computer provides yaw damping and direct rudder command
with pedals. This computer includes its own electrical generator, supplied by the B or Y hydraulic
system.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-20-50 P 2/2

FCOM C 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
PEDESTAL
Ident.: DSC-27-20-30-00000371.0002001 / 15 SEP 15
(1) RUD TRIM selector

Controls the rudder trim actuator, which moves the neutral point of the artificial feel by an
equivalent of :
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-30 P 1/20

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
In clean : 1 °/s of rudder travel

configuration
Slats/flaps : 1 °/s of rudder travel for quick inputs
extended 3 °/s for inputs longer than 1.5 s
(2) RESET pb
By pushing the RESET pb, the zero trim position is ordered at 3 °/s.
After the reset, an indication of up to 0.6° (L or R) may be observed in the rudder trim position
indication.
Note: The rudder trim rotary switch, and the RESET pb, are not active with autopilot
engaged.
(3) RUD TRIM Position Indicator
Displays rudder trim direction (L or R) and value (0 to 25 °).
(4) SPEEDBRAKE lever
Controls:
‐ The position of the speedbrake surfaces.
To set speedbrake surfaces to a required position, the speedbrake lever has to be pushed
down and set to the required position. A “hardpoint” is provided at “½” SPEEDBRAKE
position.
‐ The manual preselection of the ground spoilers.
To arm the ground spoilers, the lever must be pulled up when in the RET position.
When the lever is armed (or reverse thrust is selected), all spoilers' surfaces will
automatically extend at landing, or in case of a rejected takeoff.
(5) PITCH TRIM wheel
Both pitch trim wheels provide mechanical control of the THS and have priority over electrical
control.
Note: Crew action on the pitch trim wheel does not disconnect the PRIMs (micro-switches,
actuated by the override mechanism, ensure that the computers remain synchronized
with the manually-selected position).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-30 P 2/20

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
The THS is manually-controlled on ground for the THS setting, before takeoff, and in flight,
when in direct law:
‐ Before takeoff, the pilot sets the THS to the angular value, determined as a function of the
aircraft CG, using the CG scale on the wheel. The relationship between the aircraft CG and
the THS setting on the trim wheel is only applicable for takeoff. The limits of the THS normal
setting range for takeoff are indicated by a green band on the pitch trim wheel.
‐ In flight, when in direct law, the pilot uses the THS conventionally to fly in trim. In flight, the
aircraft pitch trim setting depends on the aircraft CG, weight, altitude and speed. As the
result, the relation between the aircraft CG, and the THS setting displayed on the pitch trim
wheel, does not apply in flight.
After nosewheel touchdown, when the pitch attitude becomes less than 2.5 ° for more than 5 s,
and the ground spoilers are retracted, pitch trim is automatically reset to 4 ° UP.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-30 P 3/20

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
PEDESTAL
Ident.: DSC-27-20-30-00000371.0005001 / 15 SEP 15
(1) RUD TRIM selector

Controls the rudder trim actuator, which moves the neutral point of the artificial feel by an
equivalent of :
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-30 P 4/20

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
In clean : 1 °/s of rudder travel

configuration
Slats/flaps : 1 °/s of rudder travel for quick inputs
extended 3 °/s for inputs longer than 1.5 s
(2) RESET pb
By pushing the RESET pb, the zero trim position is ordered at 3 °/s.
After the reset, an indication of up to 0.6° (L or R) may be observed in the rudder trim position
indication.
Note: The rudder trim rotary switch, and the RESET pb, are not active with autopilot
engaged.
(3) RUD TRIM Position Indicator
Displays rudder trim direction (L or R) and value (0 to 25 °).
(4) SPEEDBRAKE lever
Controls:
‐ The position of the speedbrake surfaces.
To set speedbrake surfaces to a required position, the speedbrake lever has to be pushed
down and set to the required position. A “hardpoint” is provided at “½” SPEEDBRAKE
position.
‐ The manual preselection of the ground spoilers.
To arm the ground spoilers, the lever must be pulled up when in the RET position.
When the lever is armed (or reverse thrust is selected), all spoilers' surfaces will
automatically extend at landing, or in case of a rejected takeoff.
(5) PITCH TRIM Wheel
Both pitch trim wheels provide mechanical control of the THS and have priority over electrical
control.
Note: Crew action on the pitch trim wheel does not disconnect the PRIMs (micro-switches,
actuated by the override mechanism, ensure that the computers remain synchronized
with the manually-selected position).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-30 P 5/20

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
The THS is automatically controlled on ground for THS setting, before takeoff. The flight crew
can also manually control the THS on ground, and in flight when in direct law.
‐ Before takeoff, the pilot sets the THS to the angular value, determined as a function of the
aircraft CG, using the CG scale on the wheel. The relationship between the aircraft CG and
the THS setting on the trim wheel is only applicable for takeoff. The limits of the THS normal
setting range for takeoff are indicated by a green band on the pitch trim wheel.
‐ In flight, when in direct law, the pilot uses the THS conventionally to fly in trim. In flight, the
aircraft pitch trim setting depends on the aircraft CG, weight, altitude and speed. As the
result, the relation between the aircraft CG, and the THS setting displayed on the pitch trim
wheel, does not apply in flight.
After nosewheel touchdown, when the pitch attitude becomes less than 2.5 ° for more than 5 s
and if the ground spoilers are retracted:
‐ If the speed is below 80 kt, pitch trim automatically resets to 4 ° UP.
‐ If the speed is above 80 kt, a touch-and-go is detected, and the pitch trim is automatically set
to the takeoff value, based on the CG measured during the approach.
LATERAL CONSOLES
Ident.: DSC-27-20-30-00000396.0003001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-30 P 6/20

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(1) ARM REST
Arm rest is linked to the seat by means of a supporting arm.

The arm rest position is adjustable.
Following setting and indications are provided:
(A) Height adjustment
(B) Pitch adjustment
(C) Armrest memory position display in pitch and in height.
(2) SIDESTICKS
Sidesticks, one on each lateral console, are used for manual pitch and roll control. They are
springloaded to neutral. When the autopilot is engaged, a solenoid-operated detent locks both
sidesticks in the neutral position. If the pilot applies a force above a given threshold (5 daN in
pitch, 3.5 daN in roll), the autopilot disengages and the sidestick unlocks and the deflection is
sent as command to the computers.
The hand grip includes 2 pushbuttons:
‐ Autopilot disconnect/sidestick priority pushbutton
‐ Push-to-talk button
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-30 P 7/20

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Sidestick priority logic

‐ When only one pilot operates the sidestick, his demand is sent to the computers.
‐ When the other pilot operates his sidestick, in the same or opposite direction, both pilots
inputs are algebraically-added. The addition is limited to single-stick maximum deflection.
Note: In the event of simultaneous input on both sidesticks (2 °deflection of the neutral
position in any direction) the two green SIDE STICK PRIORITY lights, on the
glareshield, come on and the “DUAL INPUT” voice message activates.
A pilot can deactivate the other sidestick, and take full control by pressing and keeping pressed
his takeover pushbutton.
For latching the priority condition, it is recommended that the takeover pushbutton be pressed
for more than 40 s . The takeover pushbutton can then be released without losing priority.
However a deactivated sidestick can be reactivated at any time, by momentarily pressing either
takeover pushbutton on either stick.
If both pilots press their takeover pushbuttons, the last pilot to press their pushbutton will have
priority.
In case of a "SIDE STICK FAULT" ECAM warning, due to an electrical failure, the affected
sidestick order (sent to the computer) is forced to zero. This automatically deactivates the
affected sidestick. This explains why there is no procedure associated with this warning.
Note: If an autopilot is engaged, any action on a takeover pushbutton will disengage it.
In a Priority Situation
‐ A red light will come on, in front of the pilot whose stick is deactivated.
‐ A green light will come on, in front of the pilot who has taken control, if the other sidestick is
not in the neutral position (to indicate a potential and unwanted control demand).
Note: If one stick is deactivated on ground, at takeoff thrust application, the takeoff
«CONFIG» warning is triggered.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-30 P 8/20

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
GLARESHIELD
Ident.: DSC-27-20-30-00000404.0002001 / 16 MAR 11
Applicable to: ALL
(1) SIDE STICK PRIORITY lt

Arrow red lt : ‐ Illuminates in front of the pilot losing authority.
‐ Extinguishes if he has recovered his authority, ie:
• If the other take-over pushbutton is released prior priority condition
is latched, or
• If he has used his take-over pushbutton to cancel a latched priority
situation.
Sidestick priority audio: a "PRIORITY LEFT" or "PRIORITY RIGHT"
audio voice message is given each time priority is taken.
CAPT-F/O green lt : ‐ Illuminates in front of the pilot who has taken priority by pressing the
takeover push button if the opposite stick is not at neutral.
or
‐ CAPT and F/O light illuminate in case of simultaneous input on both
sidesticks.
‐ Extinguishes when the opposite stick is returned to the neutral
position.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-30 P 9/20

FCOM C 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
OVERHEAD PANEL
Ident.: DSC-27-20-30-00000420.0003001 / 08 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL
(1) PRIM pushbuttons (guarded)

Control the Flight Control Primary Computers (FCPC).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-30 P 10/20

FCOM D→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ON : The following functions are provided by each computer :

‐ Normal pitch
‐ Normal lateral
‐ MLA
‐ Speedbrakes, ground spoilers control logic
‐ Pitch alternate
‐ Pitch direct
‐ Roll direct
‐ Yaw alternate
‐ Rudder travel
‐ Ailerons droop
‐ Abnormal attitude law
‐ Autopilot laws’ computation
‐ Characteristic speeds computation
OFF : The corresponding computer is not active. To reset, switch it OFF, then on.
FAULT lt : The amber FAULT light, and associated ECAM caution, come on, when a failure
is detected.
The FAULT light goes off, when OFF is selected, or at the end of the PRIM
power-up test, provided it is satisfactory.
(2) SEC pushbuttons (guarded)
Control the Flight Control Secondary Computers (FCSC).
ON : The following functions are provided by each computer :
‐ Pitch direct
‐ Roll direct
‐ Yaw alternate
‐ Rudder trim
‐ Rudder travel
OFF : The corresponding computer is not active. To reset, switch it OFF, then on.
FAULT lt : The amber FAULT light, and associated ECAM caution, come on, when a failure
is detected.
The FAULT light goes off, when OFF is selected.
It flashes at the end of a SEC power-up test (at electrical power application).
(3) TURB DAMP pushbutton
on : Command of Turbulence Damping function is added to normal law elevator and yaw
damper command.
OFF : Turbulence Damping function commands are inhibited.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-30 P 11/20

FCOM ←D 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
SIDE STICK INDICATIONS ON PFD

Ident.: DSC-27-20-30-00000426.0004001 / 17 MAR 11
Applicable to: ALL
On ground, after first engine start, side stick position indications appear white on both PFDs.
The indication disappears when the Nose Landing Gear is fully extended.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-30 P 12/20

FCOM E 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ECAM F/CTL PAGE

Ident.: DSC-27-20-30-00000434.0007001 / 27 MAY 13
(1) Spoilers/Speed Brakes Indication

Δ : Spoiler not retracted (green)
— : Spoiler retracted (green)
Δ : Spoiler fault deflected (amber)
1 : Spoiler fault retracted (amber and underlined)
X : Spoiler position not valid (amber)
Note: Same indications are displayed on WHEEL page.
(2) Hydraulic System Pressure Indication
It is normally in green. It becomes amber in case of hydraulic system low pressure
(downstream the leak valves).
(3) PRIM/SEC Indication
‐ PRIM and SEC labels are always displayed in white.
‐ The computer number is normally in green and boxed in grey. The number and box become
amber, in the event of a computer failure.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-30 P 13/20

FCOM F→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(4) Ailerons Position Indication

White scale and green indexes.
The index becomes amber when both (associated) servojacks are not available
(5) Aileron/Elevator Actuators Indication

G, B and Y are normally displayed in green.
They become amber in case of a hydraulic system low pressure.
They are partially boxed amber, when electrical failure is detected by the PRIM.
(6) Elevator Position Indication
White scale and green index.
The index becomes amber when both associated actuators are not available.
(7) Pitch Trim Position Indication

PITCH TRIM : It is normally in white.
label It becomes amber in case of THS electrical control loss.
Position : Varies from 2 ° down to 14 ° up.
indication It is normally in green.
It becomes amber in case of a B + Y system low pressure.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-30 P 14/20

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(8) Yaw Control Indications
(A) Rudder Position Indication

It is normally in green.
The rudder symbol becomes amber, in the case of a B + G + Y hydraulic low pressure.
(B) Rudder Travel Limiter or PTLU Indication
It becomes amber, when travel Limiters 1 and 2 are faulty.
(C) Rudder Trim Position
It is normally in blue.
The position varies from -25 to +25 °.
It becomes amber, if the rudder trim systems 1 and 2 are inoperative.
(D) NORM CTL Message
It appears in amber, when the normal rudder command is lost.
The rudder is then controlled by the Backup Control Module.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-30 P 15/20

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ECAM F/CTL PAGE

Ident.: DSC-27-20-30-00000434.0004001 / 27 MAY 13
(1) Spoilers/Speed Brakes Indication

Δ : Spoiler not retracted (green)
— : Spoiler retracted (green)
Δ : Spoiler fault deflected (amber)
1 : Spoiler fault retracted (amber and underlined)
X : Spoiler position not valid (amber)
Note: Same indications are displayed on WHEEL page.
(2) Hydraulic System Pressure Indication
It is normally in green. It becomes amber in case of hydraulic system low pressure
(downstream the leak valves).
(3) PRIM/SEC Indication
‐ PRIM and SEC labels are always displayed in white.
‐ The computer number is normally in green and boxed in grey. The number and box become
amber, in the event of a computer failure.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-30 P 16/20

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(4) Ailerons Position Indication

White scale and green indexes.
The index becomes amber when both (associated) servojacks are not available
(5) Aileron/Elevator Actuators Indication

G, B and Y are normally displayed in green.
They become amber in case of a hydraulic system low pressure.
They are partially boxed amber, when electrical failure is detected by the PRIM.
(6) Elevator Position Indication
White scale and green index.
The index becomes amber when both associated actuators are not available.
(7) Pitch Trim Position Indication

PITCH TRIM : It is normally in white.
label It becomes amber in case of THS electrical control loss.
Position : Varies from 2 ° down to 14 ° up.
indication It is normally in green.
It becomes amber in case of a B + Y system low pressure.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-30 P 17/20

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(8) Yaw Control Indications
(A) Rudder Position Indication

The rudder symbol becomes amber, in the case of a B + G + Y hydraulic low pressure.
(B) Rudder Travel Limiter or PTLU Indication
It becomes amber, when travel Limiters 1 and 2 are faulty.
(C) Rudder Trim Position
It is normally in blue.
The position varies from -29.2 ° to +29.2 °.
It becomes amber, if the rudder trim systems 1 and 2 are inoperative.
(D) NORM CTL Message
It appears in amber, when the normal rudder command is lost.
The rudder is then controlled by the Backup Control Module.
MEMO DISPLAY
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-27-20-30-A-00017253.0001001 / 06 SEP 16
GND SPLRS ARMED : This memo appears in green, when the ground spoilers are armed.
Ident.: DSC-27-20-30-A-00017255.0003001 / 21 MAR 16
SPEED BRK : This memo flashes in amber, when the speedbrakes are extended in Flight
Phases 2, 3, 4, and 5.
SPEED BRK : This memo appears in green, when the speedbrakes are extended in Flight
Phase 6. This memo flashes in amber, after 50 s, if at least one engine is above
idle.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-30 P 18/20

FCOM ← F to G → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
SPEED BRK : This memo appears in green, when the speedbrakes are extended in Flight
Phase 7. After 5 s, this memo flashes in amber, and the associated "SPD
BRK STILL OUT" caution appears on the ECAM, regardless of the landing
configuration.
Ident.: DSC-27-20-30-A-00017254.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
TURB DAMP OFF : This memo appears in green, when the TURB DAMP pb is set to OFF.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-30 P 19/20

FCOM ←G 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-20-30 P 20/20

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FLAPS AND SLATS - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-27-30-10-00000488.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Lift augmentation is achieved on each wing by :

‐ 2 flaps surfaces
‐ 7 slats surfaces
‐ 2 ailerons (aileron droop function)
These surfaces are electrically-signalled and hydraulically-operated.
Slats and flaps are selected by the "FLAPS" lever, located on the center pedestal, which has 5
positions.
MAIN COMPONENTS
Ident.: DSC-27-30-10-00000489.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Slats and Flaps systems are similar, and consist of :

‐ Two Slats/Flaps Control Computers (SFCC), each containing one flap and one slat channel.
‐ A Power Control Unit (PCU), consisting of 2 independent hydraulic motors coupled to a differential
gearbox. The motors driven by the related channel, are supplied by blue and green hydraulic
power for the slats, and green and yellow for the flaps.
Pressure-Off Brakes (POB) are installed to lock the transmission when the flaps or slats surfaces
have reached the selected position, or in case of hydraulic power failure.
‐ 7 Slats and 2 Flaps surfaces per wing.
‐ Two Asymmetry Position Pick-Off Units (APPU) measure the asymmetry between the left and right
wings.
‐ A flap disconnect detection system, which detects attachment failure and inhibits flap operation in
order to limit further damage. The failure is detected by a sensor measuring excessive differential
movement between the inner and outer flaps.
‐ Wing tip brakes (WTB), activated in case of asymmetry, overspeed, or symmetrical runaway. They
cannot be released in flight. They are supplied by blue and green hydraulic power for the slats,
and by green and yellow for the flaps.
‐ The Feedback Position Pick-Off Units (FPPU) provide position feedback to the SFCCs.
‐ The Instrumentation Position Pick-Off Unit (IPPU) provide position data to the ECAM.
Note: If the flap wing tip brakes are activated, slat operation is still possible and vice versa.
If one SFCC is inoperative, both slats and flaps will operate at half speed.
If one hydraulic system is inoperative, the corresponding surfaces (slats or flaps) operate at
half speed.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-30-10 P 1/6

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ARCHITECTURE
Ident.: DSC-27-30-10-00000491.0001001 / 22 MAY 12
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-30-10 P 2/6

FCOM C 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
CONFIGURATIONS
Ident.: DSC-27-30-10-00000492.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The FLAPS lever has 5 positions: 0, 1, 2, 3 and FULL.

Two configurations correspond to the FLAPS lever position 1 : CONF 1 or CONF 1 + F.
The selection is done as explained in the following paragraphs.
AUTOMATIC RETRACTION SYSTEM (ARS)

Ident.: DSC-27-30-10-00000493.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
When CONF 1 + F is selected, the auto retraction of flaps to 0 occurs at 200 kt (before VFE, which is
215 kt).
FLAP LOAD RELIEF SYSTEM (FLRS)

Ident.: DSC-27-30-10-00000494.0003001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Only available in CONF 2, 3, or FULL. When activated, the system retracts the flaps to the deflection
corresponding to the next retracted lever position.
Auto retraction of the flaps only occurs in case of VFE exceedance (VFE +2.5 kt).
If speed is reduced below VFE (VFE -2.5 kt), flaps return to their normal (selected) position.
In CONF 2, auto retraction results in CONF 1* (20 ° slats/8 ° flaps).
In CONF 3, auto retraction results in CONF 2* (23 ° slats/14 ° flaps).
These configurations can be obtained only by FLRS activation.
Note: 1. When FLAPS 1 is selected, VFE of CONF 1 or CONF 1 + F is displayed, depending on
the actual configuration. In approach, VFE next is 205 kt (VFE of CONF 1*).
2. When FLAPS 2 is selected in approach, VFE of CONF 2 or CONF 1* is displayed,
depending on the FLRS activation.
3. When FLAPS 3 is selected, only VFE of CONF 3 is displayed on PFD independently of
FLRS activation.
In case of FLRS activation, the ECAM upper display shows a flashing “RELIEF” message.
If the speed is increased by 4 kt above the VFE, corresponding to the actual flap/slat configuration,
an overspeed warning appears on the ECAM.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-30-10 P 3/6

FCOM D to F 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
RETRACTION/EXTENSION SCHEMATIC
Ident.: DSC-27-30-10-00000495.0003001 / 22 MAY 12
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-30-10 P 4/6

FCOM G 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
SLATS ALPHA/SPEED LOCK FUNCTION

Ident.: DSC-27-30-10-00000496.0003001 / 17 MAR 11
Applicable to: ALL
This function inhibits slats retraction at a high angle-of-attack and/or at low speed.
The SFCCs use a corrected angle-of-attack (alpha), or air speed information from the ADIRUs to
inhibit slat retraction.
If alpha exceeds 8.5 °, or the speed goes below 148 kt, the retraction from position 1 to 0 is inhibited.
The inhibition is removed when alpha goes below 8.2 °, and when the speed exceeds 154 kt. In this
case, the slats automatically retract to 0.
The function is not active if:
‐ Alpha exceeds 8.5 °, or the speed goes below 148 kt after the lever has been set to 0.
‐ Aircraft is on the ground, with the speed below 60 kt.
SIGNALS TO OTHER SYSTEMS

Ident.: DSC-27-30-10-00000497.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The SFCCs transmit flaps/slats positions to the following systems :

‐ PRIM and SEC
‐ FMGEC
‐ ADIRU
‐ EIU
‐ CIDS
‐ GPWS
Note: The ECAM system receives the position information directly from the Instrumentation
Position Pick-Off Unit (IPPU). This information is used for warnings and position indications
on the E/WD.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-30-10 P 5/6

FCOM H to I 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-30-10 P 6/6

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FLAPS AND SLATS - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
PEDESTAL
Ident.: DSC-27-30-20-00000498.0003001 / 09 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL
(1) FLAPS lever

The FLAPS lever selects simultaneous operation of the slats and flaps.
The five lever positions correspond to the following surface positions :
Indication
Lever Position SLATS FLAPS AILERONS Flight phase
on ECAM
0 0 0 0 CRUISE
0 0 1 HOLD
1 16
8 5 1+F TO
20 8 10 2(1)
2
20 14 10 2 APPR
3 23 14 10 3(2) TO
3 23 22 10 3 LDG
FULL 23 32 10 FULL
(1) This slats/flaps position corresponds to CONF 1*
(2) This slats/flaps position corresponds to CONF 2*
Before selecting any position, the lever must be pulled out of detent.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-30-20 P 1/4

FCOM A→ 08 NOV 12
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Moreover, balks are provided at Positions 1 and 3 to avoid excessive flap/slat travel demand by a
single pilot action.
Note: It is not possible to select an intermediate lever position.
TAKEOFF IN CONF 1 :
CONF 1 + F (16/ 8) is selected. The flaps automatically retract at 200 kt.
TAKEOFF OR GO-AROUND IN CONF 2 OR 3 :
At FLAPS 1 selection : CONF 1 + F (16 / 8) is selected, if speed it less than 200 kt.
Then, the flaps automatically retract at 200 kt.
0 TO 1 ABOVE 100 KNOTS :
CONF 1 (16/ 0) is selected.
Note: After flaps retraction, CONF 1 + F is no longer available until the speed is 100 kt or less,
except if CONF 2 or more has been previously selected.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-30-20 P 2/4

FCOM ←A 08 NOV 12
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ECAM UPPER DISPLAY

Ident.: DSC-27-30-20-00000499.0002001 / 09 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL
(1) Position indexes:

A fixed grey center part, and three plus four white dots, show all the flaps and slats positions.
The white dots are not displayed in clean configuration.
(2) F and S
Normally white. Not displayed in clean configuration.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-30-20 P 3/4

FCOM B→ 08 NOV 12
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FLIGHT CONTROLS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
The F symbol is :
‐ replaced by the amber “F LOCKED” message, when wing tip brake is applied to flaps.
‐ replaced by the green pulsing “F RELIEF” message when the flap load relief system is
activated.
‐ displayed in amber at flap system failure or at yellow and green hydraulic system low
pressure.
The S symbol is :
‐ replaced by the amber “S LOCKED” message when wing tip brake is applied to slats.
‐ replaced by the green pulsing “A LOCK” message when the alpha/speed lock function is
activated.
‐ displayed in amber at slat system failure or at blue and green hydraulic system low pressure.
(3) Flaps/Slats actual position
The green boxes move independently, when flaps/slats are retracted or extended. When
fully retracted, boxes are side by side with wing fixed part. The signal is acquired by separate
sensors, not used by the SFCC.
Symbols become amber when S (F) LOCKED. The slat box pulses in green, when the
alpha/speed lock function is active. The flap box pulses in green, when the flap load relief
system is active.
(4) Selected position
It is in blue when the surfaces are in transit.
It disappears, when the selected position has been reached.
It is provided by the SFCC.
(5) Lever position
Numbers and letters indicate the flap/slat position. It is in green when the actual position agrees
with the selected position. It is in blue, when the surfaces are in transit. It is not displayed in
clean configuration. It is provided by the SFCC.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-27-30-20 P 4/4

FCOM ←B 08 NOV 12
UNCONTROLLED COPY

AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
UNCONTROLLED COPY
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
DESCRIPTION.........................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-28-10-20 Tanks
GENERAL................................................................................................................................................................ A
Description............................................................................................................................................................... B
Tank Arrangement................................................................................................................................................... C
DSC-28-10-30 Fuel Control and Monitoring System (FCMS)

GENERAL................................................................................................................................................................ A
DSC-28-10-40 Fuel Quantity Indication and Level Sensing

FUEL QUANTITY INDICATION...............................................................................................................................A
Fuel Level Sensing.................................................................................................................................................. B
ARCHITECTURE..................................................................................................................................................... C
DSC-28-10-50 Engine Feed

GENERAL................................................................................................................................................................ A
Main Components....................................................................................................................................................B
Fuel Feed with All Engines Flame Out (ELEC EMER CONFIG)............................................................................C
Engine Feed............................................................................................................................................................ D
DSC-28-10-60 Fuel Feed Sequence

Normal Operation.....................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-28-10-70 Automatic Fuel Transfers

Center to Inner Tank Transfer.................................................................................................................................A
Outer to Inner Tank Transfer.................................................................................................................................. B
TRIM TANK TRANSFER.........................................................................................................................................C
ECAM Indication...................................................................................................................................................... D
DSC-28-10-80 Manual Fuel Transfers

Center to Inner Tank Transfer.................................................................................................................................A
Outer to Inner Tank Transfer.................................................................................................................................. B
DSC-28-10-90 CG Control - Trim Tank Transfer

GENERAL................................................................................................................................................................ A
AFT CG Target........................................................................................................................................................ B
Normal Operation.................................................................................................................................................... C
AFT Fuel Transfer................................................................................................................................................... D
Automatic Forward Fuel Transfer............................................................................................................................E
Manual Forward Fuel Transfer................................................................................................................................ F

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

DSC-28-10-100 APU Feed
FWD APU PUMP FEED..........................................................................................................................................A
AFT APU PUMP FEED........................................................................................................................................... B
APU Feed................................................................................................................................................................ C
DSC-28-10-110 Refueling - Defueling

Refueling-Defueling..................................................................................................................................................A

Overhead Panel....................................................................................................................................................... A
Overhead Panel (Cont'd)......................................................................................................................................... B
Refueling Control Panel.......................................................................................................................................... C
FUEL QTY, TEMP, GW and CG Indications.......................................................................................................... D
FUEL FEED, TRANSFER and JETTISON (if-installed) Indications........................................................................E
ECAM Upper Display...............................................................................................................................................F
Memo Display..........................................................................................................................................................G

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
DESCRIPTION
Ident.: DSC-28-10-10-00000136.0007001 / 10 DEC 09
Applicable to: ALL
The fuel system :

‐ Stores fuel.
‐ Controls and monitors the correct quantity of fuel.
‐ Supplies fuel to the engines and the Auxiliary Power Unit (APU).
‐ Controls the transfer of fuel to maintain the Center of Gravity (CG) within limits.
‐ Maintains fuel in the outer tanks for wing bending.
‐ Controls refueling and defueling.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 07 APR 11
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-10 P 2/2

FCOM 07 APR 11
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - TANKS
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-28-10-20-00000143.0001001 / 10 DEC 09
Fuel is stored in the :

‐ Wings
‐ Center section
‐ Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer (THS).
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-28-10-20-00000143.0003001 / 10 DEC 09
Fuel is stored in the :

‐ Wings
‐ Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer (THS).
DESCRIPTION
Ident.: DSC-28-10-20-00000146.0004001 / 18 MAR 11
The wings have inner and outer tanks. Each inner tank contains one collector cell that:
‐ Maintains a fuel reservoir for the fuel booster pumps and provides negative 'g' protection to feed
the engines.
‐ Is maintained full and contains about 1 000 kg (2 200 lb) of fuel.
Each inner tank is divided into two parts via a SPLIT valve that normally remains open. The inner
tank is used as a single tank and, if tank damage is suspected (i.e. FQI data is lost or there is a rapid
FQI decrease following an engine failure), the SPLIT valve can be manually closed by using the
dedicated pushbutton on the overhead panel.
When split valves are closed, the fuel contained in the AFT section of INNER tanks is still usable via
the standby pumps.
In each wing, and on the right of the THS trim tank, there is a vent surge tank outboard of the outer
tank.
After refueling to maximum tank capacity, fuel can expand by 2 % (20 °C temperature increase)
without spillage.
There is an overpressure protector in each wing surge tank, in the trim surge tank.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-20 P 1/6

FCOM A to B → 26 MAY 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
DESCRIPTION
Ident.: DSC-28-10-20-00000146.0005001 / 18 MAR 11
The wings have inner and outer tanks. Each inner tank contains one collector cell that:
‐ Maintains a fuel reservoir for the fuel booster pumps and provides negative 'g' protection to feed
the engines.
‐ Is maintained full and contains about 1 000 kg (2 200 lb) of fuel.
Each inner tank is divided into two parts via a SPLIT valve that normally remains open. The inner
tank is used as a single tank and, if tank damage is suspected (i.e. FQI data is lost or there is a rapid
FQI decrease following an engine failure), the SPLIT valve can be manually closed by using the
dedicated pushbutton on the overhead panel.
When split valves are closed, the fuel contained in the AFT section of INNER tanks is still usable via
the standby pumps.
In each wing, and on the right of the THS trim tank, there is a vent surge tank outboard of the outer
tank.
After refueling to maximum tank capacity, fuel can expand by 2 % (20 °C temperature increase)
without spillage.
There is an overpressure protector in each wing surge tank, in the trim surge tank, and between the
center and the right inner tanks.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-20 P 2/6

FCOM ←B 26 MAY 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
TANK ARRANGEMENT
Ident.: DSC-28-10-20-00000153.0042001 / 14 FEB 11
USABLE FUEL
OUTER TANKS INNER TANKS TRIM TANK TOTAL
(liters) 3 650 x 2 42 000 x 2 6 230 97 530
VOLUME
(US gallons) 964 x 2 11 095 x 2 1 646 25 764
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-20 P 3/6

FCOM C→ 26 MAY 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

USABLE FUEL
OUTER TANKS INNER TANKS TRIM TANK TOTAL
(KG) 2 865 x 2 32 970 x 2 4 891 76 561
WEIGHT (1)
(LB) 6 317 x 2 72 686 x 2 10 782 168 788
(1) Fuel specific gravity: 0.785 kg/l or 6.551 lb/US Gal.
TANK ARRANGEMENT
Ident.: DSC-28-10-20-00000153.0041001 / 14 FEB 11
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-20 P 4/6

FCOM ←C→ 26 MAY 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
USABLE FUEL
OUTER TANKS INNER TANKS CENTER TANK TRIM TANK TOTAL
(liters) 3 650 x 2 42 000 x 2 41 560 6 230 139 090
VOLUME
(US gallons) 964 x 2 11 095 x 2 10 979 1 646 36 743
(KG) 2 865 x 2 32 970 x 2 32 625 4 891 109 186
WEIGHT (1)
(LB) 6 317 x 2 72 686 x 2 71 925 10 782 240 713
(1) Fuel specific gravity: 0.785 kg/l or 6.551 lb/US Gal.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-20 P 5/6

FCOM ←C 26 MAY 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-20 P 6/6

FCOM 26 MAY 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - FUEL CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEM (FCMS)
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-28-10-30-00000161.0003001 / 18 MAR 11
Applicable to: ALL
The fuel system is controlled by two Fuel Control and Monitoring Computers (FCMC).
The FCMCs :
‐ Measure the fuel quantity and indicate it on the ECAM.
‐ Calculate the aircraft's Gross Weight and Center of gravity, based on the Zero Fuel Weight and the
CG entered by the crew.
‐ Control transfer of fuel to the inner tanks for engine feed.
‐ Control transfers of fuel to and from the trim tank for CG control.
Magnetic level indicators are fitted in the lower surfaces of the wing tanks to allow the manual
measurement of each tank's fuel quantity.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-30 P 1/2

FCOM A 07 APR 11
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - FUEL CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEM (FCMS)
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-30 P 2/2

FCOM 07 APR 11
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - FUEL QUANTITY INDICATION AND LEVEL SENSING
OPERATING MANUAL
FUEL QUANTITY INDICATION

Ident.: DSC-28-10-40-00000165.0001001 / 10 DEC 09
Applicable to: ALL
One FCMC is active and the other is on standby. If the first FCMC fails, then the other FCMC takes
over.
Each FCMC calculates the fuel quantity by using the :
‐ Fuel volume from the fuel probes.
‐ Fuel density from the densitometers.
‐ Horizontal Stabilizer angle.
‐ Aircraft attitude.
‐ Fuel electrical characteristic from the compensators
The calculated fuel quantity is indicated on both the ECAM and the refuel control panel.
FUEL LEVEL SENSING

Ident.: DSC-28-10-40-00000166.0003001 / 14 FEB 11
The FCMC also uses information from the following fuel level sensors to control transfers and to
provide warnings, independently of the fuel quantity indication:
‐ Low level sensors:
• To trigger low level warnings
• To control trim tank transfers.
‐ High level sensors: To stop refueling when a tank is full
‐ Vent surge tank level sensor: To stop refueling, or fuel transfer, in case of tank overflow.
FUEL LEVEL SENSING

Ident.: DSC-28-10-40-00000166.0004001 / 14 FEB 11
The FCMC also uses information from the following fuel level sensors to control transfers and to
provide warnings, independently of the fuel quantity indication:
‐ Low level sensors:
• To trigger low level warnings and stop jettison 
• To control center and trim tank transfers.
‐ High level sensors: To stop refueling when a tank is full
‐ Vent surge tank level sensor: To stop refueling, or fuel transfer, in case of tank overflow.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-40 P 1/2

FCOM A to B 26 MAY 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - FUEL QUANTITY INDICATION AND LEVEL SENSING
OPERATING MANUAL
ARCHITECTURE
Ident.: DSC-28-10-40-00000167.0003001 / 17 JUN 14
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-40 P 2/2

FCOM C 26 MAY 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - ENGINE FEED
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-28-10-50-00000168.0003001 / 10 DEC 09
Applicable to: ALL
The main fuel pump system supplies fuel from each inner tank to its corresponding engine. In each
wing there are three fuel pumps. Two main fuel pumps in the collector cell and one standby pump
outside the collector cell. When closed, the crossfeed valves separate the system into two parts, and
their associated fuel pumps supply the engines. When open, the crossfeed valves allow any pump to
supply any engine.
MAIN COMPONENTS
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-28-10-50-A-00000170.0002001 / 10 DEC 09
INNER TANK PUMPS

During normal operation, all main pumps run.
If a main pump fails, or is switched off, then the standby pump runs. With the crossfeed valves
open, one pump is capable of supplying all both engines.
Ident.: DSC-28-10-50-A-00000176.0003001 / 10 DEC 09
CROSSFEED VALVES
The cross feed valve enables any pump to supply any engine. The X-FEED valves automatically
opens in electrical emergency configuration.
Ident.: DSC-28-10-50-A-00000181.0001001 / 10 DEC 09
ENGINE LP VALVE
The flow of fuel to an engine can be stopped by closing its respective low pressure (LP) valve via
the :
‐ Engine master switch, or the
‐ ENG FIRE pushbutton.
FUEL FEED WITH ALL ENGINES FLAME OUT (ELEC EMER CONFIG)
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-28-10-50-B-00000190.0003001 / 21 MAR 17
EMER GEN POWERED BY THE RAT

‐ The X-FEED valve open automatically.
‐ Only the left Pump 2 remains powered.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-50 P 1/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
‐ If left Pump 2 fails, or is selected OFF, right Pump 2 will automatically replace it.
‐ When the speed goes below 260 kt, or when LAND RECOVERY is selected ON, all MAIN and
STBY pumps are lost.
Ident.: DSC-28-10-50-B-00000195.0002001 / 14 FEB 11
FLIGHT ON BATTERIES
All main and STBY pumps are lost.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-50 P 2/4

FCOM ←C 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ENGINE FEED
Ident.: DSC-28-10-50-00000199.0009001 / 22 MAY 12
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-50 P 3/4

FCOM D→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ENGINE FEED
Ident.: DSC-28-10-50-00000199.0012001 / 22 MAY 12
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-50 P 4/4

FCOM ←D 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - FUEL FEED SEQUENCE
OPERATING MANUAL
NORMAL OPERATION
Ident.: DSC-28-10-60-00000219.0007001 / 14 FEB 11
Fuel is always fed to the engines from the inner tanks.

The fuel transfer sequence is, as follows:
1. Each inner tank empties down to 4 000 kg (8 830 lb).
2. Trim tank fuel transfers to the inner tanks.
4. Outer tank fuel transfers to the inner tanks.
Note: If required for CG control, the trim tank may be emptied earlier (Refer to DSC-28-10-90
General).
NORMAL OPERATION
Ident.: DSC-28-10-60-00000219.0008001 / 14 FEB 11
Fuel is always fed to the engines from the inner tanks.

The fuel transfer sequence is as follows:
1. Center tank fuel transfers to the inner tanks.
3. Trim tank fuel transfers to the inner tanks.
5. Outer tank fuel transfers to the inner tanks.
Note: If required for CG control, the trim tank may be emptied earlier (Refer to DSC-28-10-90
General).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-60 P 1/2

FCOM A 26 MAY 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - FUEL FEED SEQUENCE
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-60 P 2/2

FCOM 26 MAY 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - AUTOMATIC FUEL TRANSFERS
OPERATING MANUAL
CENTER TO INNER TANK TRANSFER

Ident.: DSC-28-10-70-00000221.0001001 / 14 FEB 11
The center tank pumps run continuously, whenever there is fuel in the center tank. Each inner tank
inlet valve controls the transfer by cycling its inner tank contents between full and approximately
2 000 kg (4 415 lb) below full. When the center tank is empty, both center tank pumps temporarily
stop, and both inner tank inlet valves close.
OUTER TO INNER TANK TRANSFER

Ident.: DSC-28-10-70-00000230.0002001 / 14 FEB 11
Applicable to: ALL
The outer tank fuel is transferred to the inner tanks by gravity. Each outer tank transfer valve controls
the transfer by cycling the associated inner tanks contents between 3 500 kg (7 720 lb) and 4 000 kg
(8 830 lb). When each outer tank has been empty for 5 min, its outer tank transfer valves close.
TRIM TANK TRANSFER

Ident.: DSC-28-10-70-00000240.0001001 / 10 DEC 09
Applicable to: ALL
Refer to DSC-28-10-90 General.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-70 P 1/4

FCOM A to C 26 MAY 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ECAM INDICATION
Ident.: DSC-28-10-70-00000242.0008001 / 09 OCT 12
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-70 P 2/4

FCOM D→ 26 MAY 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ECAM INDICATION
Ident.: DSC-28-10-70-00000242.0010001 / 09 OCT 12
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-70 P 3/4

FCOM ←D 26 MAY 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-70 P 4/4

FCOM 26 MAY 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - MANUAL FUEL TRANSFERS
OPERATING MANUAL
CENTER TO INNER TANK TRANSFER

Ident.: DSC-28-10-80-00000244.0001001 / 14 FEB 11
Transfer from the center to inner tanks can be manually selected with the CTR TK XFR pb. When
selected MAN, the inner tank inlet valves are opened and the CTR TK pumps run.
The CTR TK pumps must be selected OFF, when the:
‐ Inner tanks are full, to manually prevent inner tank overflow.
‐ Center tank is empty.
Note: 1. When the fuel quantity of each inner tank is below 17 000 kg (37 520 lb), all center tank
fuel can be transferred without any risk of overflow.
2. When the CTR TK XFR pb is pressed, aft transfer is inhibited.

Ident.: DSC-28-10-80-00000247.0001001 / 14 FEB 11
Transfer from the outer to inner tanks can be manually selected with the OUTR TK XFR pb. When
selected ON, the outer tank fuel transfer valves, and the inner and outer inlet valves are opened.
Note: 1. During an outer to inner tank transfer, the CTR TK pumps must be selected OFF to avoid
inadvertent fuel transfer from the center tank to outer tanks.
2. When the OUTR TK XFR pb is pressed, aft transfer is inhibited.

Ident.: DSC-28-10-80-00000247.0003001 / 14 FEB 11
Transfer from the outer to inner tanks can be manually selected with the OUTR TK XFR pb. When
selected ON, the outer tank fuel transfer valves, and the inner and outer inlet valves are opened.
Note: When the OUTR TK XFR pb is pressed, aft transfer is inhibited.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-80 P 1/2

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - MANUAL FUEL TRANSFERS
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-80 P 2/2

FCOM 26 MAY 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - CG CONTROL - TRIM TANK TRANSFER
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-28-10-90-00000263.0001001 / 10 DEC 09
Applicable to: ALL
The trim tank transfer system controls the aircraft's Center of Gravity (CG).
‐ The system either transfers fuel to the trim tank (aft transfer) or from the trim tank (forward
transfer).
‐ This movement of fuel changes the aircraft's CG.
‐ When the aircraft is in cruise, the system optimizes the CG position to increase fuel economy by
reducing drag.
‐ Normal operation is automatic, but the crew can manually select a forward fuel transfer.
‐ The Fuel Control and Monitoring Computer (FCMC) calculates the aircraft's CG and compares it
to a target value. (This target depends on the aircraft's actual weight. Refer to DSC-28-10-90 AFT
CG Target).
‐ Based on this calculation, the FCMC determines the quantity of fuel to be moved aft or forward in
flight.
AFT CG TARGET
Ident.: DSC-28-10-90-00000279.0007001 / 21 MAR 17
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-90 P 1/18

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
AFT CG TARGET
Ident.: DSC-28-10-90-00000279.0006001 / 21 MAR 17
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-90 P 2/18

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
NORMAL OPERATION
Ident.: DSC-28-10-90-00000289.0008001 / 22 FEB 17
Applicable to: ALL
Automatic CG control:
‐ Begins during climb to FL 255.
‐ Ends at descent to FL 245, or when the FMGES time to destination is less than 35 min (or less
than 75 min in the case of trim tank forward transfer pump failure).
Note: 1. The trim pipe isolation valve and the trim tank isolation valve are closed during takeoff
and landing. It is possible to reopen them, when the landing gear is up and the slats are
retracted (or when the MODE SEL sw is set at REFUEL on the REFUEL panel).
2. If the FMGEC detects a CG that is too far aft, then the target will automatically be
moved forward by 3 %. The target also moves forward 1.5 % in the case of FQI data
degradation, or if ZFW/ZFWCG have not been entered or need to be reinitialized in flight
(modifying CG/GW via the MCDU).
3. The above-mentioned CG target alterations should be added together.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-90 P 3/18

FCOM C 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
AFT FUEL TRANSFER

Ident.: DSC-28-10-90-A-00000305.0004001 / 21 MAR 17
GENERAL
In flight, the FCMC only starts an AFT fuel transfer, when all of the following conditions are met:
‐ Landing gear is retracted.
‐ Slats are retracted.
‐ Trim tank is not full.
‐ Inner tank's fuel quantity is above 6 250 kg (13 790 lb).
‐ Aircraft is above FL 255.
‐ Aircraft CG is not on target.
Normally, only one aft fuel transfer occurs per flight. However, if the CG in cruise is ahead of the
target by more than 2 %, and the trim tank quantity is below 3 000 kg (6 620 lb), an additional aft
transfer will occur. An aft transfer terminates when the:
‐ Computed CG = Target CG -0.5 % , or
‐ Trim tank high level sensor becomes wet, or
‐ Inner tank's fuel quantity reaches 6 250 kg (13 790 lb), or
‐ T Tank pushbutton is selected FWD, or
‐ Fuel transfer from the outer tanks to the inner tanks is manually selected.
Fuel for trim tank aft transfer is provided by the inner tanks through the engine feed pumps. If,
during the transfer, the inner tanks are unbalanced by more than 500 kg (1 100 lb), the transfer will
stop on the lightest side, and the related aft transfer valve will automatically close until fuel balance
is restored.
Ident.: DSC-28-10-90-A-00000305.0005001 / 21 MAR 17
GENERAL
In flight, the FCMC only starts an AFT fuel transfer, when all of the following conditions are met:
‐ Landing gear is retracted.
‐ Slats are retracted.
‐ Trim tank is not full.
‐ Inner tank's fuel quantity is above 6 250 kg (13 790 lb).
‐ Aircraft is above FL 255.
‐ Aircraft CG is not on target.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-90 P 4/18

FCOM D→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Normally, only one aft fuel transfer occurs per flight. However, if the CG in cruise is ahead of the
target by more than 2 % , and the trim tank quantity is below 3 000 kg (6 620 lb), an additional aft
transfer will occur. An aft transfer stops when the :
‐ Computed CG = Target CG -0.5 % , or
‐ Trim tank high level sensor becomes wet, or
‐ Inner tank's fuel quantity reaches 6 250 kg (13 790 lb), or
‐ T TANK MODE pushbutton is set to FWD, or
‐ Fuel transfer from the center or outer tanks to the inner tanks is manually selected.
‐ Fuel automatically transfers from the center tank to the inner tanks.
Fuel for trim tank aft transfer is provided by the center TK, when it contains fuel, or by the inner
tanks when the center tank is empty. If, during the transfer, the inner tanks are unbalanced by
more than 500 kg (1 100 lb), the transfer will stop on the lightest side, and the related aft transfer
valve will automatically close until fuel balance is restored.
Ident.: DSC-28-10-90-A-00000302.0006001 / 09 OCT 12
ECAM INDICATION
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-90 P 5/18

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-28-10-90-A-00000302.0008001 / 09 OCT 12

ECAM INDICATION
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-90 P 6/18

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-28-10-90-A-00000317.0004001 / 21 MAR 17

SCHEMATIC
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-90 P 7/18

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-28-10-90-A-00000317.0005001 / 21 MAR 17

SCHEMATIC
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-90 P 8/18

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
AUTOMATIC FORWARD FUEL TRANSFER

Ident.: DSC-28-10-90-B-00000327.0008001 / 16 MAR 11
GENERAL
The FCMC sends a forward fuel transfer signal, if one of the following conditions are met:
‐ The calculated CG = Target. It stops when the computed CG = The target CG -0.5 %.
‐ The fuel contents of one of the two inner tanks decreases to 4 000 kg (8 830 lb). Forward fuel
transfer stops, when the fuel content reaches 5 000 kg (11 030 lb)
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-90 P 9/18

FCOM ← D to E → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
‐ The FMGES sends a time-to-destination signal below the threshold, or the aircraft descends
below FL 245. In this case, transfer is continuous but is controlled by the inner tank high levels
to prevent overflow.
‐ In electrical emergency configuration.
A forward transfer is normally directed to the inner tanks.
If there is an imbalance of 500 kg (1 100 lb) between the two inner tanks, the forward transfer is
directed to the lighter inner tank.
In normal operations, a forward transfer is performed by the trim tank forward transfer pump. The
pump starts to operate, when both the landing gear and the slats are retracted, as long as there is
fuel in the trim tank. It operates continuously during the flight, until the trim tank is empty, or the T.
TANK FEED selector is set to ISOL.
Note: The running trim tank forward transfer pump has no effect on the aft transfer, because
the TRIM TK ISOL VALVE is normally closed during this transfer.
In the event of pump failure, forward transfer occurs by gravity, through the trim tank non-return
valve. The FCMC:
‐ Inhibits the forward transfer by closing the TRIM PIPE ISOL VALVE, when the aircraft pitch
exceeds 3.4 ° for more than one minute.
‐ Restarts the forward transfer, when the aircraft attitude is lower than 3.4 ° for more than 1 min.
Ident.: DSC-28-10-90-B-00000327.0009001 / 28 MAR 11
GENERAL
The FCMC sends a forward fuel transfer signal, if one of the following conditions are met:
‐ The calculated CG = Target. Forward fuel transfer stops, when the computed CG = The target
CG -0.5 %.
‐ The fuel contents of one of the two inner tanks decreases to 4 000 kg (8 830 lb). Forward fuel
transfer stops, when the fuel content reaches 5 000 kg (11 030 lb)
‐ The FMGES sends a time-to-destination signal below the threshold, or the aircraft descends
below FL 245. In this case, transfer is continuous but is controlled by the inner tank high levels
to prevent overflow.
‐ Jettison  is initiated.
‐ In electrical emergency configuration.
Note: If the center tank contains fuel and the CG is forward of 32 % MAC, the transfer will be
completed in two steps:
‐ When the center tank quantity reaches 17 000 kg (37 520 lb), the trim tank is
decreased to 2 400 kg (5 290 lb).
‐ When the center tank is empty, the trim tank will be emptied.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-90 P 10/18

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
A forward transfer:
‐ Is normally directed to the inner tanks, and may be directed to the center tank, if it is not empty.
‐ Is directed to the lighter inner tank, if there is an imbalance of 500 kg (1 100 lb) between the two
inner tanks.
In emergency electrical configuration, the forward transfer is always directed to the inner tanks.
In normal operations, a forward transfer is performed by the trim tank forward transfer pump. The
pump starts to operate, when both the landing gear and the slats are retracted, as long as there is
fuel in the trim tank. It operates continuously during the flight, until the trim tank is empty, or the T.
TANK FEED selector is set to ISOL.
Note: The running trim tank forward transfer pump has no effect on the aft transfer, because
the TRIM TK ISOL VALVE is normally closed during this transfer.
In the event of pump failure, forward transfer occurs by gravity, through the trim tank non-return
valve. The FCMC:
‐ Inhibits the forward transfer by closing the TRIM PIPE ISOL VALVE, when the aircraft pitch
exceeds 3.4 ° for more than one minute.
‐ Restarts the forward transfer, when the aircraft attitude is lower than 3.4 ° for more than 1 min.
Ident.: DSC-28-10-90-B-00000339.0001001 / 14 FEB 11
CENTER TANK EMPTY

‐ Fuel is transferred from the trim tank to the inner tanks.
‐ If an inner tank reaches the high level, the related inlet valve closes to prevent tank overflow.
‐ It reopens when the inner tank quantity reaches 2 000 kg (4 415 lb) below high level.
Ident.: DSC-28-10-90-B-00000347.0001001 / 14 FEB 11
CENTER TANK NOT EMPTY

Fuel is transferred from the trim tank to the center tank.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-90 P 11/18

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-28-10-90-B-00000349.0008001 / 09 OCT 12

ECAM INDICATION
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-90 P 12/18

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-28-10-90-B-00000349.0006001 / 09 OCT 12

ECAM INDICATION
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-90 P 13/18

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-28-10-90-B-00000335.0002001 / 22 MAY 12

SCHEMATIC
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-90 P 14/18

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-28-10-90-B-00000335.0005001 / 22 MAY 12

SCHEMATIC
MANUAL FORWARD FUEL TRANSFER

Ident.: DSC-28-10-90-00000355.0005001 / 21 NOV 11
When the T. TANK pushbutton is pressed, the FWD light comes on white, and:
‐ The TRIM TK ISOL valve opens.
‐ The AUX FWD XFR valve opens.
‐ The TRIM PIPE ISOL valve opens.
‐ The two AFT XFR valves close.
‐ The trim tank forward transfer pump starts.
Fuel transfers from the trim tank to the inner tanks through the forward transfer pump.
Inner tank overflow must be manually prevented, by releasing the pushbutton when the tank is full.
When the T. TANK pushbutton is released, the forward transfer stops.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-90 P 15/18

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
MANUAL FORWARD FUEL TRANSFER

Ident.: DSC-28-10-90-00000355.0006001 / 21 NOV 11
When the T. TANK pushbutton is pressed, the FWD light comes on white, and:
‐ The TRIM TK ISOL valve opens.
‐ The AUX FWD XFR valve opens.
‐ The TRIM PIPE ISOL valve closes.
‐ The two AFT XFR valves close.
‐ The trim tank forward transfer pump starts.
Fuel transfers from the trim tank to the center tank.
Center tank overflow must be manually prevented, by releasing the pushbutton when the tank is full.
When the T. TANK pushbutton is released, the forward transfer stops.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-90 P 16/18

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-90 P 17/18

FCOM ←F 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-90 P 18/18

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - APU FEED
OPERATING MANUAL
FWD APU PUMP FEED

Ident.: DSC-28-10-100-00000359.0003001 / 14 FEB 11
Applicable to: ALL
The APU is fed from the Engine 1 collector cells (in the left inner tank) through the APU FWD pump
and the APU ISOL valve when :
‐ On the ground after 2 min (except during trim tank refueling), or
‐ In flight below FL 255, or
‐ In flight above FL 255, when the trim tank is empty.
In this case, the AFT APU pump is not running.
AFT APU PUMP FEED

Ident.: DSC-28-10-100-00000765.0002001 / 14 FEB 11
Applicable to: ALL
The APU is fed from the trim pipe :

‐ The first two minutes when on the ground, or
‐ During trim tank refueling or,
‐ During an aft transfer.
The APU is fed from the trim tank :
‐ In flight above FL 255, as long as the trim tank is not empty, or
‐ During a forward transfer.
In the above cases, the :
‐ AFT APU pump is running.
‐ FWD APU pump is not running.
‐ APU ISOL valve is closed.
Note: The AFT APU pump will automatically start, in the event of FWD APU pump failure.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-100 P 1/10

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
APU FEED
Ident.: DSC-28-10-100-00000772.0006001 / 22 MAY 12
LH INR TK
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-100 P 2/10

FCOM C→ 26 MAY 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
TRIM PIPE
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-100 P 3/10

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-100 P 4/10

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
TRIM TANK
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-100 P 5/10

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
APU FEED
Ident.: DSC-28-10-100-00000772.0008001 / 22 MAY 12
LH INR TK
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-100 P 6/10

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
TRIM PIPE
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-100 P 7/10

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-100 P 8/10

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
TRIM TANK
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-100 P 9/10

FCOM ←C 26 MAY 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-100 P 10/10

FCOM 26 MAY 15
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - REFUELING - DEFUELING
OPERATING MANUAL
REFUELING-DEFUELING
Ident.: DSC-28-10-110-00000776.0007001 / 20 MAR 17
During automatic refueling, the trim tank is filled when the preselected fuel quantity is greater than
36 500 kg, whatever the density.
One refuel coupling is installed under the right wing. A second refuel coupling  allows refueling
from the left side of the aircraft.
A refuel panel is located on the fuselage side, beneath the right wing.
A second and/or third panel  is installed close to the refuel couplings.
A gallery connects the refueling coupling to the fuel inlet valve of each tank.
From the cockpit, refueling can be controlled with the refuel pushbutton  . Although manual
control is possible, it is normally automatic when the required fuel load is set on the preselector. In
addition, it is possible to refuel by battery power only.
Any tanks that require refueling, start to be refueled simultaneously. Refuel valves automatically
close, either when the required quantity is reached, or when high level is detected.
Wing tank gravity refueling is achieved via overwing refueling points. If the FCMC is powered,
transfer is possible from any tank to outer or inner. The refueling time at nominal pressure (50 PSI)
is approximately 35 min for all tanks. When both side couplings  are used, the refueling time is
approximately 25 min for all tanks.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-110 P 1/4

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
REFUELING-DEFUELING
Ident.: DSC-28-10-110-00000776.0005001 / 20 MAR 17
During automatic refueling, the trim tank is filled when the preselected fuel quantity is greater than
36 500 kg, whatever the density.
Two refuel couplings are installed under the wings. These couplings allow refueling from both the
right and left sides of the aircraft.
A refuel panel is located on the fuselage side, beneath the right wing.
A second and/or third panel  is installed close to the refuel couplings.
A gallery connects the refueling coupling to the fuel inlet valve of each tank.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-110 P 2/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
From the cockpit, refueling can be controlled with the refuel pushbutton  . Although manual
control is possible, it is normally automatic when the required fuel load is set on the preselector. In
addition, it is possible to refuel by battery power only.
Any tanks that require refueling, start to be refueled simultaneously. Refuel valves automatically
close, either when the required quantity is reached, or when high level is detected.
Wing tank gravity refueling is achieved via overwing refueling points. If the FCMC is powered,
transfer is possible from any tank (with inner or center pumps) to outer, inner or center tanks. When
both side couplings are used, the refueling time at nominal pressure (50 PSI) is approximately 33 min
for all tanks.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-110 P 3/4

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-10-110 P 4/4

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
OVERHEAD PANEL
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-28-20-H-00020032.0009001 / 17 MAR 17
Ident.: DSC-28-20-H-00020050.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
L(R) 1(2) pb-sw

On : Pump is on.
OFF : Pump is off.
FAULT light : The amber light and the ECAM caution come on, when the delivered pressure
drops. It is inhibited when OFF is selected.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-20 P 1/18

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-28-20-H-00020051.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
L(R) STBY pb-sw

On : Standby pump runs when associated main pump is failed or off.
OFF : Pump is off.
FAULT light : The amber light and the ECAM caution come on, when the delivered pressure
drops. It is inhibited when OFF is selected, or the main pump is running.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-H-00020061.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
L(R) CTR TK pb-sw

On : The center tank pump runs permanently. Appropriate valves control the
transfer. The pump stops automatically, when the tank is empty.
OFF : The pump is off.
FAULT light : The amber light and the ECAM caution come on, when:
‐ The delivery pressure drops, or
‐ The trim pipe ISOL valve is failed open, or
‐ A manual transfer from the center tank is required (failure of automatic
transfer) and both inner tank quantities are above 17 000 kg (37 520 lb), or
‐ One outer or inner inlet valve is failed open and both inner tank quantities are
above 17 000 kg (37 520 lb).
It is inhibited when OFF position is selected.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-H-00020052.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
T TANK MODE pb-sw

AUTO : The FCMC controls the CG.
FWD : Initiates a manual forward transfer to the center tank, by opening:
‐ The trim tank ISOL valve,
‐ The auxiliary forward transfer valve.
And by closing:
‐ The trim pipe ISOL valve,
‐ The aft transfer valves.
And, by operating the trim tank forward transfer pump  .
Center tank overflow must be manually prevented.
FAULT light : The amber light and the ECAM caution come on when:
‐ The FMGS detects an excess aft CG, based on the THS position
(independent of fuel quantity), or
‐ The FCMC is unable to carry out the forward transfer, or
‐ The FUEL LO TEMP warning is triggered.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-20 P 2/18

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-28-20-H-00020053.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
T TANK FEED selector

AUTO : Stops the forward transfer when the trim tank is at low level, to maintain the
transfer line full.
ISOL : The transfer line is isolated as the following valves close:
‐ Trim tank ISOL valve,
‐ Trim tank inlet valve,
‐ Auxiliary forward transfer valve,
‐ Trim pipe isolation valve.
The trim tank forward transfer pump stops.
OPEN : The valves used during a manual forward transfer, and the trim tank inlet valve
open. The valves remain open, until 3 min after the trim tank is low, to allow
drainage of the transfer pipe.
Note: APU supply is not possible, when the pipe is drained.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-H-00020054.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
OUTR TK XFR pb-sw (GUARDED)

ON : Initiates the outer to inner tank transfer by opening:
‐ The outer transfer valves,
‐ The outer inlet valves,
‐ The inner inlet valves.
AUTO : The FCMC controls the outer to inner tank transfer.
FAULT light : The amber light, and the ECAM caution come on, when:
‐ The inner tank low level is reached and the center tanks are not empty, or
‐ The FCMC is unable to carry out the transfer to the inner tanks, or
‐ The FUEL LO TEMP warning is triggered.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-H-00020057.0003001 / 17 MAR 17
X FEED pb-sw
ON : The valve opens.
AUTO : The valve automatically opens in electrical emergency configuration.
OPEN light : The green light comes on when the valve is fully open.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-H-00020060.0005001 / 17 MAR 17
CTR TANK XFR pb-sw

AUTO : The FCMC controls the center to inner tank transfer.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-20 P 3/18

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
MAN : Initiates the center to inner tank transfer by opening the inner tank inlet valves.
To avoid inner tank overflow, the center tank pumps may be selected off.
FAULT light : The amber light and the ECAM caution come on when:
‐ The inner tank low level is reached and the center tank is not empty, or
‐ The FCMC is unable to carry out the transfer to the inner tanks.
OVERHEAD PANEL (CONT'D)

Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-28-20-I-00020033.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Ident.: DSC-28-20-I-00020069.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
INR TK SPLIT L(R) pb-sw (GUARDED)

ON : The valve closes and the inner tank is split into two parts.
‐ The fuel may be used from either inner tank division.
The light comes on amber.
Off : The split valve (inner tank division) is open.
The inner tank is used as a single tank.
SHUT : The light comes on blue, when the valve is shut.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-I-00020070.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
JETTISON ARM pb-sw  (GUARDED IN OFF)

ON : Jettison is armed, and can be activated with the ACTIVE pb-sw.
Off : Jettison is disarmed.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-20 P 4/18

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-28-20-I-00020077.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
JETTISON ACTIVE pb-sw  (GUARDED IN OFF)

ON : Jettison is activated, provided that the ARM pb-sw is set to ON.
Off : Jettison is not active.
OPEN light : Comes on, when the jettison valves are open.
REFUELING CONTROL PANEL

Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-28-20-D-00020049.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-20 P 5/18

FCOM ← B to C → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-28-20-D-00020080.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
FUEL QUANTITY INDICATOR

Displays, in kg (or lbs) × 1000 :
‐ The fuel quantity of each tank.
‐ The pre-selected total quantity. At electrical power up (or FCMC reset), the display shows the
ACTUAL value minus 500 kg (1 100 lb). Otherwise, the last pre-selected value is displayed.
‐ The actual total fuel on board.
‐ The applicable units (kg or lbs).
‐ The CKPT light : Comes on when a BLOCK FUEL value has been entered and confirmed on
the cockpit MCDU.
‐ The END light, which flashes when :
• There is an imbalance greater than 3 000 kg (6 620 lb), after refueling.
• A failure is detected during a high level test.
• Refueling is aborted.
Once refueling is finished, the END light stays on.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-D-00020081.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
HI LVL light
Comes on blue, when high level is detected (i.e. both high level sensors are wet).
The corresponding refuel valve automatically closes.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-D-00020082.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
OVERFLOW light
Comes on amber, when the associated vent tank overflow sensor is covered with fuel.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-D-00020083.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
INCREASE/DECREASE preselector sw
Pressing either side of the switch increases or decreases the preselected quantity.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-D-00020084.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
TRANSF VALVE sw (GUARDED IN CLOSED)

CLOSED : Transfer valves are closed.
OPEN : If the inner tank pumps are on for ground transfer, the aft transfer valves open.
The trim tank inlet valve closes.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-20 P 6/18

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-28-20-D-00020085.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
APU EMERG pb (GUARDED)

When pressed, it initiates the APU shutdown sequence.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-D-00020086.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
POWER SUPPLY sw (GUARDED IN NORM)

NORM : Refueling / Defueling can be supplied either by external power or with the APU
generator on line.
BAT : Refueling / Defueling is battery-powered.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-D-00020087.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
HIGH LEVEL TEST sw (GUARDED)

During the test :
‐ Refueling stops.
‐ HI LEVEL and OVERFLOW lights come on, if their circuits are serviceable.
‐ CKPT and END lights come on.
‐ The PRESELECTED and ACTUAL fuel quantity display all 8 s.
If a failure occurs during the high level test :
‐ The END light flashes and remains flashing after completion.
‐ The affected HI LVL light remains on.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-D-00020088.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
REFUEL/DEFUEL VALVES selector (GUARDED IN NORM)

NORM : Refuel / Defuel valves are automatically controlled.
OPEN : Valves open when the MODE SELECT switch is set to the REFUEL or DEFUEL
position. In the REFUEL position, each refuel/defuel valve closes when high level is
detected in the associated tank.
SHUT : Valves close.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-D-00020098.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
MODE SELECT sw (GUARDED AT OFF)

OFF : Refueling system is off.
Refuel valves close.
APU emergency shutdown and high level test remain available.
REFUEL : Refuel valves operate in automatic or manual mode, depending on the
REFUEL / DEFUEL VALVES switch position.
DEFUEL : Refuel valves are open.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-20 P 7/18

FCOM ←C 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
FUEL QTY, TEMP, GW AND CG INDICATIONS

Ident.: DSC-28-20-F-00020036.0025001 / 21 MAR 17
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-20 P 8/18

FCOM D→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-28-20-F-00020036.0019001 / 21 MAR 17

Ident.: DSC-28-20-F-00020106.0001001 / 21 MAR 17

Applicable to: ALL
FUEL USED (FU) INDICATION (PER ENGINE)

‐ It is normally green.
‐ If the fuel flow detection system fails, the FADEC computes a synthetic FU value.
‐ When this computed value is considered erroneous by more than 136 kg (300 lb), the displayed
value is crossed out with two amber bars.
‐ Units may either be in KG or LB, depending on the DMC pin program.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-20 P 9/18

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-28-20-F-00020107.0001001 / 17 MAR 17

Applicable to: ALL
TOTAL FUEL USED (FU) INDICATION

‐ When either “engine fuel used” is crossed, two amber bars appear across the value.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-F-00020108.0005001 / 17 MAR 17

‐ When the fuel quantity indication is not accurate, two amber bars appear across the last two
digits.
‐ If the fuel is unusable (trim or outer tanks only), the quantity indication is displayed in an amber
box.
‐ The fuel quantity indication of the inner tanks becomes amber, in the case of low level or
overflow.
‐ In the case of imbalance of more than 3 000 kg (6 622 lb) between the left and right wing tanks,
fuel quantity pulses in the inner and outer tanks.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-F-00020108.0001001 / 17 MAR 17

digits.
‐ If the fuel is unusable (trim or outer tanks only), the quantity indication is displayed in an amber
box.
‐ A partial amber box appears, if 15 t of the center tank fuel is unusable.
‐ The fuel quantity indication of the inner tanks becomes amber, in case of low level or overflow.
‐ In the case of imbalance of more than 3 000 kg (6 622 lb) between the left wing tank and right
wing tanks, the fuel quantity pulses in the inner and outer tanks.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-20 P 10/18

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-28-20-F-00020109.0001001 / 17 MAR 17

Applicable to: ALL
COLLECTOR CELL FUEL QUANTITY INDICATION

digits.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-F-00020110.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
FUEL ON BOARD (FOB) QUANTITY INDICATION

‐ In case of degraded accuracy, the last two digits are dashed.
Note: In case any tank’s fuel is partially not usable, the quantity indication is displayed in a
partial amber box.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-F-00020111.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
GROSS WEIGHT INDICATION

digits.
‐ When the gross weight is not computed on ground, blue dashes appear.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-F-00020112.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
CENTER OF GRAVITY (CG) INDICATION

‐ When the FMGEC (FE part) detects an excess aft CG, it comes on red.
‐ When the CG is not computed on ground, blue dashes appear.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-20 P 11/18

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-28-20-F-00020113.0001001 / 17 MAR 17

Applicable to: ALL
FUEL TEMPERATURE INDICATION

‐ It is amber in the following cases:
• Inner tanks: Above 49 °C in flight, or 45 °C on ground.
• Outer or trim tanks: Below -40 °C.
• Inner tanks: Below -37 °C.
‐ It disappears, when the tank quantity is below:
• 1 000 kg (2 200 lb) for the trim tank.
• 1 100 kg (2 420 lb) for the outer tank.
Note: Fuel temperature is not indicated for the right outer tank.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-F-00020114.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
ENGINE (ENG) NUMBER

‐ It is white, when the ENG is running.
‐ It is amber, when the ENG is not running.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-F-00020115.0003001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
F. FLOW 1+2 INDICATION

‐ It is in green.
‐ It is displayed using ECU or EEC indications.
‐ Units may either be in KG/MIN or LB/MIN, depending on the DMC pin program.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-20 P 12/18

FCOM ←D 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
FUEL FEED, TRANSFER AND JETTISON (IF-INSTALLED) INDICATIONS

Ident.: DSC-28-20-G-00020041.0010001 / 21 MAR 17
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-20 P 13/18

FCOM E→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-28-20-G-00020041.0007001 / 21 MAR 17

Ident.: DSC-28-20-G-00020117.0001001 / 17 MAR 17

Applicable to: ALL
ENGINE LP VALVES INDICATION

In line - Green : Valve is open.
In line - Amber : Valve is abnormally open.
Cross line - Amber : Valve is closed.
Transit - Amber : Valve is in transit.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-20 P 14/18

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-28-20-G-00020118.0001001 / 17 MAR 17

Applicable to: ALL
ENGINE FEED PUMPS INDICATION

In line - Green : Pump is running.
In line - Amber : Pump abnormally running.
Cross line - Amber : Pump not running.
"LO" - Amber : Pump pressure is low. Pump is on.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-G-00020119.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
STANDBY PUMPS INDICATION

Identical to the normal pump, except when pump is not running.
Cross line - Green : Pump not running.
Cross line - Amber : Pump abnormally not running.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-G-00020120.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
OUTER TO INNER TRANSFER INDICATION

▹ Green : Normal transfer (auto).
▸ Green : Manual transfer.
▸ Amber : Abnormal transfer.
No display : No transfer.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-G-00020121.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
CENTER TO INNER TRANSFER INDICATION

Identical to the transfer from outer to inner.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-G-00020122.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
CENTER TANK PUMPS INDICATION

Identical to the standby pumps.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-G-00020123.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
TRIM TANK ISOLATION INDICATION

This valve represents the trim tank isolation valve and the trim tank inlet valve.
In line - Green : One valve is open.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-20 P 15/18

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Cross line - Green : Both valves are closed.

In line - Amber : One valve is abnormally open.
Cross line - Amber : Both valves are abnormally closed.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-G-00020124.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
TRIM TO CENTER TRANSFER INDICATION

Green : Manual forward ( ) transfer.
Green : Normal aft ( ) or forward ( ) transfer (auto).
Amber : Abnormal aft ( ) or forward ( ) transfer.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-G-00020125.0003001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
TRIM TO INNER TRANSFER INDICATION

Green : Normal aft ( ) or forward ( ) transfer.
Amber : Abnormal aft ( ) or forward ( ) transfer.
If fuel transfers to/from only one inner tank due to a fuel imbalance, (inner tanks are imbalanced by
more than 500 kg/1 100 lb) only one arrow is displayed in green.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-G-00020126.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
APU LP VALVE INDICATION

APU (White) ▿ (White) : Valve is closed.
APU (White) ▿ (Green) : Fuel provided to the APU.
APU (Amber) ▾ (Amber) : Failed open.
APU (amber) : Failed closed.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-G-00020127.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
JETTISON  INDICATION
No display : No jettison.
JETTISON (Green) : Jettison normally active.
JETTISON (Amber) : Abnormal jettison (valve abnormally open).
JETTISON (Amber) : Valve abnormally closed.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-20 P 16/18

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-28-20-G-00020128.0001001 / 17 MAR 17

Applicable to: ALL
X-FEED VALVE
Cross line - Green : Valve is closed.
In line - Green : Valve is open.
Cross line - Amber : Valve is abnormally closed.
In line - Amber : Valve is abnormally open.
Transit - Amber : Valve is in transit.
ECAM UPPER DISPLAY

Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-28-20-E-00020035.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Ident.: DSC-28-20-E-00020100.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
FOB - FUEL ON BOARD INDICATION

‐ An amber half box appears around FOB, when the indicated quantity is not fully usable.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-20 P 17/18

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
FUEL
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
‐ When the fuel quantity indication is inaccurate, two amber lines appear across the last two
digits.
‐ Units may be indicated in kg or lbs.
MEMO DISPLAY
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-28-20-B-00017172.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
FUEL X FEED : This memo appears in green when the crossfeed valve is open
(automatically or manually). It becomes amber during takeoff
(flight phases 3, 4 and 5).
Ident.: DSC-28-20-B-00017171.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
OUTR TK XFR : This memo appears in green during fuel transfer from outer tank
into the inner tank.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-B-00017167.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
OUTR TK XFRD : This memo appears in green when the outer tank has been
emptied following a transfer into the inner tank.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-B-00017158.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
REFUEL IN PROCESS : This memo appears in green, in flight phases 1 and 10, if the
refuel panel switches are not set in the appropriate position for
flight.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-B-00017163.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
REFUEL PNL : This memo appears in amber in flight phase 2 (after engine
start), if the refuel panel or the cockpit refuel pb  are not set
in the appropriate position for flight.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-B-00017165.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
T TK XFRD : This memo appears in green in flight phases 6, 7, 8 and 9 when

the trim tank has been emptied following a forward transfer.
Ident.: DSC-28-20-B-00017166.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
TRIM TK XFR : This memo appears in green during trim tank transfer.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-28-20 P 18/18

FCOM ← F to G 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY

AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
HYDRAULIC
UNCONTROLLED COPY
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
HYDRAULIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-29-10-20 Generation
Green System Pumps............................................................................................................................................. A
Blue System Pumps................................................................................................................................................ B
Yellow System Pumps.............................................................................................................................................C
Ram Air Turbine (RAT)........................................................................................................................................... D
System Accumulators.............................................................................................................................................. E
Fire Shutoff Valves.................................................................................................................................................. F
Filters....................................................................................................................................................................... G
Hydraulic System Monitoring Unit (HSMU).............................................................................................................H
Hydraulic Generation.................................................................................................................................................I
Reservoir Pressurization.......................................................................................................................................... J
Indications................................................................................................................................................................ K
DSC-29-10-30 Distribution
Distribution............................................................................................................................................................... A
Leak Measurement Valves...................................................................................................................................... B
Priority Function.......................................................................................................................................................C

Overhead Panel....................................................................................................................................................... A
Overhead Panel (Cont'd)......................................................................................................................................... B
ECAM HYD Page.................................................................................................................................................... C
Memo Display.......................................................................................................................................................... D

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
HYDRAULIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
HYDRAULIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-29-10-10-00000265.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The aircraft has three, independent, continuously-operating hydraulic systems : GREEN, BLUE,
and YELLOW. Each system is supplied from its own hydraulic reservoir. Normal system operating
pressure is 3 000 PSI (2 500 PSI for RAT). There is no possibility to transfer hydraulic fluid from one
system to another.
The system is monitored by a Hydraulic System Monitoring Unit (HSMU).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-29-10-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
HYDRAULIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-29-10-10 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
HYDRAULIC
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - GENERATION
OPERATING MANUAL
GREEN SYSTEM PUMPS

Ident.: DSC-29-10-20-00000266.0003001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Two pumps, respectively driven by each engine pressurize the green system.
In addition, an electric pump which can be manually or automatically controlled can also pressurize
the green system.
If one engine fails, the electric pump runs automatically in flight, for 25 s, when the landing gear lever
is selected up (to ensure gear retraction in a proper time).
A pump, driven by a Ram Air Turbine (RAT), pressurizes the green system in the event of an
emergency.
When the RAT pressurizes the green system, the aileron, elevator, and spoiler servo control
operating speeds are reduced.
BLUE SYSTEM PUMPS

Ident.: DSC-29-10-20-00000272.0003001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
A pump, driven by Engine 1, pressurizes the blue system.

A manually-controlled electric pump can also pressurize the system.
In the event of an Engine 1 failure, in addition to a PRIM 1 or PRIM 3 loss : The BLUE ELEC
PUMP runs automatically in flight to ensure sufficient authority on the electrical rudder, thereby
counteracting the yaw sideslip induced by asymetrical thrust.
YELLOW SYSTEM PUMPS

Ident.: DSC-29-10-20-00000277.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
A pump, driven by Engine 2 pressurizes the yellow system.

In addition, an electric pump which can be manually or automatically controlled can also pressurize
the yellow system. This enables ground operations, when the engines are stopped.
The electric pump runs automatically :
‐ in flight, in the event of Engine 2 failure, if the FLAPS lever is not at 0 (to ensure flap retraction in a
proper time at takeoff).
‐ on the ground during cargo door operation.
Crewmembers can also use a hand pump to pressurize the yellow system, in order to operate the
cargo doors when no electrical power is available.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-29-10-20 P 1/8

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
HYDRAULIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Note: On each system, the electric pump flow is about 18 % of the engine-driven pump flow
capacity. It can be used to retract the surfaces, but should not be used to replace the
engine-driven pumps.
RAM AIR TURBINE (RAT)

Ident.: DSC-29-10-20-00000285.0003001 / 23 SEP 15
Applicable to: ALL
A drop-out RAT, coupled to a hydraulic pump, allows the green system to function.
The RAT may be extended at any time by pressing the RAT MAN ON pushbutton.
The RAT deploys automatically in the event of both engine failure or a low level in the green and
yellow or green and blue reservoirs. It can be manually deployed from the overhead panel. It can
only be stowed when the aircraft is on the ground.
Note: The RAT flow varies between 15 % and 45 % of an engine-driven pump flow capability,
depending on the aircraft’s speed.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-29-10-20 P 2/8

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
HYDRAULIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEM ACCUMULATORS
Ident.: DSC-29-10-20-00000288.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
An accumulator in each system helps maintain constant pressure by covering transient demands
during normal operation.
FIRE SHUTOFF VALVES

Ident.: DSC-29-10-20-00000293.0005001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
A fire shutoff valve is positioned upstream of each engine driven pump. The flight crew can close the
valve by pushing the FIRE pushbutton.
Both engine green hydraulic fire shut-off valves are automatically closed by the HSMU, in the event
of a green reservoir low level. If the blue and yellow reservoir levels are normal, 150 s after the initial
closure of the fire shut-off valves, the green engine-driven pumps are automatically depressurized
and the fire shut-off valves are reopened to lubricate and avoid damage to the engine-driven pumps.
In case of a further blue or yellow reservoir low level, the green fire shut-off valves remain closed,
enabling the green system to be restored by using the RAT. The flight crew cannot re-open the fire
shut-off valves in flight, once they have been automatically closed.
FILTERS
Ident.: DSC-29-10-20-00000295.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
L3 The hydraulic fluid is maintained clean by filters:
‐ Two HP filters on green system
‐ One HP filter on blue system and one on yellow system
‐ One on the reservoir filling system
‐ One on the braking system
‐ One return line filter on each system (LP filters)
‐ One case drain filter on engine pump permits the monitoring of wear by detection of metallic
particles in the filters.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM MONITORING UNIT (HSMU)

Ident.: DSC-29-10-20-00000296.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The HSMU monitors the hydraulic system.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-29-10-20 P 3/8

FCOM E to H → 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
HYDRAULIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
It processes :
‐ Control of electric pumps
‐ RAT extension
‐ Both engine green hydraulic fire shutoff valve closure in case of green reservoir low level
‐ Hydraulic quantity indication correction for fluid temperature
‐ Reservoir overheat warning
‐ FAULT light illumination logic
‐ LEAK MEASUREMENT VALVE control (closure inhibited in flight, closure of yellow valve during
cargo door operation).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-29-10-20 P 4/8

FCOM ←H 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
HYDRAULIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
HYDRAULIC GENERATION
Ident.: DSC-29-10-20-00000298.0002001 / 04 MAR 13
Applicable to: ALL
RESERVOIR PRESSURIZATION
Ident.: DSC-29-10-20-00000300.0002001 / 04 MAR 13
Applicable to: ALL
Normally, HP bleed air from engine 1 pressurizes the hydraulic reservoirs automatically. If the bleed
air pressure is too low, the system takes bleed air pressure from the crossbleed duct.
The system maintains a high enough pressure to prevent their pumps from cavitating.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-29-10-20 P 5/8

FCOM I to J → 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
HYDRAULIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-29-10-20 P 6/8

FCOM ←J 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
HYDRAULIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
INDICATIONS
Ident.: DSC-29-10-20-00000301.0001001 / 04 MAR 13
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-29-10-20 P 7/8

FCOM K 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
HYDRAULIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-29-10-20 P 8/8

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
HYDRAULIC
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - DISTRIBUTION
OPERATING MANUAL
DISTRIBUTION
Ident.: DSC-29-10-30-00000303.0006001 / 04 MAR 13
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-29-10-30 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
HYDRAULIC
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW DESCRIPTION - DISTRIBUTION
OPERATING MANUAL
LEAK MEASUREMENT VALVES

Ident.: DSC-29-10-30-00000306.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Used only on ground.

Leak measurement valves are positioned upstream of the primary flight controls. They are used
for the leak measurement of each system and may only be closed on ground, by using the LEAK
MEASUREMENT VALVES pushbutton on the maintenance panel. The yellow valve is automatically
closed during cargo door operation.
The HSMU inhibits the closure of the green, blue and yellow hydraulic leak measurement valves in
flight.
PRIORITY FUNCTION
Ident.: DSC-29-10-30-00000308.0001001 / 22 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
In the event of low hydraulic pressure, a priority valve cuts off hydraulic power to heavy load users
(emergency generator, nosewheel steering, landing gear) in order to keep the pressure for normal
braking and flight controls.
A Pressure-Off Brake system (installed on the flaps, slats, and THS actuator) ensures the same
function.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-29-10-30 P 2/2

FCOM B to C 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
HYDRAULIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
OVERHEAD PANEL
Ident.: DSC-29-20-00000318.0008001 / 29 MAR 12
Applicable to: ALL
(1) ENG 1 (or 2) PUMP pb sw (guarded)

On : The pump pressurizes the system, when the engine is running.
OFF : The pump is depressurized. Hydraulic power generation stops.
FAULT light : This amber light and an associated ECAM caution come on, if:
‐ The reservoir level is low
‐ The reservoir overheats
‐ Reservoir air pressure in the reservoir is low
‐ The pump pressure is low (inhibited on ground, when the engine is
stopped).
This light goes off, when the crew selects OFF, except during an overheat.
(The light stays on, for as long as the overheat lasts).

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
HYDRAULIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(2) GREEN (or YELLOW) ELEC PUMP pb

AUTO : The HSMU automatically controls the pump:
‐ The green electric pump runs:
• For 25 s, in the event of a one-engine failure, when the landing selector
lever is selected up and the aircraft speed is above 100 kt.
‐ The yellow electric pump runs:
• In the event of an Engine 2 failure, if the FLAPS lever is not at zero and
the aircraft speed is above 100 kt, provided the green electric pump is
not running for landing gear retraction. It remains running until the last
engine shutdown.
• On ground, when the lever of the cargo door manual selector valve
is set to the OPEN or CLOSE position. In this case, the yellow leak
measurement valve closes, and yellow flap motor operation is inhibited.
FAULT light : This amber light, and an associated ECAM caution come on, if:
‐ The reservoir level is low, or
‐ The reservoir overheats, or
‐ Air pressure in the reservoir is low, or
‐ The pump delivers low pressure (inhibited when the pump is not controlled
on), or
‐ The pump overheats.
The light goes off when the crew selects OFF, except during an overheat.
In the case of a reservoir or an electrical pump overheat, the fault light stays
on, until the overheat stops.
Note: If the yellow/green electric pump overheats, the pump automatically
shuts down.
(3) GREEN (or YELLOW) ELEC PUMP ON pb (springloaded-guarded)

AUTO : The electric pump is controlled by the applicable ELEC PUMP pb's.
ON : The electric pump is on, provided the ELEC PUMP pb's is not selected OFF.
After an electrical power interruption, the pump does not restart (ON light stays
off).
The ON light comes on blue, when the pump is manually or automatically
supplied.
(4) BLUE ELEC PUMP pb
Standby : The HSMU automatically controls the electric pump, in the event of an
engine 1 failure in addition to a PRIM 1 or 3 loss.

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
HYDRAULIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

FAULT light : The amber fault light comes on (provided the blue electrical pump is
running), along with an associated ECAM caution, if:
‐ The reservoir level is low, or
‐ Air pressure in the reservoir or pump pressure is low, or
‐ The reservoir or the pump overheat.
The light goes off when the crew selects OFF, except during an overheat.
In the case of a reservoir or an electrical pump overheat, the fault light stays
on, until the overheat stops.
Note: If the blue electric pump overheats, the pump automatically shuts down.
(5) BLUE ELEC PUMP ON pb (springloaded-guarded)
ON : The electric pump is on, provided the ELEC PUMP pb is not selected OFF.
If the electrical power supply is removed, the pump remains off when electrical
power is applied again.
STBY : The electric pump is controlled by the applicable ELEC PUMP pb’s.
(6) RAT MAN ON pb
The RAT may be extended at any time by pressing the RAT MAN ON pb.
Note: The RAT automatically extends in flight, if:
Both engines fail, or GREEN + BLUE LO LVL, or GREEN + YELLOW LO LVL.

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
HYDRAULIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
OVERHEAD PANEL (CONT'D)

Ident.: DSC-29-20-00000333.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) LEAK MEASUREMENT VALVES pushbutton (guarded) (to be used on ground only)
OFF : The corresponding electrohydraulic valve closes, and shuts off hydraulic supply
to the primary flight controls. This function is inhibited, when the aircraft speed is
greater than 100 kt.

FCOM B→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
HYDRAULIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Note: 1. Even if the function is inhibited in flight : If the flight crew inadvertently presses
this pushbutton, the OFF light will still come on to advise the crew that the
electrohydraulic valves will close at landing, when the aircraft speed is less than
100 kt.
2. On ground, the yellow valve automatically closes, when the cargo door is activated
(to avoid inadvertent movement of the flight control surfaces).
The OFF light comes on.
ECAM HYD PAGE

Ident.: DSC-29-20-00000337.0007001 / 16 FEB 11
Applicable to: ALL

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
HYDRAULIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(1) Reservoir quantity

This indication is in green, unless the fluid level goes below the warning level, in which case it
becomes amber.
Note: The nominal filling range indication is corrected for fluid temperature effect.
It is normally green. When temperature information is unavailable, it is no longer
corrected and the indication becomes white.
(2) Reservoir LO AIR PRESS indication
It is amber, and an associated caution appears on the ECAM, if the air pressure for the
indicated reservoir drops below normal.
(3) Reservoir OVHT indication
It is amber, and an associated caution appears on the ECAM, if the temperature of the
returning hydraulic fluid, at the inlet to its reservoir, is above normal.
(4) FIRE SHUTOFF VALVE indication
Crossline - Amber : The valve is fully closed.
In line - Green : The valve is partially closed.
(5) ENG PUMPS control and low pressure indication
In line - Green : The designated PUMP's pushbutton is on, and hydraulic pressure is
normal.
Crossline - Amber : The designated PUMP's pushbutton is off.
"LO" - Amber : The designated PUMP's pushbutton is on, and hydraulic pressure is
low.
(6) PUMP identification
It is white, and becomes amber when the corresponding engine’s N2 is below idle.

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
HYDRAULIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(7) ELEC indication

It is normally white. It becomes amber, if the associated power supply fails, or if the pump is
commanded on and does not provide normal pressure.
(8) ELEC PUMP control
▹ White : The electric pump is not commanded.
▹ Amber : The electric pump is off.
Green : The electric pump is on.
Amber : The electric pump is on and the system has low pressure.
(9) Electric pumps OVHT indication
It is amber, if the electric pump for that system overheats. This indication remains displayed on
the ECAM, during the electrical pump overheat.
(10) System label (SYS LO PR sw)
PRESS > 1 750 PSI PRESS < 1 450 PSI
(PRESS increasing) (PRESS decreasing)
GREEN white amber
▵ green amber
(11) System pressure

This legend, normally green, becomes amber when system pressure is below 1 450 PSI
(12) RAT control
◃ RAT MEANING
White white RAT stowed
Full green white RAT not stowed and RPM > 3 000
White amber RAT fully stowed and stowing pressure applied
Full amber amber RAT not stowed and RPM < 3 000
(13) RPM indication

This appears green when the rotation speed of the RAT is above 100 rpm.
MEMO DISPLAY
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-29-20-A-00017043.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
HYD ELEC PUMP : This memo appears in green when one of the three electric pumps is
running (manually or automatic).

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
HYDRAULIC
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-29-20-A-00017042.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
RAT OUT : This memo appears in green, if the Ram Air Turbine is not fully stowed. The color
changes to amber during flight phases 1 and 2.

FCOM ←D 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY

AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION
UNCONTROLLED COPY
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
DSC-30-10 General
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Anti-Ice..................................................................................................................................................................... B
Rain Removal.......................................................................................................................................................... C
DSC-30-20 Wing Anti-Ice

Description............................................................................................................................................................... A

Overhead Panel....................................................................................................................................................... A
Ecam Bleed Page....................................................................................................................................................B
Memo Display.......................................................................................................................................................... C
DSC-30-30 Engine Anti-Ice

Description............................................................................................................................................................... A

Overhead Panel....................................................................................................................................................... A
Memo Display.......................................................................................................................................................... B
DSC-30-40 Window Heat

Description............................................................................................................................................................... A

Overhead Panel....................................................................................................................................................... A
DSC-30-50 Probes Heat

Description............................................................................................................................................................... A

Overhead Panel....................................................................................................................................................... A
DSC-30-55 Water/Waste Anti-Ice

Description............................................................................................................................................................... A

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

DSC-30-55-20 System Operation
System Operation.................................................................................................................................................... A
DSC-30-60 Rain Removal

Wipers...................................................................................................................................................................... A
Rain Repellent System  ...................................................................................................................................B

Overhead Panel....................................................................................................................................................... A
Rain Repellent System Indicators  ..................................................................................................................B
DSC-30-70 Ice Detection System

Visual Ice Indicator.................................................................................................................................................. A
Ice Detection System...............................................................................................................................................B

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW GENERAL - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-30-10-10-00000368.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The ice and rain protection system allows unrestricted operation of the aircraft in icing conditions and
heavy rain.
ANTI-ICE
Ident.: DSC-30-10-10-00000372.0003001 / 30 MAR 12
Applicable to: ALL
Either hot air or electrical heating protects critical areas of the aircraft as follows:
HOT AIR
‐ Four outboard leading-edge slats of each wing
‐ Engine air intakes.
ELECTRICAL HEATING
‐ Flight compartment windows
‐ Sensors, pitot probes, static ports, TAT probes and angle-of-attack probes
‐ Waste water drain mast.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-30-10-10 P 1/2

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW GENERAL - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
RAIN REMOVAL
Ident.: DSC-30-10-10-00017819.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Wipers and fluid rain repellent  , remove rain from the front windshield panels.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-30-10-10 P 2/2

FCOM C 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW WING ANTI-ICE - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
DESCRIPTION
Ident.: DSC-30-20-10-00017822.0005001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Hot air from the pneumatic system heats the four outboard slats (4-5-6-7) of each wing in flight.
The WING pushbutton on the ANTI ICE panel controls the four valves.
When the aircraft is on ground, the flight crew can initiate a 30 s test sequence by turning the system
ON.
If the system detects a leak during normal operation, the affected side's wing anti-ice valve
automatically closes (Refer to DSC-36-10-60 Leak Detection).
When wing anti-ice is selected, the N1 or EPR limit is automatically reduced, and the idle N1 or EPR
is automatically increased.
In the event of electrical power supply failure, the valves close.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-30-20-10 P 1/2

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW WING ANTI-ICE - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-30-20-10 P 2/2

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW WING ANTI-ICE - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
OVERHEAD PANEL
Ident.: DSC-30-20-20-00017826.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) WING ANTI ICE pushbutton

This pushbutton simultaneously controls the wing anti-ice system on the left and right sides.
Off : The ON light goes off.
The wing anti-ice control valves close.
FAULT lt : Light comes on amber, and a caution appears on the ECAM, if :
‐ The position of the anti-ice control valve is not the required position, or
‐ Low pressure is detected.
Note: The amber FAULT light comes on briefly during pressure built up, or
when the valves open.
ON : Light comes on blue.

The WING A.ICE indication appears on the ECAM MEMO page.
Wing anti-ice control valves open, if pneumatic supply is available.
On the ground, the wing anti-ice control valves open for only 30 s (test
sequence).
ECAM BLEED PAGE

Ident.: DSC-30-20-20-00000414.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(Refer to DSC-36-20 BLEED SD Page).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-30-20-20 P 1/2

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW WING ANTI-ICE - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
MEMO DISPLAY
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-30-20-20-A-00017118.0003001 / 21 MAR 16
ICE NOT DET : This memo appears in green if ice is not detected for 130 s after the flight
crew has set the WING ANTI ICE pb-sw to ON.
Ident.: DSC-30-20-20-A-00017117.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
WING A.ICE : This memo appears in green if the WING ANTI ICE pb-sw is ON.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-30-20-20 P 2/2

FCOM C 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW ENGINE ANTI-ICE - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
DESCRIPTION
Ident.: DSC-30-30-10-00017827.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
An independent air bleed from the high pressure compressor protects each engine nacelle from ice.
The air is supplied through a two-position (open and closed) valve that the flight crew controls with
pushbuttons : One for each engine.
The valve closes automatically if air is not available (engine not running).
When an engine anti-ice valve is open, the N1 or EPR limit for that engine is automatically reduced,
and the idle N1 or EPR is automatically increased.
If electric power fails, the valves open.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-30-30-10 P 1/2

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW ENGINE ANTI-ICE - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-30-30-10 P 2/2

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW ENGINE ANTI-ICE - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
OVERHEAD PANEL
Ident.: DSC-30-30-20-00017829.0005001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) ENG 1 (2) pb sw

OFF : ON light goes off.
The engine anti-ice valve closes.
FAULT lt : Light comes on amber, with an ECAM caution, if the position of the anti-ice
valve disagrees with the ENG pb sw selection.
ON : Light comes on blue.
The ENG A.ICE message appears on the ECAM MEMO display.
The engine anti-ice valve opens.
MEMO DISPLAY
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-30-30-20-A-00017119.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
ENG A.ICE : This memo appears in green if one ENG ANTI ICE pb-sw is ON, or if the
nacelle anti-ice valve's electrical power is lost.
Ident.: DSC-30-30-20-A-00017120.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
ICE NOT DET : This memo appears in green if ice is not detected for 130 s after the flight
crew has set the ENG ANTI ICE pb-sw to ON.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-30-30-20 P 1/2

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW ENGINE ANTI-ICE - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-30-30-20 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW WINDOW HEAT - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
DESCRIPTION
Ident.: DSC-30-40-10-00017831.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The aircraft uses electrical heating for anti icing each windshield and defogging the cockpit side
windows.
Two independent Window Heat Computers (WHC), one on each side, automatically regulate the
system and protect it against overheating and indicate faults.
Window heating comes on :
‐ automatically when at least one engine is running, or in flight
‐ manually when the flight crew switches on the PROBE/WINDOW HEAT pushbutton switch.
The windshield heating operates at low power on the ground and at normal power in flight.
Only one heating level exists for the windows.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-30-40-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW WINDOW HEAT - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-30-40-10 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW WINDOW HEAT - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
OVERHEAD PANEL
Ident.: DSC-30-40-20-00000461.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(Refer to DSC-30-50-20 Overhead Panel)
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-30-40-20 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW WINDOW HEAT - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-30-40-20 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW PROBES HEAT - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
DESCRIPTION
Ident.: DSC-30-50-10-00017832.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Electrical heating protects :

‐ Pitot probes
‐ Static ports
‐ Angle-Of-Attack (AOA) probes
‐ Total Air Temperature (TAT) probes.
Three independent Probe Heat Computers (PHC) automatically control and monitor :
‐ Captain probes
‐ F/O probes
‐ STBY probes.
They protect against overheating and indicate fault.
The probes are heated :
‐ automatically when at least one engine is running, or in flight
‐ manually, when the flight crew switches ON the PROBE/WINDOW HEAT pushbutton switch.
On the ground, the TAT probes are not heated and pitot heating operates at low level (the
changeover to normal power in flight is automatic).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-30-50-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW PROBES HEAT - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-30-50-10 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW PROBES HEAT - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
OVERHEAD PANEL
Ident.: DSC-30-50-20-00017838.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) PROBES/WINDOW HEAT pushbutton

AUTO : Probes/windows are automatically heated :
‐ In flight, or
‐ On ground (except TAT probes), provided one engine is running.
ON : The blue light indicates that the probes and windows are heated (except TAT probes
on ground).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-30-50-20 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW PROBES HEAT - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-30-50-20 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW WATER/WASTE ANTI-ICE - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
DESCRIPTION
Ident.: DSC-30-55-10-00000525.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
An ice protection system is installed to prevent ice formation in the waste disposal system and
the potable water system. Electrical heating elements in form of flexible tapes are attached to the
waste/potable water lines which are installed in areas of possible icing conditions (in the vicinity of
fuselage skin). Temperature sensors are installed to detect icing conditions. The fill/drain nipples on
the water service/waste panel and the two drain masts are heated. The two Water Ice-Protection
Control Units (WIPCU) installed operate independently : one controls the forward section of the ice
protection system, the second one the aft section.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-30-55-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW WATER/WASTE ANTI-ICE - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-30-55-10 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW WATER/WASTE ANTI-ICE - SYSTEM OPERATION
OPERATING MANUAL
SYSTEM OPERATION
Ident.: DSC-30-55-20-00000529.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The temperature sensors measure permanently the water line temperature. In the WIPCU, the
measured value is compared with a reference temperature for the related location. This threshold
can be set individually for each area by maintenance action. If the temperature drops below the
reference value the heating elements for the related area are turned on. A different (higher) threshold
is used to turn the heating elements off.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-30-55-20 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW WATER/WASTE ANTI-ICE - SYSTEM OPERATION
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-30-55-20 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW RAIN REMOVAL - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
WIPERS
Ident.: DSC-30-60-10-00017842.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Each front windshield has a two-speed electric wiper.

Each crewmember can control the speed of the wipers via a rotary selector.
RAIN REPELLENT SYSTEM 

Ident.: DSC-30-60-10-00017950.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
In moderate to heavy rain, the flight crew can spray a rain repellent liquid on the windshield to
improve visibility.
The window is covered by spray after about 30 s.
Separate pushbuttons control the rain repellent application on each side of the windshield.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-30-60-10 P 1/2

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW RAIN REMOVAL - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-30-60-10 P 2/2

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW RAIN REMOVAL - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
OVERHEAD PANEL
Ident.: DSC-30-60-20-00000535.0001001 / 09 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL
(1) WIPER sel

Each rotary selector controls its wiper at either low or high speed. When turned off the wiper
stops out of view.
(2) RAIN RPLNT pb
Each of these button controls the application of rain repellent fluid to one side of the front
windshield.
When the flight crew pushes the button, the timer applies a measured quantity of rain repellent
to the windshield. To repeat the cycle the flight crew must push the button again.
This function is inhibited when the aircraft is on the ground, engines stopped.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-30-60-20 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW RAIN REMOVAL - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
RAIN REPELLENT SYSTEM INDICATORS 

Ident.: DSC-30-60-20-00017979.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) Rain Repellent pressure indicator

This shows the nitrogen pressure and therefore the remaining fluid in the rain repellent bottle.
When the needle is in the yellow sector the bottle should be replaced.
(2) Rain Repellent low level indicator (depending on aircraft configuration)
When REFILL float is in view, the bottle should be replaced.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-30-60-20 P 2/2

FCOM B 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW ICE DETECTION SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
VISUAL ICE INDICATOR

Ident.: DSC-30-70-10-00017846.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
An external visual ice indicator, which is visible to the crew, is installed between the two windshields.
The indicator also has an external light  .
ICE DETECTION SYSTEM

Ident.: DSC-30-70-10-00017849.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The ice detection system has two separate ice detector probes on the forward lower section of the
fuselage.
The system operates automatically and starts at electrical power up.
The probes detect ice accretion. They also indicate, through the MEMO display, that icing conditions
have disappeared. The system logic generates ECAM messages according to ice detector signals
and the flight crew’s selection of engine or wing anti-ice systems.
The ice detection system does not control the ENG or WING anti-ice systems.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-30-70-10 P 1/2

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW ICE DETECTION SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-30-70-10 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY

AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
INDICATING/RECORDING SYSTEMS
UNCONTROLLED COPY
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
DSC-31-05 EIS General

DSC-31-05-10 Introduction
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-31-05-20 Cockpit Arrangement

Cockpit Arrangement............................................................................................................................................... A
DSC-31-05-30 Architecture
Display Unit(DU)...................................................................................................................................................... A
Display Management Computer (DMC).................................................................................................................. B
System Data Acquisition Concentrator (SDAC)......................................................................................................C
Flight Warning Computer (FWC).............................................................................................................................D
Attention-Getters...................................................................................................................................................... E
Loudspeaker.............................................................................................................................................................F
EIS Block Diagram.................................................................................................................................................. G
DSC-31-05-40 Controls and Switching

ECAM Control Panel (ECP).................................................................................................................................... A
ECAM DMC Switching.............................................................................................................................................B
ECAM/ND Switching................................................................................................................................................C
PFD/ND Switching................................................................................................................................................... D
EFIS DMC Switching............................................................................................................................................... E
DSC-31-05-50 Reconfiguring the DMC

Reconfiguring The Display Management Computer (DMC)....................................................................................A
DSC-31-05-60 Reconfiguring the DUS

Failure Of Upper ECAM DU (or CTL/Brightness Knob Turned to OFF)................................................................. A
Failure Of Lower Ecam Du (Or Ctl/Brightness Knob Turned To OFF)................................................................... B
Failure Of Both ECAM DUs.................................................................................................................................... C
PFD/NDU Reconfiguration.......................................................................................................................................D
DU Reconfiguration..................................................................................................................................................E
Messages on the Display Unit (DUs)...................................................................................................................... F
DSC-31-10 ECAM Description

ECAM DU Arrangement.......................................................................................................................................... A
Color Code...............................................................................................................................................................B
Warning/Caution Classification................................................................................................................................C
Priority Rules........................................................................................................................................................... D
TYPES OF FAILURES............................................................................................................................................ E
Audio Indicators....................................................................................................................................................... F

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

DSC-31-15 Indications on E/WD
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Independent Failure................................................................................................................................................. B
Primary And Secondary Failures............................................................................................................................ C
Flight Phases........................................................................................................................................................... D
Memo....................................................................................................................................................................... E
Configuration Warnings............................................................................................................................................F
DSC-31-20 Indications on SD
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
System Pages..........................................................................................................................................................B
STATUS Page......................................................................................................................................................... C
Permanent Data.......................................................................................................................................................D
Amber Crosses "XX" on the SD..............................................................................................................................E
Amber dashes on the SD........................................................................................................................................F
DSC-31-25 ECAM Sequence

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
DSC-31-25-20 Example
1 - The ECAM Detects No Failure..........................................................................................................................A
2 - The ECAM Detects A Failure............................................................................................................................ B
3 - The Flight Crew Follows The Instruction Displayed On The E/WD...................................................................C
4 - One of the Pilots Pushes the CLR Pushbutton on the ECP............................................................................. D
5 - One of the Pilots Pushes the CLR Pushbutton a Second Time........................................................................E
6 - One of the Pilots Pushes the CLR Pushbutton a Third Time............................................................................F
DSC-31-27 OEB Reminder

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Description............................................................................................................................................................... B
OEB Database.........................................................................................................................................................C
DSC-31-30 ECAM Controls

ECAM Control Panel............................................................................................................................................... A
ECAM Switching Panel............................................................................................................................................B
Attention Getters......................................................................................................................................................C
Memo Display.......................................................................................................................................................... D

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

DSC-31-40 Indications on PFD
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Specific Ground Indications.....................................................................................................................................B
Attitude Data............................................................................................................................................................ C
Airspeed................................................................................................................................................................... D
Airspeed (Cont'd)..................................................................................................................................................... E
Altitude......................................................................................................................................................................F
Vertical Speed......................................................................................................................................................... G
Heading....................................................................................................................................................................H
Flight Path Vector..................................................................................................................................................... I
Guidance...................................................................................................................................................................J
Trajectory Deviation................................................................................................................................................. K
Flight Mode Annunciator.......................................................................................................................................... L
Tail Strike Pitch Limit Indicator  ......................................................................................................................M
Altitude Alert............................................................................................................................................................ N
Flags and Messages Displayed on PFD................................................................................................................ O
Backup Speed/Altitude Scale.................................................................................................................................. P
DSC-31-45 Indications on ND
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Rose Modes.............................................................................................................................................................B
Rose LS Mode.........................................................................................................................................................C
Rose VOR Mode..................................................................................................................................................... D
Rose NAV Mode/ARC Mode...................................................................................................................................E
Plan Mode................................................................................................................................................................ F
Weather Radar indication........................................................................................................................................G
Engine Standby Page..............................................................................................................................................H
Flags and Messages Displayed on ND.................................................................................................................... I
GPWS....................................................................................................................................................................... J
DSC-31-50 EFIS Controls

EFIS Control Panel with OANS  Zoom Function............................................................................................ A
EFIS DMC Panel..................................................................................................................................................... B
EFIS Control Panel..................................................................................................................................................C
Chronometer (Glareshield)...................................................................................................................................... D
Memo Display.......................................................................................................................................................... E

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

DSC-31-55 Clock
General.....................................................................................................................................................................A

General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Operation in Internal Mode......................................................................................................................................B
DSC-31-60 FLT Recorders

DSC-31-60-10 Flight Data Recording System
Description............................................................................................................................................................... A

Overhead Panel....................................................................................................................................................... A
Pedestal................................................................................................................................................................... B
DSC-31-60-30 Aircraft Condition Monitoring System (ACMS)

Description............................................................................................................................................................... A
Controls on Pedestal............................................................................................................................................... B

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EIS GENERAL - INTRODUCTION
OPERATING MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
Ident.: DSC-31-05-10-00000367.0001001 / 22 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The electronic instrument system (EIS) presents data on six identical display units (DUs):
‐ The electronic flight instrument system (EFIS) displays mostly flight parameters and navigation
data on the primary flight displays (PFDs) and navigation displays (NDs)
‐ The electronic centralized aircraft monitor (ECAM) presents data on the engine/warning display
(E/WD) and system display (SD) :
• Primary engine indications, fuel quantity, flap and slat position
• Warning and caution alerts or memos
• Synoptic diagrams of aircraft systems, and status messages
• Permanent flight data
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-05-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EIS GENERAL - INTRODUCTION
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-05-10 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EIS GENERAL - COCKPIT ARRANGEMENT
OPERATING MANUAL
COCKPIT ARRANGEMENT
Ident.: DSC-31-05-20-00000370.0001001 / 22 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-05-20 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EIS GENERAL - COCKPIT ARRANGEMENT
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-05-20 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EIS GENERAL - ARCHITECTURE
OPERATING MANUAL
DISPLAY UNIT(DU)
Ident.: DSC-31-05-30-00000377.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The instrument panels have six identical units.

These DUs are full-color Liquid Crystal Displays (LCD).
DISPLAY MANAGEMENT COMPUTER (DMC)

Ident.: DSC-31-05-30-00000379.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Three identical Display Management Computers (DMCs) obtain data from the different sensors
and computers, and send it to the display units. The display units then generate and display the
applicable images. Each DMC has a single DMC channel, and can simultaneously supply one PFD,
one ND, and both ECAM display units (E/WD and SD).
SYSTEM DATA ACQUISITION CONCENTRATOR (SDAC)

Ident.: DSC-31-05-30-00000383.0001001 / 22 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The two identical SDACs acquire data, then generate signals. Some of these signals go to the three
DMCs, which use them to generate displays of system pages and engines parameters. Others go to
the flight warning computers which use them to generate ECAM messages and aural alerts.
FLIGHT WARNING COMPUTER (FWC)

Ident.: DSC-31-05-30-00000387.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The two identical FWCs generate alert messages, memos, aural alerts, and synthetic voice
messages. For this purpose they acquire data:
‐ directly from aircraft sensors or systems to generate red warnings
‐ through the SDACs to generate amber cautions.
The ECAM display units display the alert messages generated by the FWCs.
The FWCs also generate:
‐ radio height callouts
‐ decision height callouts
‐ landing speed increments.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-05-30 P 1/4

FCOM A to D 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ATTENTION-GETTERS
Ident.: DSC-31-05-30-00000391.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The FWCs also drive the attention-getters. Each pilot has a set of these on the panel under the
glareshield. They are :
‐ a master warning light that flashes “MASTER WARN” in red for red warnings
‐ a master caution light that illuminates “MASTER CAUT” in amber for amber cautions.
LOUDSPEAKER
Ident.: DSC-31-05-30-00000393.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The communications loudspeakers announce aural alerts and voice messages, and do so even
when they are turned off.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-05-30 P 2/4

FCOM E to F 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
EIS BLOCK DIAGRAM

Ident.: DSC-31-05-30-00000397.0002001 / 09 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-05-30 P 3/4

FCOM G 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-05-30 P 4/4

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EIS GENERAL - CONTROLS AND SWITCHING
OPERATING MANUAL
ECAM CONTROL PANEL (ECP)

Ident.: DSC-31-05-40-00000400.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
This panel allows the pilot to have the ECAM display units display either warning and caution
messages or system and system status images.
ECAM DMC SWITCHING

Ident.: DSC-31-05-40-00000402.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
A switch on the ECAM SWITCHING panel which is on the main instrument panel allows the flight
crew to replace the DMC 3 with DMC 1 or DMC 2.
ECAM/ND SWITCHING
Ident.: DSC-31-05-40-00000405.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
A switch on the ECAM SWITCHING panel allows the flight crew to transfer the ECAM system display
to either the captain's or the first officer's navigation display.
PFD/ND SWITCHING
Ident.: DSC-31-05-40-00000406.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
A PFD/ND XFR pushbutton on each side console allows the pilot to swap displays on respective
onside DUs.
EFIS DMC SWITCHING

Ident.: DSC-31-05-40-00000408.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
A switch on each side console allows the pilot to manually select the DMC 3 or the opposite DMC for
supply of data to the onside PFD/ND.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-05-40 P 1/2

FCOM A to E 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EIS GENERAL - CONTROLS AND SWITCHING
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-05-40 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EIS GENERAL - RECONFIGURING THE DMC
OPERATING MANUAL
RECONFIGURING THE DISPLAY MANAGEMENT COMPUTER (DMC)

Ident.: DSC-31-05-50-00000409.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
In normal operation :
‐ DMC 1 supplies data to the Captain's PFD and ND.
‐ DMC 2 supplies data to the First Officer's PFD and ND.
‐ DMC 3 supplies data to the upper and lower ECAM DU.
If a DMC fails, the corresponding DU displays the INVALID DATA message. The flight crew can
replace DMC 1 or 2 with DMC 3 by turning the EFIS DMC selector, on the EFIS DMC panel, to 3.
In case of DMC 3 failure, DMC 1 automatically takes over and supplies the ECAM DUs, provided the
ECAM SWITCHING selector is in the AUTO position.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-05-50 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EIS GENERAL - RECONFIGURING THE DMC
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-05-50 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EIS GENERAL - RECONFIGURING THE DUS
OPERATING MANUAL
FAILURE OF UPPER ECAM DU (OR CTL/BRIGHTNESS KNOB TURNED TO OFF)

Ident.: DSC-31-05-60-00000411.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
If the upper ECAM display fails, or is switched off :

‐ The engine/warning page automatically replaces the system/status page on the lower ECAM DU.
The flight crew can display the system/status page by :
‐ Using the “ECAM/ND XFR” switch, on the ECAM SWITCHING panel, to move it to a navigation
display unit (NDU), or
‐ Pushing and holding (for a maximum of 3 min) the related system page pushbutton, on the ECAM
control panel, to temporarily display it on the lower ECAM DU (instead of the engine/warning
page).
FAILURE OF LOWER ECAM DU (OR CTL/BRIGHTNESS KNOB TURNED TO OFF)

Ident.: DSC-31-05-60-00000415.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
If the lower ECAM display fails, or is switched off, the flight crew can display the system/status page
by :
‐ Using the “ECAM/ND XFR” switch, on the ECAM SWITCHING panel, to display it on the NDU, or
‐ Pushing and holding (for a maximum of 3 min) the related system page pushbutton on the ECAM
control panel, to temporarily display it on the upper ECAM DU (instead of the engine/warning
page).
FAILURE OF BOTH ECAM DUS

Ident.: DSC-31-05-60-00000418.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
If both ECAM displays fail, the flight crew may :

‐ Use the “ECAM/ND XFR”, on the ECAM SWITCHING panel, to display the engine/warning page
on a navigation display and, if needed,
‐ Push and hold (for a maximum of 3 min) the related system page pushbutton, on the ECAM
control panel, to temporarily display the system/status page on an ND.
PFD/NDU RECONFIGURATION
Ident.: DSC-31-05-60-00000423.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
If a PFDU fails, the system automatically transfers the PFD to the NDU.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-05-60 P 1/6

FCOM A to D → 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
The pilot can also make this transfer manually by :

‐ turning the PFD ON-OFF/brightness control OFF, or
‐ pressing the PFD/ND/XFR pushbutton, which cross-changes the images between the PFDU and
the NDU.
If an NDU fails, the pilot can use the PFD/ND/XFR pushbutton to transfer the ND image to the PFDU.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-05-60 P 2/6

FCOM ←D 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
DU RECONFIGURATION
Ident.: DSC-31-05-60-00000425.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-05-60 P 3/6

FCOM E 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
MESSAGES ON THE DISPLAY UNIT (DUS)

Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-31-05-60-A-00012970.0001001 / 14 FEB 11
These messages are displayed on either the EFIS or the ECAM Display Unit (DU) depending on the
current EFIS or ECAM configuration.
Ident.: DSC-31-05-60-A-00012972.0001001 / 14 AUG 12
FAILURE OF A DU
If a DU fails, the flight crew may find one of the following displays:
‐ A blank screen with a “F” letter in amber, or
‐ A distorted display, or
‐ A blank screen with the “INVALID DISPLAY UNIT” message in amber.
Ident.: DSC-31-05-60-A-00012974.0001001 / 14 FEB 11
FEEDBACK MESSAGES
The DU displays the following messages in amber when the Display Management Computer
(DMC) detects a discrepancy between the parameters obtained by the DMC and the operational
parameters displayed on the DU:
‐ ”CHECK CAPT PFD” (“CHECK F/O PFD”) if the discrepancy concerns the PFD parameters
‐ ”CHECK CAPT ND” (“CHECK F/O ND”) if the discrepancy concerns the ND parameters
‐ ”CHECK EWD” if the discrepancy concerns the E/WD parameters
‐ ”CHECK SD” if the discrepancy concerns the SD parameters.
In addition, if the aircraft is on ground, the “DU NOT MONITORED” message is displayed in amber
when there is only one DMC, instead of two DMCs, that provides the affected DU with feedback
information. This message means that there is either a DMC test in progress or that there is an
EIS failure. In the case of an EIS failure, a maintenance action is necessary.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-05-60 P 4/6

FCOM F→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-31-05-60-A-00012975.0001001 / 14 FEB 11
SIDE1/SIDE2 DISCREPANCY MESSAGES

The DU displays the following messages along with a caution on the ECAM E/WD when there is a
discrepancy between the parameters displayed on the Captain’s EFIS and the First Officer’s EFIS:
‐ Both PFDs display the message “CHECK ATT” if there is a discrepancy of at least 5 ° between
the altitude values, pitch and/or roll
‐ Both PFDs display the message “CHECK ALT” if there is a discrepancy between the altitude
values greater than 250 ft when the flight crew selects a QNH different from STD, or 500 ft when
the flight crew selects a QNH STD
‐ Both PFDs and NDs display the message “CHECK HDG” if there is a discrepancy of at least 5 °
between the heading values.
Note: The message “CHECK HDG” flashes for a few seconds on the NDs, and then it
remains steady. If the flight crew selects the PLAN mode on the NDs the message
“CHECK HDG” does not appear.
Ident.: DSC-31-05-60-A-00012977.0001001 / 14 FEB 11
DU RESET
In the case of a DU reset, the message “SELF TEST IN PROGRESS” can be displayed in
green and/or the message “WAITING FOR DATA” may be displayed in green during the EIS
initialization.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-05-60 P 5/6

FCOM ←F 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-05-60 P 6/6

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW ECAM DESCRIPTION
OPERATING MANUAL
ECAM DU ARRANGEMENT
Ident.: DSC-31-10-00017660.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The ECAM has two display units:

‐ One for the engine/warning display (E/WD).
‐ One for the system/status display (SD).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-10 P 1/12

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
COLOR CODE
Ident.: DSC-31-10-00000431.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The ECAM display uses a color code that indicates the importance of the failure or the indication.
RED : The configuration or failure requires immediate action.
AMBER : The flight crew should be aware of the configuration or failure, but needs not take
immediate action.
GREEN : The item is operating normally.
WHITE : These titles and remarks guide the flight crew as it executes various procedures.
BLUE : These are actions to be carried out, or limitations.
MAGENTA : These are particular messages that apply to particular pieces of equipment or
situations (inhibition messages, for example).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-10 P 2/12

FCOM B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
WARNING/CAUTION CLASSIFICATION
Ident.: DSC-31-10-00000436.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
LEVEL SIGNIFICATION AURAL VISUAL

FAILURE MODE Level 3
Red warning: The
Continuous
‐ MASTER WARN
Repetitive
configuration or failure requires light red flashing or
Chime (CRC) or
immediate action : specific red light
specific sound or
‐ Aircraft in dangerous ‐ Warning message
synthetic voice
configuration or limit (red) on E/WD
flight conditions (eg: stall, ‐ Automatic call of the
o/speed) relevant system page
‐ System failure altering flight on the S/D (1)
safety (eg : Eng fire, excess
cab alt)
Level 2 Amber caution: Single Chime
‐ MASTER CAUT light,
(SC)
The flight crew should be amber steady :
aware of the configuration or ‐ Caution message
failure, but does not need to (amber) on E/WD
take any immediate action. ‐ Automatic call
However, time and situation of the relevant
permitting, these cautions system page on
should be considered without the S/D (1).
delay to prevent any further
degradation of the affected
system :
‐ System failure without any
direct consequence on the
flight safety (eg : HYD B
SYS LO PR).
Level 1 NONE
Amber caution : Requires crew ‐ Caution message
monitoring : (amber) on E/WD,
‐ Failures leading to a loss generally without
of redundancy or system procedure.
degradation (eg : FCDC
fault)
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-10 P 3/12

FCOM C→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

LEVEL SIGNIFICATION AURAL VISUAL
INFORMATION ADVISORY System parameters' monitoring NONE
‐ Automatic call of
the relevant system
page on the S/D. The
affected parameter
pulses green.
MEMO Information : Recalls normal NONE
‐ Green, Amber, or
or automatic selection of
Magenta message on
functions which are temporarily
E/WD
used.
(1) except in some cases
PRIORITY RULES
Ident.: DSC-31-10-00000445.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
There are three priority levels for warnings and cautions :

A level 3 warning has priority over a level 2 caution which has priority over a level 1 caution.
The FWC observes these priorities.
INFORMATION PROVIDED WHEN NEEDED
One of the main advantages of the ECAM is that it displays applicable information to the flight
crew, on an "as needed" basis.
The following outlines the ECAM’s operating modes:
• Normal Mode:
Automatically displays systems and memos, in accordance with the flight phase.
• Failure Mode:
Automatically displays the appropriate emergency/abnormal procedures, in addition to their
associated system synoptic.
• Advisory Mode:
Automatically displays the appropriate system synoptic, associated with a drifting parameter.
• Manual Mode:
Enables the flight crew to manually select any system synoptic via the ECAM Control Panel
(ECP).
Most warnings and cautions are inhibited during critical phases of flight (T/O INHIBIT – LDG
INHIBIT), because most system failures will not affect the aircraft’s ability to continue a takeoff or
landing.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-10 P 4/12

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
TYPES OF FAILURES
Ident.: DSC-31-10-00000447.0001001 / 10 DEC 09
Applicable to: ALL
Independent : a failure that affects an isolated system or item of equipment without degrading
the performance of others in the aircraft.
Primary : a failure of a system or an item of equipment that costs the aircraft the use of
other systems or items of equipment.
Secondary : the loss of a system or an item of equipment resulting from a primary failure.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-10 P 5/12

FCOM E 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
AUDIO INDICATORS
Applicable to: MSN 0888, 0947-0956
AUDIO INDICATOR
AUDIO INDICATORS MEANING DURATION
CANCELLATION(a)
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015300.0001001 / 22 JUL 16

CONTINUOUS
RED WARNINGS PERMANENT Press MASTER WARN lt
REPETITIVE CHIME
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015301.0001001 / 22 JUL 16

SINGLE CHIME AMBER CAUTION 0.5 s
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015302.0001001 / 14 OCT 15

AP DISCONNECTION Second press of
1.5 s
BY TAKEOVER pb TAKEOVER pb
CALVARY CHARGE Press
AP DISCONNECTION
PERMANENT MASTER WARN lt
DUE TO FAILURE
or TAKEOVER pb
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015303.0002001 / 22 JUL 16

LANDING CAPABILITY
CHANGE, or in case of "GPS
TRIPLE CLICK 0.5 s (3 pulses)
PRIMARY LOST" (APPR)
or in case of mode reversion
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015305.0001001 / 14 OCT 15

“STALL, STALL” synthetic
STALL PERMANENT NIL
voice then cricket
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015306.0001001 / 14 OCT 15

INTERMITTENT BUZZER SELCAL CALL PERMANENT Press RESET key on ACP
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015307.0001001 / 14 OCT 15

CABIN CALL 3s NIL
EMER CABIN CALL 3 s REPEATED 3 times NIL
As long as outside
BUZZER MECH CALL NIL
pb is pressed
ACARS  Read message on MCDU,
PERMANENT
CALL or ALERT or press MASTER CAUT pb
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015308.0001001 / 14 OCT 15

1.5 s
ALTITUDE ALERT (Refer New ALTITUDE selection,
C CHORD or
to DSC-31-40 Altitude Alert) or press MASTER WARN pb
PERMANENT
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-10 P 6/12

FCOM F→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

AUDIO INDICATOR
CANCELLATION(a)
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015309.0001001 / 21 MAR 16

HEIGHT ANNOUNCEMENT
AUTO CALL OUT BELOW 2 500 ft (Refer
PERMANENT NIL
(synthetic voice) to DSC-34-10-40-10
Automatic Callout)
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015310.0001001 / 21 MAR 17

GROUND PROXIMITY (Refer to DSC-34-20-40-10
PERMANENT NIL
WARNING (synthetic voice) Overview)
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015311.0001001 / 14 OCT 15

“WINDSHEAR” (synthetic
WINDSHEAR REPEATED 3 times NIL
voice)
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015312.0001001 / 14 OCT 15

“PRIORITY
LEFT” “PRIORITY AP TAKEOVER pb 1s NIL
RIGHT” (synthetic voice)
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015313.0001001 / 14 OCT 15

“V1” (synthetic voice) V1 speed during takeoff 1 time NIL
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015314.0001001 / 07 JUN 16

ONE TIME at 20 ft (10 ft in
Thrust levers not in autoland with A/THR ON),
“RETARD” (Synthetic voice) NIL
IDLE position for landing then PERMANENT until
thrust levers are set to IDLE
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015315.0001001 / 21 MAR 17

(Refer to DSC-34-20-60-20
TCAS (Synthetic voice) PERMANENT NIL
Aural Messages)
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015316.0001001 / 14 OCT 15

Current thrust is not sufficient
″SPEED, SPEED, SPEED Every 5 s until
to recover a positive flight THRUST LEVER(s)
″ (Synthetic voice) thrust is increased
through pitch control
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-10 P 7/12

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

AUDIO INDICATOR
CANCELLATION(a)
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015317.0001001 / 14 OCT 15

"DUAL Both sidesticks are
Every 5 s One sidestick deactivated
INPUT" (synthetic voice) moved simultaneously
(a) All audio indicators may be cancelled by pressing either:

‐ The EMER CANC pushbutton on the ECAM control panel, or
‐ The MASTER WARN light (except for some warnings like OVERSPEED, or L/G NOT DOWN).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-10 P 8/12

FCOM ←F 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
AUDIO INDICATORS
Applicable to: MSN 0923, 1351-1391
AUDIO INDICATOR
CANCELLATION(a)
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015300.0001001 / 22 JUL 16

CONTINUOUS
RED WARNINGS PERMANENT Press MASTER WARN lt
REPETITIVE CHIME
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015301.0001001 / 22 JUL 16

SINGLE CHIME AMBER CAUTION 0.5 s
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015302.0001001 / 14 OCT 15

AP DISCONNECTION Second press of
1.5 s
BY TAKEOVER pb TAKEOVER pb
CALVARY CHARGE Press
AP DISCONNECTION
PERMANENT MASTER WARN lt
DUE TO FAILURE
or TAKEOVER pb
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015303.0006001 / 22 JUL 16

LANDING CAPABILITY
TRIPLE CLICK CHANGE or in case 0.5 s (3 pulses)
of mode reversion
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015305.0001001 / 14 OCT 15

“STALL, STALL” synthetic
STALL PERMANENT NIL
voice then cricket
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015306.0001001 / 14 OCT 15

INTERMITTENT BUZZER SELCAL CALL PERMANENT Press RESET key on ACP
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015307.0001001 / 14 OCT 15

CABIN CALL 3s NIL
EMER CABIN CALL 3 s REPEATED 3 times NIL
As long as outside
BUZZER MECH CALL NIL
pb is pressed
ACARS  Read message on MCDU,
PERMANENT
CALL or ALERT or press MASTER CAUT pb
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015308.0001001 / 14 OCT 15

1.5 s
ALTITUDE ALERT (Refer New ALTITUDE selection,
C CHORD or
to DSC-31-40 Altitude Alert) or press MASTER WARN pb
PERMANENT
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-10 P 9/12

FCOM F→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

AUDIO INDICATOR
CANCELLATION(a)
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015309.0001001 / 21 MAR 16

HEIGHT ANNOUNCEMENT
AUTO CALL OUT BELOW 2 500 ft (Refer
PERMANENT NIL
(synthetic voice) to DSC-34-10-40-10
Automatic Callout)
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015310.0001001 / 21 MAR 17

GROUND PROXIMITY (Refer to DSC-34-20-40-10
PERMANENT NIL
WARNING (synthetic voice) Overview)
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015311.0001001 / 14 OCT 15

“WINDSHEAR” (synthetic
WINDSHEAR REPEATED 3 times NIL
voice)
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015312.0001001 / 14 OCT 15

“PRIORITY
LEFT” “PRIORITY AP TAKEOVER pb 1s NIL
RIGHT” (synthetic voice)
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015313.0001001 / 14 OCT 15

“V1” (synthetic voice) V1 speed during takeoff 1 time NIL
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015314.0001001 / 07 JUN 16

ONE TIME at 20 ft (10 ft in
Thrust levers not in autoland with A/THR ON),
“RETARD” (Synthetic voice) NIL
IDLE position for landing then PERMANENT until
thrust levers are set to IDLE
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015315.0001001 / 21 MAR 17

(Refer to DSC-34-20-60-20
TCAS (Synthetic voice) PERMANENT NIL
Aural Messages)
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015316.0001001 / 14 OCT 15

Current thrust is not sufficient
″SPEED, SPEED, SPEED Every 5 s until
to recover a positive flight THRUST LEVER(s)
″ (Synthetic voice) thrust is increased
through pitch control
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-10 P 10/12

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

AUDIO INDICATOR
CANCELLATION(a)
Ident.: DSC-31-10-A-00015317.0001001 / 14 OCT 15

"DUAL Both sidesticks are
Every 5 s One sidestick deactivated
INPUT" (synthetic voice) moved simultaneously
(a) All audio indicators may be cancelled by pressing either:

‐ The EMER CANC pushbutton on the ECAM control panel, or
‐ The MASTER WARN light (except for some warnings like OVERSPEED, or L/G NOT DOWN).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-10 P 11/12

FCOM ←F 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-10 P 12/12

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW INDICATIONS ON E/WD
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-31-15-00000467.0008001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The Engine Warning Display (E/WD) appears on the upper ECAM Display Unit (DU).
‐ The upper part of this DU displays:
• Engine parameters (Controls and Indicators)
• Feedback messages (Refer to DSC-31-05-60 Messages on the Display Units (DUs) - Feedback
Messages)
• Fuel on board (FOB) (Refer to DSC-28-20 ECAM Upper Display)
• Position of slats and flaps (Refer to DSC-27-20-30 ECAM F/CTL Page)
‐ The lower part of this DU displays messages generated by the FWC:
• Warning and caution messages when a failure occurs,
• Memos when there is no failure.

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
The lower part of the DU dedicated to ECAM messages, is divided into two sections that have
several lines each.
Left part : ‐ Primary or independent warnings and cautions, or
‐ Memo information.
Right part : ‐ Title of system affected by a primary or independent warning, or caution, in the
case of overflow on the left part, or
‐ Secondary failure, or
‐ Memo, or
‐ Special lines (e.g as “AP OFF”, “LAND ASAP”).
As soon as the FWC detects a failure, and if no flight phase inhibition is active, the E/WD displays
the title of the failure and the actions that the flight crew must perform.
The action line automatically clears when the flight crew performs the necessary action.
Note: Some action lines do not disappear from the E/WD even after the flight crew performs the
necessary action.
INDEPENDENT FAILURE
Ident.: DSC-31-15-00000471.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
If there are too many ECAM messages for the amount of space available in the lower part of
the E/WD, a green arrow appears at the bottom of the display, pointing down to show that the
information has overflowed off the screen. The pilot can scroll down to view additional messages
by pushing the CLR pushbutton on the ECAM control panel (on the pedestal, just below the lower
ECAM DU).

FCOM ← A to B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
PRIMARY AND SECONDARY FAILURES

Ident.: DSC-31-15-00000474.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The ECAM DU displays a primary failure as a boxed title.

It identifies a secondary failure by putting a star in front of the title of the affected system.
Note: The DU displays the overflow symbol, if primary or secondary failures overflow. In case of
ECAM SINGLE DISPLAY, the secondary failures are inhibited.
FLIGHT PHASES
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-31-15-B-00000484.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
GENERAL
The FWC divides its functions according to these ten flight phases:

FCOM C to D → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
To improve its operational efficiency, the computer inhibits some warnings and cautions for certain
flight phases. It does so to avoid unnecessarily alerting the pilots at times when they have high
workloads (such as takeoff or landing). In these two phases, the DU displays magenta memos:
“T.O. INHIBIT” (flight phases 3, 4, and 5), and “LDG INHIBIT” (flight phases 7 and 8).
Note: These flight phases are different from, and independent of, the ones used by FMGEC.
Ident.: DSC-31-15-B-00004743.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
FLIGHT PHASE INHIBITION

Two cases are possible (for instance) :
Effect on E/WD :
(a) The failure occurs during Phase 1. The E/WD immediately displays the warning and
continues to display it as long as the failure is present, even in Phase 2.
(b) The failure occurs during Phase 2. The E/WD only displays the warning once the aircraft has
entered Phase 3, where it is not inhibited. Then, the warning remains displayed as long as
the failure is present.

FCOM ←D 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
MEMO
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-31-15-A-00000505.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
MEMO DISPLAY
Memos appear in the lower part of the E/WD.
They are normally in green. But, in abnormal situations, they may be amber.
Memos list functions or systems that are temporarily used in normal operations.
Ident.: DSC-31-15-A-00000523.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
T.O. AND LDG MEMOS

During the takeoff and landing phases, the right-hand side of the memo area displays specific T.O.
INHIBIT or LDG INHIBIT (magenta) memos.
Takeoff and landing memos are displayed, as follows, during the related flight phases :
Note: * This line disappears, when the test is completed. It is replaced by “T.O. CONFIG
NORMAL”, if the aircraft configuration is correct.
The test is requested again, if the configuration becomes abnormal.

FCOM E→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
CONFIGURATION WARNINGS
Ident.: DSC-31-15-00000528.0020001 / 16 MAR 15
Applicable to: MSN 0888-0923, 1351-1391
The following warnings and cautions appear in the lower part of the E/WD if the aircraft is not in
takeoff configuration when the flight crew presses the T.O. CONFIG pb on the ECAM control panel or
applies takeoff power.

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
T.O. CONFIG
WARNINGS / CAUTIONS T.O. POWER
TEST
CONFIG RUD TRIM NOT IN T.O RANGE (1)
CONFIG PITCH TRIM NOT IN T.O RANGE (1)

F/CTL PITCH TRIM/MCDU/CG DISAGREE (2)
CONFIG FLAPS NOT IN T.O CONFIG (1)
F/CTL FLAP/MCDU DISAGREE (2)
CONFIG SPD BRK NOT RETRACTED (1)
CONFIG SLATS NOT IN T.O CONFIG (1)
CONFIG L SIDESTICK FAULT (BY TAKE OVER) (1) TRIGGERED
CONFIG R SIDESTICK FAULT (BY TAKE OVER) (1) TRIGGERED
DOOR(2)
BRAKES HOT (2)
FUEL L(R) WING PUMPS LO PR (2)
FWS OEB/FWC DISCREPANCY (2)
ENG 1 OIL LO TEMP (2)
CONFIG PARK BRK ON (1) NOT
ENG THR LEVERS NOT SET (2) TRIGGERED
(1) (R) Red warning

(2) (A) Amber caution
CONFIGURATION WARNINGS
Ident.: DSC-31-15-00000528.0015001 / 30 JAN 13
The following warnings and cautions appear in the lower part of the E/WD if the aircraft is not in
takeoff configuration when the flight crew presses the T.O. CONFIG pb on the ECAM control panel or
applies takeoff power.

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
T.O. CONFIG
WARNINGS / CAUTIONS T.O. POWER
TEST
CONFIG RUD TRIM NOT IN T.O RANGE (1)
CONFIG PITCH TRIM NOT IN T.O RANGE (1)

F/CTL PITCH TRIM/MCDU/CG DISAGREE (2)
CONFIG FLAPS NOT IN T.O CONFIG (1)
F/CTL FLAP/MCDU DISAGREE (2)
CONFIG SPD BRK NOT RETRACTED (1)
CONFIG SLATS NOT IN T.O CONFIG (1)
CONFIG L SIDESTICK FAULT (BY TAKE OVER) (1) TRIGGERED
CONFIG R SIDESTICK FAULT (BY TAKE OVER) (1) TRIGGERED
DOOR (2)
BRAKES HOT (2)
FUEL L(R) WING PUMPS LO PR (2)
FWS OEB/FWC DISCREPANCY (2)
CONFIG PARK BRK ON (1) NOT
ENG THR LEVERS NOT SET (2) TRIGGERED
(1) (R) Red warning

(2) (A) Amber caution

FCOM ←F 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW INDICATIONS ON SD
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-31-20-00000538.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The system/status Display (SD) uses the lower ECAM DU to display :

‐ either an aircraft system synoptic diagram page
‐ or the STATUS page.
SYSTEM PAGES
Ident.: DSC-31-20-00000539.0005001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The lower ECAM DU can display 14 system pages (For description see relevant FCOM chapter):
‐ ENGINE (Secondary engine parameters)
‐ BLEED (Air bleed)
‐ CAB PRESS (Cabin pressurization)
‐ ELEC AC (AC Electrical power)
‐ ELEC DC (DC Electrical power)
‐ HYD (Hydraulic)
‐ C/B (Circuit Breakers)
‐ APU (Auxiliary Power Unit)
‐ COND (Air conditioning)
‐ DOOR/OXY (Doors/oxygen)
‐ WHEEL (Landing Gear, Braking, ground spoilers, ...)
‐ F/CTL (Flight Controls)
‐ FUEL (Fuel)
‐ CRUISE (Cruise)
The pilot may manually call up a system page for display on the lower ECAM DU, or the system may
automatically display a page.
‐ Manual:
• The pilot can use the pushbutton on the ECAM control panel to call up any system page, except
the CRUISE page, for display at any time.
• The corresponding pushbutton on the ECAM control panel lights up.
• A failure-related display automatically replaces a page the pilot has manually called up.
‐ Automatic, related to a failure:
• The relevant system page automatically appears, as soon as any fault or malfunction triggers a
caution or warning message.

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
‐ Automatic, advisory:
• The relevant system page automatically appears, when a parameter drifts out of its normal
range.
• The value (shown in green) pulses, as long as it is outside its limits.
• The advisory mode is inhibited in some flight phases.
Note: If an advisory is triggered when the ECAM is in the single-display configuration, an

advisory message appears on the upper part of the E/WD, and the associated key on
ECAM control panel flashes to identify the appropriate system page.

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
‐ Automatic, flight phase mode:

• If no other mode is engaged, the SD displays the system page related to the present flight
phase, as shown in the following diagram.
• Phase 2: The F/CTL SD page replaces the WHEEL SD page for 20 s, when either pilot moves
his sidestick (more than 3 ° in pitch or roll), or when the rudder pedal deflection is more than
22 °.
• The APU SD page appears, when the APU MASTER switch is ON. It disappears when APU
RPM has been above 95 % for 10 s, or when the APU MASTER switch is switched OFF.
• The ENGINE SD page appears at the beginning of the start sequence, or when a pilot selects
“CRANK”. It disappears at the end of the start sequence.
For a description of the ENGINE and AIR indications that appear, when the SD is displaying the
CRUISE page, see the relevant FCOM chapter.

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
STATUS PAGE
Ident.: DSC-31-20-00000548.0001001 / 12 APR 16
Applicable to: ALL
PURPOSE
The STATUS page provides an operational summary of the state of the aircraft. As illustrated in
the following image, this operational summary includes all of the following:
(1) Limitations (speed, flight level): Blue
(2) Approach procedures: White
(3) Procedures (corrections to apply for landing): Blue
(4) Information: Green
(5) Cancelled caution: White
(6) Inoperative system: Amber
(7) Maintenance status: White
(8) The arrow appears if the data on the STATUS page overflows the left or right area of the
page.
The flight crew can press the CLR pb, in order to scroll the display to view the overflow.

FCOM C→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Note: The titles of the different parts of the display appear in white and underlined.
STATUS PAGE DISPLAY
The STATUS page appears when the flight crew presses the STS pb on the ECAM Control Panel
(ECP).
The STATUS page automatically appears in abnormal operations if one of the following applies:
‐ The STATUS page is not empty, and the flight crew clears the last alert on the E/WD, or
‐ The STATUS page is not empty, and the flight crew selects CONF1 for approach, or
‐ The STATUS page is not empty, and the flight crew sets QNH/QFE on the EFIS Control Panel
during descent.
STS REMINDER
The STS reminder appears on the E/WD if both the following conditions apply:
‐ The STATUS page is not empty: The STATUS page displays message other than
“CANCELLED CAUTION” or MAINTENANCE status.
‐ There is a MAINTENANCE status at engines shutdown.
The MAINTENANCE status can appear only when the aircraft is on the ground, before engine start
or after engine shutdown.
PERMANENT DATA
Ident.: DSC-31-20-00017830.0004001 / 25 JUL 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) Temperature
The screen displays Total Air Temperature (TAT), Static Air Temperature (SAT) in green. The
difference between the SAT and the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) temperature
(Delta ISA  ) is displayed in green, in STD BARO reference mode only.

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(2) Messages - G LOAD

The screen displays either one of the following two items, one at a time:
‐ Load factor (G LOAD) in amber, when the value is above 1.4 g or below 0.7 g for more than
2 s.
The G LOAD amber indication remains displayed 5 s after the excessive load occurrence.
This display is inhibited during flight phases 1, 2, 3, 9 and 10.
‐ “CHECK SD”, “CHECK CAPT (F/O) PFD” or “CHECK CAPT (F/O) ND”, all in amber (Refer
to DSC-31-05-20 Cockpit Arrangement).
Note: The display of the feedback messages takes priority over the load factor indication.
(3) UTC
The screen displays Universal Time Coordinated (UTC), synchronized with the cockpit clock, in
green.
Note: “40H00” default value is displayed in the case of cockpit clock failure at Central
Maintenance Computer (CMC) power-up.
(4) GW
The screen displays the gross weight (GW) as given by the FCMC, in green. The two last digits
are dashed if accuracy is degraded. On ground, the indication is replaced by blue dashes, if no
computed data are available.
(5) GWCG
The screen displays the gross weight center of gravity (GWCG), as given by the FCMC, in
green. In case of an EXCESS AFT CG warning, the indication appears in red.
AMBER CROSSES "XX" ON THE SD

Ident.: DSC-31-20-00017856.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
If a parameter value on any SD page is not available for display, amber crosses "XX" appear instead
of the value.
AMBER DASHES ON THE SD

Ident.: DSC-31-20-00015259.0001001 / 01 APR 14
Applicable to: ALL
If the accuracy of a parameter value on any SD page is degraded, amber dashes are displayed over
the last digits.

FCOM ← D to F 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW ECAM SEQUENCE - GENERAL
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-31-25-10-00000567.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
If ECAM detects a failure :

‐ The E/WD displays warning or caution messages.
‐ The master warning or master caution lights light up (except in the case of a level 1 caution).
‐ The system sounds an aural signal (except in the case of a level 1 caution).
‐ The system display (SD) shows the system page for the affected system.
‐ The CLR pushbutton on the ECAM control panel lights up.
In addition, a local warning light controlled directly by the affected system can light up.
After completing remedial procedures, the flight crew must push the CLR pushbutton repeatedly until
the displays return to their normal configurations :
‐ MEMO messages on the E/WD
‐ The system page related to the present flight phase on the SD.
‐ The CLR light on the ECAM control panel turned off.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-25-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW ECAM SEQUENCE - GENERAL
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-25-10 P 2/2

FCOM 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW ECAM SEQUENCE - EXAMPLE
OPERATING MANUAL
1 - THE ECAM DETECTS NO FAILURE

Ident.: DSC-31-25-20-00000569.0007001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-25-20 P 1/10

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
2 - THE ECAM DETECTS A FAILURE

Ident.: DSC-31-25-20-00000570.0005001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
For example, a hydraulic reservoir is overheating.

COCKPIT INDICATIONS
‐ A single chime sounds.
‐ Both MASTER CAUTION lights come on, and stay on.
‐ A FAULT light on the overhead HYD panel comes on.
‐ The memo space on the E/WD displays the “HYD G RSVR OVHT” message and the “G ENG 1 +
2 PUMP . . . . . OFF” instruction.
‐ The lower ECAM display (SD) automatically calls up the hydraulic system’s diagram and displays
“OVHT” in amber next to the green system.
‐ The CLR pushbutton, on the ECAM control panel, lights up.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-25-20 P 2/10

FCOM B→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
3 - THE FLIGHT CREW FOLLOWS THE INSTRUCTION DISPLAYED ON THE E/WD

Ident.: DSC-31-25-20-00000573.0005001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The crew switches off the green ENG 1 and 2 pump, depressurizing the green hydraulic circuit.
COCKPIT INDICATIONS
‐ A single chime sounds.
‐ Both MASTER CAUTION lights stay on.
‐ A FAULT/OFF light on the overhead panel comes on.
‐ The second part of the message on the E/WD changes to “G SYS LO PR”.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-25-20 P 3/10

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
‐ The system diagram on the SD displays an amber zero for the pressure in the green system,
along with the amber “OVHT”.
‐ The right side of the memo area indicates a secondary failure in the flight control system.
‐ The CLR pushbutton, on the ECAM control panel, remains lit.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-25-20 P 4/10

FCOM ←C 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
4 - ONE OF THE PILOTS PUSHES THE CLR PUSHBUTTON ON THE ECP

Ident.: DSC-31-25-20-00000578.0003001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
COCKPIT INDICATIONS
‐ The CLR pushbutton stays lit.
‐ The FAULT/OFF light stays on.
‐ The hydraulic system messages disappear from the E/WD, and the right side of the memo area
indicates a secondary failure in the flight control system.
‐ The SD automatically calls up the flight control system page, with surface actuator indications
associated with the green hydraulic system shown in amber.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-25-20 P 5/10

FCOM D→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-25-20 P 6/10

FCOM ←D 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
5 - ONE OF THE PILOTS PUSHES THE CLR PUSHBUTTON A SECOND TIME

Ident.: DSC-31-25-20-00000579.0008001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
COCKPIT INDICATIONS
‐ The CLR and STS pushbuttons on the ECAM Control panel light up.
‐ The FAULT/OFF lights stay on.
‐ The memo area on the E/WD returns to normal.
‐ The STATUS page appears automatically on the SD, displaying the procedures for completing the
flight with faulty green system.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-25-20 P 7/10

FCOM E→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-25-20 P 8/10

FCOM ←E 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
6 - ONE OF THE PILOTS PUSHES THE CLR PUSHBUTTON A THIRD TIME

Ident.: DSC-31-25-20-00000580.0017001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
COCKPIT INDICATIONS
‐ The CLR pushbutton light goes off.
‐ The FAULT/OFF lights stay on.
‐ A status reminder appears at the bottom of the E/WD.
‐ The SD automatically calls up the system page for the flight phase.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-25-20 P 9/10

FCOM F→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-25-20 P 10/10

FCOM ←F 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW OEB REMINDER
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-31-27-00000588.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The OEB reminder function provides operational help to the crew by enabling them to clearly identify
(on the ECAM) all procedures and status messages affected by an OEB.
When a situation leading to a warning/caution occurs, a message informs the crew in real time that
an OEB exists for the displayed warning and/or status and, consequently, that the procedure and/or
status presented on the ECAM is not applicable.
Then the crew must refer to the QRH where the correct information is provided.
DESCRIPTION
Ident.: DSC-31-27-00000589.0004001 / 15 FEB 11
Applicable to: ALL
The OEB reminder flag may apply to the:

‐ ECAM procedure only,
‐ ECAM procedure and corresponding status messages,
‐ Status message only.
PROCEDURE ONLY AFFECTED
‐ The ECAM warning title remains unaltered,
‐ All corresponding actions are suppressed and replaced by “REFER TO QRH/OEB PROC”
message.
‐ The related status messages on the ECAM system display remains unaltered.

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
COCKPIT INDICATION
PROCEDURE AND STATUS AFFECTED

‐ All corresponding actions are suppressed and replaced by the “REFER TO QRH/OEB PROC
message.
‐ The related status messages on the ECAM system display remains unchanged, except for
additional “REFER TO QRH/OEB PROC” title.

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
COCKPIT INDICATION
STATUS MESSAGE ONLY AFFECTED

‐ The corresponding procedure remains unchanged except for additional “FOR STS REFER TO
OEB” line.
‐ The related status messages on ECAM system display remains unchanged, except for
additional “REFER TO QRH/OEB PROC” title.

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
COCKPIT INDICATION
OEB DATABASE
Ident.: DSC-31-27-00000590.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The OEB database lists the warnings and cautions affected by OEBs.
The OEB database can be :
• Loaded manually on the aircraft via the MCDU, and stored in both FWCs.
• Crossloaded from one FWC to the other FWC.
• Updated by entering a code via the MCDU.
• Checked via the MCDU.
Note: The code provided on the OEB is designed to ensure that the OEB database is not updated
before the OEB is available.

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW ECAM CONTROLS
OPERATING MANUAL
ECAM CONTROL PANEL

Ident.: DSC-31-30-00000591.0002001 / 10 AUG 15
Applicable to: ALL
ECP
(1) OFF / BRT knobs

Used to turn the ECAM DUs on and off, and to control their brightness (automatic adjustment of
brightness for ambient light conditions is superimposed on this manual control).
Note: When the pilot turns the UPPER DISPLAY knob to OFF, the engine/warning (E/W)
display appears on the lower display unit (automatic transfer).
(2) System page pushbuttons
‐ Call up the corresponding system pages on the SD.
‐ Light up, when pushed for manual selection, or when an advisory is detected.
‐ Call up the aircraft system page corresponding to the present flight phase or the current
warning when pushed a second time.
When only one ECAM display is on, the pilot can display a system page for up to 3 min by
holding the system page pushbutton.
• If an advisory condition arises, the relevant system page is not automatically displayed,
but the pushbutton light pulses.
• If an ECAM warning is triggered, the relevant system page is not automatically displayed,
and the system page pushbutton does not light up.

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(3) RCL pushbutton

‐ When pressed, the E/WD displays all alerts previously cleared via the CLR pb that are still
active.
‐ When pressed for more than 3 s, the E/WD displays:
• All alerts previously cleared via the CLR pb that are still active
• All alerts previously cancelled via the EMER CANC pb.
Note: This action on the RCL pb also suppresses the flight phase inhibition function until
the next flight phase. As a consequence, all new alerts that should normally be
inhibited will be displayed.
Note: If there is no alert to recall, the “NORMAL” message appears for 3 s on the E/WD.
(4) STS (status) pushbutton
The pilot pushes this pushbutton to display the STATUS page on the lower SD. The pushbutton
remains lit, as long as the SD displays the STS page. If the system has no status messages,
the status page displays “NORMAL” for 3 s.
The pilot can clear the STATUS page by pushing the CLR pushbutton, or by pushing the STS
pushbutton a second time.
When only one ECAM display is on :
‐ It displays the STATUS page only when the pilot pushes the STATUS pushbutton and holds
it. He can display the next STATUS page, if any, by releasing the pushbutton and pushing it
again (before 2 s have elapsed). The new page then appears after a short delay.
‐ The pilot can keep the STS pushbutton pressed to display the STATUS page for a maximum
of 3 min, after which the ECAM automatically displays the engine/warning page.
(5) CLR pushbutton
This pushbutton remains lit as long as the E/WD is displaying a warning, or caution message or
a status message on the SD.
If it is lit, pressing it changes the ECAM display.
(6) ALL pushbutton
When this pushbutton is pressed and held down, the SD successively displays all the system
pages at 3 s intervals.
If the ECAM control panel fails, the pilot can use this pushbutton to page through the system
pages until he comes to the one he wants to look at. He releases the pushbutton then to select
that page.

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(7) EMER CANC pb

This pushbutton affects the following :
‐ Warnings :
• Cancels (stops) an aural warning for as long as the failure condition continues.
• Extinguishes the MASTER WARNINGS lights.
• Does not affect the ECAM message display.
‐ Cautions :
• Cancels any present caution (single chime, MASTER CAUTION lights, ECAM message)
for the rest of the flight.
The flight crew can press the RCL pb for more than 3 s in order to restore all the alerts
previously canceled via the EMER CANC pb.
All the alerts previously canceled via the EMER CANC pb automatically reappear on the
E/WD when Flight Phase 1 is initiated.
Note: This pushbutton should only be used to suppress spurious MASTER CAUTIONS.
(8) TO CONFIG pb
This pushbutton simulates the application of takeoff power. This is a test that triggers a
warning, if the aircraft is not in takeoff configuration. (Refer to DSC-31-15 Configuration
Warnings).
If the configuration is correct, the E/WD displays the “TO CONFIG NORMAL” message in the
TO MEMO section.
Note: If the ECAM control panel fails, the CLR, RCL, STS, EMER CANC, and ALL
pushbuttons remain operative, because their contacts are directly wired to the flight
warning and display management computers.

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ECAM SWITCHING PANEL

Ident.: DSC-31-30-00000601.0002001 / 07 FEB 11
Applicable to: ALL
ON MAIN INSTRUMENT PANEL
(1) Display Management Computer (DMC) selector switch

AUTO: DMC 3 supplies data to both ECAM DUs
In case of DMC 3 failure, the DMC 1 automatically takes over.
1 : DMC 1 replaces DMC 3
2 : DMC 2 replaces DMC 3
3 : DMC 3 supplies data to both ECAM DUs
(2) ECAM/ND transfer selector switch
Transfers the system/status display to either the captain's or the first officer's ND.
The "ECAM ON ND" is displayed on the lower ECAM display.
Note: If both ECAM DUs (E/WD and SD) fail, the flight crew can use this switch to
transfer the E/W display to either navigation display.In this case the "ECAM ON
ND" message is not displayed.

FCOM B 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ATTENTION GETTERS
Ident.: DSC-31-30-00000600.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) MASTER WARN lights

‐ Flash red for level 3 warning.
‐ Accompanied by an aural warning (continuous repetitive chime, specific sounds or synthetic
voice).
(2) MASTER CAUT lights
‐ Light up steady amber for a level 2 caution.
‐ Accompanied by a single chime.
These lights go out when :
‐ One pilot presses the light (except for some red warnings, such as the overspeed and stall
warnings).
‐ The warning/caution situation is over.
‐ The pilot presses the CLR pushbutton on the ECAM control panel (except for some red
warnings, such as the overspeed and stall warnings).
‐ The pilot presses the EMER CANC pushbutton on the ECAM control panel.
The aural warnings cease when :
‐ One pilot presses the MASTER WARN light (except for some red warnings, such as the
overspeed and stall warnings).
‐ The warning situation is over.
‐ The pilot presses the EMER CANC pushbutton on the ECAM control panel.

FCOM C 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
MEMO DISPLAY
Ident.: DSC-31-30-00017074.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
ECAM SWTG : This memo appears in green, when the ECAM SWITCHING DMC selector is not
in the AUTO position.

FCOM D 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW INDICATIONS ON PFD
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-31-40-00000603.0002001 / 13 JAN 14
Applicable to: ALL
The Primary Flight Display (PFD) provides the following information to the flight crew:
‐ Attitude and Guidance
‐ Airspeed
‐ Baro altitude, radio height and vertical speed
‐ Heading and Track
‐ FMGES modes (Flight Mode Annunciator)
‐ Vertical and Lateral Deviations
‐ Radio navigation information (ILS, FLS  , GLS  , DME).
The FWC monitors such main parameters as: Attitude, heading, and altitude. Also Refer to
DSC-31-40 Flags and Messages Displayed on PFD.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 1/32

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
SPECIFIC GROUND INDICATIONS

Ident.: DSC-31-40-00000604.0001001 / 13 JAN 14
Applicable to: ALL
(1) Sidestick order indication (white)

This is displayed, as soon as one engine is started.
It indicates the total of the pilot's and copilot's sidestick orders (shown here as left wing down,
pitch up).
(2) Max Sidestick Deflection (white)
This is displayed, as soon as one engine is started.
(3) Ground Roll Guidance Command Bar (green)
This symbol is displayed when the aircraft is on the ground, or below 30 ft radio height,
provided a localizer signal is available. It shows the flight director yaw orders, to keep the
runway centerline.
(4) PFD 1 (2 or 3) message (magenta)
The display indicates which DMC drives the PFD. It appears only during tests on ground.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 2/32

FCOM B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ATTITUDE DATA
Ident.: DSC-31-40-00000614.0005001 / 09 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL
(1) Fixed Aircraft Symbol

This symbol is black, outlined in yellow.
(2) Roll Scale
This scale is white, and has markers at 0, 10, 20, 30, and 45 ° of bank.
(3) Roll Index (yellow)
This pointer indicates the bank angle. When the bank angle exceeds 45 °, all the PFD symbols
except those for attitude, speed, heading, altitude, and vertical speed disappear. The display
returns to normal when the bank angle decreases below 40 °.
(4) Pitch Scale (white)
This scale has markers every ten degrees between 80 ° nose up and 80 ° nose down (every
2.5 ° between 10 ° nose down and 30 ° nose up). When pitch angle exceeds 25 ° nose up or
13 ° nose down, all the PFD displays except attitude, speed, speed trend, heading, altitude,
and vertical speed disappear. Beyond 30 °, large red arrowheads indicate that the attitude has
become excessive and show the direction to move the nose in order to reduce it. The display
returns to normal when pitch angle becomes less than 22 ° nose up or 10 ° nose down.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 3/32

FCOM C→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(5) Flight Control Protection Symbols

The display shows these symbols (=) in green :
• On the roll scale to mark the bank angle protection availability
• On the pitch scale at 15 ° nose down or 30 ° nose up to mark the pitch limits.
An amber × replaces these symbols if the corresponding protection is lost. (Refer to
DSC-27-20-20-30 Reconfiguration Control Laws - PFD Display)
(6) Sideslip Index (yellow)
This trapezoidal index moves beneath the roll index. On ground, it represents the lateral
acceleration of the aircraft. In flight, it shows sideslip (as computed by the PRIM computers).
One centimeter of displacement indicates 0.2 g. The sideslip index is against its stop at 0.3 g.
In case of engine failure at take-off or go-around, the sideslip index changes from yellow to
blue.
Note: The sideslip target is blue if :
‐ Slats/Flaps are in CONF 1, 1+F, 2, 3 or FULL, and
‐ One thrust lever > MCT (≥ FLX if FLX or DERATED TO), and
‐ At least one engine > 80 % N1, and
‐ Engine thrust asymmetry > 30 % N1.
In this case the sideslip index is called β target.
When this index is centered with the roll index, the sideslip equals the sideslip target for
optimum aircraft performance.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 4/32

FCOM ←C 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
AIRSPEED
Ident.: DSC-31-40-00000640.0002001 / 28 OCT 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) Actual Airspeed Reference Line and Scale

A white scale on a gray background moves in front of a fixed yellow reference line next to a
yellow triangle to show airspeed. The minimum airspeed indication is 30 kt.
(2) Speed Trend (yellow)
This pointer starts at the speed symbol. The tip shows the speed the aircraft will reach in 10 s
if its acceleration remains constant. The pointer appears only when it is greater than 2 kt and
disappears when it is less than 1 kt.
It also disappears if the FMGECs fail.
(3) Target Airspeed (magenta or blue)
This symbol gives the target airspeed or the airspeed corresponding to the target Mach
number.
The target airspeed is the airspeed computed by FMGEC in managed speed mode (magenta)
or entered manually on the FCU for selected speed mode (blue).
When the target speed is off the speed scale, its value is displayed as numbers below or above
the speed scale.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 5/32

FCOM D→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(4) Mach Number (green)

This is displayed when it is greater than 0.5.
(5) Speed Protection (green)
This symbol indicates the speed (VMO + 4 kt or MMO + 0.006) at which overspeed warning will
occur. This symbol is not displayed in pitch alternate or direct law because the protection is not
available. (Refer to DSC-27-20-20-30 Reconfiguration Control Laws - PFD Display)
AIRSPEED (CONT'D)
Ident.: DSC-31-40-00000645.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
(1) Minimum Selectable Speed (VLS)

The top of the amber strip along the speed scale indicates this speed. It represents the
lowest selectable speed providing an appropriate margin to the stall speed. (Refer to
DSC-22_10-50-20 Characteristic Speeds)
VLS information is inhibited from touchdown until 1 s after liftoff.
(2) Alpha Protection Speed
The top of a black and amber strip along the speed scale indicates this speed.
It represents the speed corresponding to the angle of attack at which alpha protection becomes
active (Refer to DSC-27-20-10-20 Protections - High Angle of Attack Protection).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 6/32

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
It is displayed when in pitch normal law.

(3) Alpha Max Speed
The top of a red strip along the speed scale indicates this speed. It represents the speed
corresponding to the maximum angle of attack that the aircraft can attain in pitch normal law
(Refer to DSC-27-20-10-20 Protections - High Angle of Attack Protection).
It is displayed when in pitch normal law.
(4) VMAX
The lower end of a red and black strip along the speed scale defines this speed.
It is the lowest of the following :
• VMO or the speed corresponding to MMO
• VLE
• VFE
(Refer to DSC-22_10-50-20 Characteristic Speeds)
(5) Stall Warning Speed (VSW)
The top of a red and black strip along the speed scale defines this speed.
It is the speed corresponding to the stall warning. (Refer to DSC-27-20-10-20 Protections -
High Angle of Attack Protection)
VSW information is inhibited from touchdown until 5 s after liftoff.
It is displayed when operating in pitch alternate or pitch direct law.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 7/32

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(1) Decision Speed : (V1)

This is a blue symbol (numeral one) that the crew inserts manually via the MCDU. When it is off
the scale, the upper part of the scale shows it in numbers.
It disappears after liftoff (Refer to DSC-22_10-50-50 Other Speeds)
(2) Rotation speed : (VR)
This a blue circle and corresponds to the value that the crew inserts manually via the MCDU. It
appears during takeoff, while on ground.
Note: V2 is represented by the target speed index during takeoff.
V2 is manually inserted by the crew through the MCDU.
(3) Minimum Flap Retraction Speed
This is a green symbol (letter F).
It appears when the flap selector is in position 2 or 3. (Refer to DSC-22_10-50-20
Characteristic Speeds)
(4) Minimum Slat Retraction Speed
It is represented by a green symbol (letter S).
It appears when flap selector is in position 1. (Refer to DSC-22_10-50-20 Characteristic
Speeds)
(5) Green Dot (Engine-out operating speed in clean configuration)
This green dot appears when the aircraft is flying in the clean configuration.
It shows the speed corresponding to the best lift-to-drag ratio.
(6) VFE NEXT
This symbol, an amber =, shows the VFE corresponding to the next flap lever position.
It appears when the aircraft altitude is below 20 000 ft (Refer to DSC-22_10-50-30 Limit
Speeds).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 8/32

FCOM ←E 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ALTITUDE
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-31-40-A-00000653.0015001 / 14 AUG 12
GENERAL
(1) Altitude Indication

This appears both as a white moving scale and as a green digital readout on a grey
blackground. “NEG” appears in the window in white for negative altitudes. The altitude
window changes from yellow to amber, if the aircraft deviates from the FCU-selected altitude
or flight level.
On any approach for which minimum value is entered in the FMGEC, the altitude numbers
change from green to amber, when the aircraft goes below the minimum.
(2) Target Altitude or Selected Flight Level Symbol (blue or magenta)
This symbol shows the FCU-selected altitude (if QNH BARO reference is selected), or the
selected flight level (if STD BARO reference is selected).
When the FMGEC operates in the vertical managed mode, this symbol is in magenta, if it
represents a flight plan altitude constraint that the FMGEC will follow. If the target altitude or
flight level is on the scale, the symbol is displayed and the numerical value appears inside
the symbol.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 9/32

FCOM F→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
If the target altitude or flight level is off the scale, the symbol is not displayed, and the
numerical value appears above or under the scale.
(3) Barometric Reference
The display shows “STD” or it shows “QNH” and the numerical setting in hectoPascals or
inches of mercury.
It pulses when the selection made by the flight crew is not correct (STD not selected above
transition altitude in climb or STD still selected in approach below transition level).
(4) Vertical Deviation
This symbol appears next to the altitude corresponding to the theoretical vertical profile
computed by the FMGEC. It is displayed from the top of descent down to the MAP or to the
final intercept altitude.
This symbol can either be a magenta circle or a green filled circle, depending on the installed
EIS standard. In both cases, the symbol has got the same meaning.
The flight crew can read the vertical deviation directly from the altitude scale. The range is
±500 ft. When the vertical deviation value exceeds ±500 ft, the symbol stays at the range
limit but changes to a filled half circle and the PROG page displays the exact value.
Ident.: DSC-31-40-A-00000658.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
METRIC ALTITUDE INDICATIONS

If metric reference is selected on the FCU two additional symbols are displayed on PFD.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 10/32

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(1) Target altitude or selected flight level (magenta or blue)

The display shows the selected altitude value in meters.
(2) Altitude indication (green)
The display shows the actual aircraft altitude value in meters.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 11/32

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-31-40-A-00000660.0008001 / 13 JAN 14
METRIC ALTITUDE INDICATIONS (CONT'D)
(1) Radio Height

This quantity appears when it is less than 2 500 ft.
‐ If a DH has been entered, the radio height appears:
• In green, when DH +100 ft < RA < 2 500 ft
• In amber, when RA < DH +100 ft.
If "NO" is entered as the DH on the MCDU APPROACH page, 0 ft becomes a default
value.
When the aircraft reaches the decision height selected on the MCDU, DH letters flash
amber for three seconds, then stay in amber above the radio height indication.
‐ If no DH has been entered or if both FMGECs fail, the radio height appears:
• In green, when 400 ft < RA < 2 500 ft
• In amber, when RA ≤ 400 ft.
The radio height indication changes every 10 ft down to 50 ft, then every 5 ft down to 10 ft,
then every foot.
(2) Landing Elevation (brown)
The top of the brown surface on the altitude scale represents the landing elevation at the
flight-planned destination.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 12/32

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
It is displayed:
‐ During flight phases 7 and 8, and
‐ If the QNH reference mode is selected.
VERTICAL SPEED
Ident.: DSC-31-40-00000664.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The displayed vertical speed information is normally based on both inertial and barometric data. If
inertial data is not available, it is automatically replaced by barometric information. In this case, the
window around the numerical value becomes amber.
(1) Analog pointer

This pointer, which is normally green, points to a white vertical speed scale displayed on a grey
background and graduated at intervals of 500 ft/min.
If the V/S is greater than 6 000 ft/min, the pointer stays at the end of the scale.
(2) Digital indication
This number, normally green, is the vertical speed in hundreds of feet per minute.
It disappears if the vertical speed is less than 200 ft/min.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 13/32

FCOM ← F to G → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
The analog pointer and the digital indication become amber, if :

• V/S is greater than 6 000 ft/min, (climb or descent)
• V/S is greater than 2 000 ft/min, during descent when 1 000 ft < RA < 2 500 ft, or
• V/S is greater than 1 200 ft/min, during descent and RA < 1 000 ft.
Note: For TCAS refer to DSC / 34-SURV / 60.TCAS / 20.Controls and Indicators.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 14/32

FCOM ←G 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
HEADING
Ident.: DSC-31-40-00000670.0011001 / 09 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL
(1) Heading Reference Line and Scale

A white scale on a grey background moves in front of a fixed yellow reference line to show the
actual magnetic heading.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 15/32

FCOM H→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(2) Selected Heading or Track Index (blue)

The pointer indicates the heading or track selected on the FCU HDG-TRK counter.
The index is replaced by digits on the right or left side of the scale, when the selected value is
off the scale.
If the FD pb is OFF, a second heading or track symbol appears on the horizon line and markers
are displayed every 10 °.
(3) Actual Track Symbol
This symbol is a small green diamond.
(4) True heading (blue)
At high latitude above 82.5 ° North or 60.5 ° South (or entering the north, magnetic polar
region latitude 73.5 ° N and longitude between 117.5 ° W and 92.5 ° W), the ADIRUs replace
magnetic heading by true heading on the EFIS.
When the aircraft is close to these regions (latitude above 82 ° North or 60 ° South or
approaching the north polar region: 73 ° N and longitude between 90 ° W and 120 ° W), the
ADIRU causes the "SELECT TRUE REF" message to appear on the ND, thereby requesting a
change in the north reference.
In true heading configuration at slats extension, «TRUE» will flash for 9 s then remain steady.
FLIGHT PATH VECTOR

Ident.: DSC-31-40-00000675.0003001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
The Flight Path Vector (FPV) is a flight reference with the TRK and FPA as basic guidance
parameters. When TRK/FPA is selected on the FCU, the FPV appears on the PFD.
INFORMATION PRESENTATION
The FPV appears on the PFD as a symbol, known as the "bird". The "bird" indicates the track and
flight path angle in relation to the ground.
The track is indicated on the PFD by a green diamond on the compass, in addition to the lateral
movement of the "bird" in relation to the fixed aircraft symbol. On the ND, the track is indicated
by a green diamond on the compass scale. The difference in angle between track and heading
indicates the drift.
The flight path angle is indicated on the PFD by the vertical movement of the "bird" in relation to
the pitch scale.
With the Flight Directors (FDs) selected on, the Flight Path Director (FPD) replaces the HDG-VS
Flight Director (FD). With both FDs pb set to off, the blue track index appears on the PFD horizon.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 16/32

FCOM ← H to I → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(1) Flight Path Vector (FPV)

This symbol appears when the pilot selects TRK/FPA on the FCU.
The flight path vector represents the lateral and vertical trajectory of the aircraft with respect
to the ground.
‐ On the lateral scale it indicates the aircraft's track.
‐ On the vertical scale it indicates the aircraft's flight path angle.
Example: The aircraft flies a track of 009 (heading 360 °, wind from west) and descends
with a flight path angle of -7.5 °.
USE OF FPV
The "bird" is the flight reference that should be used when flying a stabilized segment of trajectory,
e.g. a Non Precision Approach flown without the FLS function  or visual circuit.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 17/32

FCOM ←I→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
In dynamic maneuvers, the "bird" is directly affected by the aircraft inertia and has a delayed
reaction. As a result, the "bird" should not be used as a flight reference in dynamic maneuvers.
Refer to FCTM/AS-BIRD Introductionfor more information.
GUIDANCE
Ident.: DSC-31-40-00000678.0001001 / 13 JAN 14
Applicable to: ALL
Two completely different flight director modes are available, each with its own characteristic symbols.
The symbol displayed corresponds to the basic operating reference the pilot has selected – either
HDG V/S or TRK FPA.
In normal operation PFD1 displays FD1 orders.
If FD1 fails, PFD1 automatically displays FD2 orders, and on the PFD1 the FD2 indication in the right
column of the FMA flashes for a few seconds.
The same applies for FD2 orders normally displayed on PFD2.
IF THE CREW HAS SELECTED HDG V/S TO BE THE BASIC REFERENCE:
The PFD displays pitch and roll bars in green. They automatically move out of view at touchdown
in ROLL OUT mode.
They flash for 10 s and then remain steady in the following conditions:
‐ reversion to the HDG V/S basic mode (manually or automatic)
‐ change of selected flight level when the autopilot is already engaged in ALT CAPTURE mode
‐ loss of LOC or G/S in LAND mode or loss of LAND mode
‐ at the first AP or FD engagement.
The PFD displays a yaw bar in green below 30 ft radio height if a localizer signal is available:
‐ during takeoff (in RWY mode)
‐ upon landing (in FLARE and ROLL OUT mode).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 18/32

FCOM ← I to J → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(1) FD Crossed Bars (green)

(2) Yaw Bar (green)
THE CREW HAS SELECTED TRK FPA AS THE BASIC REFERENCE:
An inertial flight path vector defines the aircraft's horizontal and vertical track, taking wind effect
into account.
An associated flight path director symbol guides the flight crew onto the vertical and horizontal
flight path targets.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 19/32

FCOM ←J→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(1) Flight Path Vector (green)

(2) Flight Path Director (green)
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 20/32

FCOM ←J 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
TRAJECTORY DEVIATION
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-31-40-B-00000685.0001001 / 12 FEB 13
ILS/GLS  APPROACH
(1) Localizer Deviation Scale and Index

(2) Glide Slope Deviation Scale and Index
Deviation scales appear as soon as the flight crew pushes an LS pushbutton switch on the
EFIS control panel. Deviation indexes appear when the glide slope and localizer signals are
valid if deviation scales are displayed.
When a deviation index is out of the displayed range, only half a symbol appears at the end
of the scale.
The LOC scale flashes and continues to flash if the deviation exceeds 1/4 dot for two
seconds while the aircraft is between 15 ft and 1 000 ft, and CAT2 or CAT3 capability
displayed on the FMA, and either LOC, LAND, or FLARE is engaged. The glide scale flashes
and continues to flash if the deviation exceeds one dot for two seconds (above 100 ft RA).
"LOC" and the glide scale half index symbols flash and continue to flash when the deviation
exceeds two dots for two seconds.
One dot represents a deviation of ±0.8 ° on the localizer scale and ±0.4 ° on the glide slope
scale.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 21/32

FCOM K→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-31-40-B-00017848.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
ILS/GLS  APPROACH (CONT'D)
(1) ILS/GLS  information (magenta)

The following information appears on the PFD, when the crew has selected an ILS
frequency/GLS channel and course and pressed the LS pb:
‐ ILS/GLS identification as decoded by the ILS receiver
‐ ILS frequency/GLS channel
‐ For ILS DME distance if the ILS has a DME. For GLS: distance to runway threshold
computed by the MMR.
(2) ILS/GLS  course Pointer (magenta)
This pointer appears on the PFD, when the crew has selected an ILS frequency/GLS
channel and course and pressed the LS pb.
It is a dagger-shaped symbol on the heading scale.
The ILS/GLS course pointer is replaced by digits on the right or left hand side of the heading
scale (in a white box), when the ILS/GLS course value is outside the displayed portion of the
heading scale.
(3) Marker Indications
OM appears in cyan, when the aircraft flies over the outer marker
MM appears in amber, when the aircraft flies over the middle marker
IM appears in white, when the aircraft flies over an airways marker beacon or the ILS/GLS
 inner marker.
(4) ILS/GLS  Message
This flashes amber, when the APPR mode is armed and the ILS/GLS display is not selected.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 22/32

FCOM ←K→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-31-40-B-00000695.0006001 / 14 FEB 11
NON PRECISION APPROACH
(1) Vertical Deviation Scale and Index

The vertical deviation scale and index appear when in approach phase and, when either
the FINAL APP mode is armed/engaged, or a non-LS approach has been entered. They
are displayed in the approach or go-around phase, until the MDA has been reached, or the
MAP or the runway has been sequenced. They give the vertical deviation with respect to the
trajectory defined by the FMGEC.
Each index scale graduation represents 100 ft. The range is ±200 ft.
Note: If the LS pb-sw is pressed, glide deviation has priority over vertical deviation
information. As long as V/DEV display conditions are met, and the LS pb-sw is
selected, an amber V/DEV message flashes above the glide scale.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 23/32

FCOM ←K→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Ident.: DSC-31-40-B-00017857.0003001 / 21 MAR 16
RISING RUNWAY SYMBOL 
(1) Rising Runway Symbol (magenta)

If:
‐ The localizer signal is valid
‐ The radio height is available, and
‐ The yaw bar is not displayed
at 200 ft RA the runway symbol starts from the bottom of the pitch scale. Its vertical deviation
is driven by the radio height and its lateral deviation by the localizer.
Note: When the rising runway option is installed, the lower line of the attitude sphere does
not move for ground reference.
FLIGHT MODE ANNUNCIATOR

Ident.: DSC-31-40-00000697.0003001 / 01 APR 15
Applicable to: ALL
For a detailed discussion of legends and messages that may appear during FMGES operations, see
AFS chapter (Refer to DSC-22_30-100 Flight Mode Annunciator (FMA) - General).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 24/32

FCOM ← K to L 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
TAIL STRIKE PITCH LIMIT INDICATOR 

Ident.: DSC-31-40-00017879.0008001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) Tail Strike Pitch Limit

The pitch limit indicates the maximum pitch attitude to avoid the tail strike risk at takeoff and
landing. During takeoff, the indication progresses from the pitch limit value with main landing
gear compressed, to the pitch limit value with main landing gear extended. The indication is
removed when the tail strike risk disappears.
During landing, the indication is a fixed value corresponding to the main landing gear
compressed. The indication appears at 400 ft radio height.
ALTITUDE ALERT
Ident.: DSC-31-40-00000702.0002001 / 16 MAR 11
Applicable to: ALL
The FWC generates an altitude warning (C chord sound, and PFD’s altitude window pulses in yellow
or flashes in amber), when the aircraft approaches a preselected altitude or flight level or when it
deviates from its selected altitude or flight level.
This warning results from a comparison between the altitude (ADIRS) and the preselected altitude
displayed on the FCU.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 25/32

FCOM M to N → 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
‐ The continuous C chord is cancelled by selecting a new altitude, by pushing the ECAM control
panels’ EMER CANC pb, or by pressing either MASTER WARN pb.
‐ The altitude window stops flashing, if a new altitude is selected.
‐ The altitude alert is inhibited:
• When the slats are out with the landing gear selected down, or
• In approach after the aircraft captures the glideslope, or
• When the landing gear is locked down.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 26/32

FCOM ←N 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
FLAGS AND MESSAGES DISPLAYED ON PFD

Ident.: DSC-31-40-00000704.0191001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
(1) ATT Flag (red)

If the PFD loses all attitude data, its entire sphere is cleared to display the ATT flag.
(2) CHECK ATT, CHECK CAPT (F/O) PFD, CHECK EWD DU NOT MONITORED (amber)
For more information, Refer to DSC-31-05-30 Display Management Computer (DMC).
(3) SI flag (red)
If the flight crew loses the Sideslip Information (SI), the index disappears and a red SI flag
appears.
(4) FPV flag (red)
In TRK FPA mode, when the drift angle or flight path angle is not valid, an FPV flag appears.
(5) FD flag (red)
If both FMGECs fail, or if both FDs are disengaged and the FD pb is on and the attitude is
valid, a red FD flag appears.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 27/32

FCOM O→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(6) SPD flag (red)

If the speed information fails, a SPD flag replaces the speed scale.
(7) SPD SEL flag (red)
If the selected speed information fails, a SPD SEL flag appears.
(8) SPD LIM flag (red)
The SPD LIM flag appears when both FMGCs (flight envelope part) are inoperative, or in case
of an SFCC dual flap/slat channel failure.
In this case, the following PFD information is lost: VLS, S, F, Green Dot, Vtrend, VMAX, VFE
next, VSW.
In case only VMAX or VLS is lost, the flag comes up on the PFD but the remaining valid
information still appears.
(9) V1 INOP flag (red)
When the V1 signal is not valid, a V1 INOP flag replaces the digital value.
(10) ALT flag (red)
If the altitude information fails, the ALT flag replaces the altitude scale.
(11) CHECK ALT flag (amber)
(12) ALT SEL flag (red)
If the selected altitude information fails, an ALT SEL flag appears.
(13) V/S flag (red)
If the vertical-speed information fails, the V/S flag replaces the vertical speed scale.
(14) LOC and G/S flags (red)
If the localizer or glideslope receiver fails, a LOC or G/S flag appears on the deviation scale.
(15) V/DEV flag (red)
If vertical deviation information fails and the LS pb is not pressed, a V/DEV flag replaces the
V/DEV scale.
(16) RA flag (red)
If both radio altimeter fail, this flag appears in place of the radio height indication.
(17) DH flag (amber)
A DH flag appears, when the aircraft reaches the selected DH.
(18) HDG flag (red)
If the heading information fails, the HDG flag replaces the heading scale.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 28/32

FCOM ←O→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(19) CHECK HDG flag (amber)

For more information, Refer to DSC-31-05-30 Display Management Computer (DMC)
(20) MACH flag (red)
This flag appears if the Mach data fails.
(21) V/DEV (amber)
At the top of the glide slope scale this message flashes when the aircraft is in approach, and
when either FINAL mode is armed/engaged or a non-ILS approach is entered, and the LS pb is
selected.
(22) WINDSHEAR warning (red)
This message is displayed, when the FMGEC detects windshear Refer to DSC-22_40-10
General.
Note: 1. All flags, except SI, V1 INOP,DME 1 (which are steady), flash for 9 s then are
steady.
DH flag flashes for 3 s, then is steady.
(23) W/S AHEAD 
This message is displayed, when the predictive windshear system has detected windshear
ahead of the aircraft.
The message is in amber or red, depending on the alert level.
Refer to DSC-34-20-30-20 General
Note: 1. All flags, except, V1 INOP which is steady, flash for 9 s, then remain steady.
2. For information on the TCAS flag, Refer to DSC-34-20-60-10 TCAS Modes.
(24) DME 1 flag (red)
When DME distance is not available, a DME 1 (on PFD 1) or DME 2 (on PFD 2) replaces the
DME distance indication.
(25) ILS flag (red)
If an ILS frequency is not available, or if either the LOC or G/S signals fail, an ILS flag replaces
the ILS frequency indication.
(26) CHECK SD, CHECK CAPT (F/O) ND (amber)
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 29/32

FCOM ←O 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
BACKUP SPEED/ALTITUDE SCALE

Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: DSC-31-40-C-00000729.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
GENERAL
The BackUp Speed Scale (BUSS) enables to fly the aircraft when airspeed indications are
unreliable.
When the BUSS is activated:
‐ The BUSS replaces the normal speed,
‐ The GPS altitude replaces the barometric altitude scales.
The BUSS is displayed on both PFDs when the flight crew turn off all ADRs.
The activation of this BUSS is not reversible.
The BUSS information is based on the angle of attack (AOA), and depends on the slat/flap
configuration.
Ident.: DSC-31-40-C-00000730.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
BACKUP SPEED SCALE
(1) Red FAST area

This area indicates the excessive speed range while decreasing the margin to the maximum
structural speed.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 30/32

FCOM P→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(2) Amber FAST area

This area indicates the excessive speed range while keeping an appropriate margin to the
maximum structural speed.
(3) Green area
The green area indicates the safe speed range.
(4) Target speed (green triangle)
This symbol indicates the optimum target speed.
During the approach, it indicates the target speed for the approach.
(5) Actual speed reference (yellow line)
This line indicates the current speed of the aircraft.
(6) Amber SLOW area
This area indicates the too low speed range while keeping an appropriate margin to the stall
speed.
(7) Red SLOW area
This area indicates the too low speed range while reducing the margin to the stall speed.
BACKUP ALTITUDE SCALE
(1) Current GPS altitude

Two amber dashes cover the last two digits.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 31/32

FCOM ←P→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(2) GPS ALT flag

This flag indicates that the barometric altitude is replaced by the GPS altitude.
(3) GPS flag (displayed depending of the aircraft configuration)
This flag indicates that the barometric altitude is replaced by the GPS altitude.
Note: The vertical speed indication is no longer displayed.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-40 P 32/32

FCOM ←P 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW INDICATIONS ON ND
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-31-45-00000719.0002001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
There are six different displays (five display navigation information, and one displays primary engine
parameters) :
‐ ROSE LS
‐ ROSE VOR
‐ ROSE NAV
‐ ARC
‐ PLAN
‐ ENG (standby page)
The Navigation Display (ND) can provide a weather radar image in all modes, except PLAN.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-45 P 1/28

FCOM A 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ROSE MODES
Ident.: DSC-31-45-00017884.0003001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) Aircraft symbol (yellow)

Fixed and centered in the display, this symbol points to the yellow lubber line.
(2) Selected heading or track (blue)
This pointer shows the heading or track indicated on the FCU's HDG TRK counter.
(3) Actual aircraft track (green)
This symbol is a small green diamond.
(4) Ground speed and true air speed (green)
ADIRS furnishes these speeds.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-45 P 2/28

FCOM B→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(5) Aircraft heading

The fixed yellow lubber line points to the aircraft's magnetic heading on the moving white
compass rose. Small white triangles are fixed, at 45 ° intervals, on the circumference of the
compass rose.
At latitudes above 82.5 ° North or 60.5 ° South (or when entering the north magnetic polar
region, latitude 73.5 ° N and longitude between 117.5 ° W and 92.5 ° W), the ADIRUs cause
the true heading, instead of the magnetic heading, to appear on the EFIS and DDRMI  .
When the aircraft is close to these regions (latitude above 82 ° North or 60 ° South or
approaching the north polar region: 73 ° N and longitude between 90 ° W and 120 ° W, the
ADIRU causes the “SELECT TRUE REF” to appear on the ND. When the crew selects TRUE,
“TRUE” appears in blue above the heading scale.
TRUE (blue):
This appears on the ND when the compass is in the true heading configuration. The message
flashes for 9 s, or until the slats are extended, then it remains steady.
Grid track (green):
The ND displays the grid track in numerical form, when the switch is in true reference and the
latitude is above 65 ° N or S.
(6) Wind direction and speed
ADIRS provides the wind direction and speed. The digital direction reflects the true north
reference, and the analog direction (indicated by the green arrow) reflects the north reference
that is in use. The green arrow only appears, if the wind speed is above two knots and the true
airspeed is above 100 kt.
If the display does not receive either wind speed or direction, dashes replace the numbers on
the display.
(7) Bearing pointer
The ND displays the bearing pointer when bearing data is available. The pointer is:
‐ Green for ADF
‐ White for VOR.
If ROSE NAV or ARC mode is selected, and the computer detects a mismatch between the
aircraft and the VOR reference, the bearing pointer appears in magenta. The VOR bearings are
true bearings, having been corrected with the magnetic variation of the actual aircraft position
(Refer to DSC-22_20-60-130 General).
If reception of a beacon ceases, or if the receiver fails, the associated bearing pointer
disappears.
(8) Chronometer indication (white)
These numbers appear when the onside chronometer is started.
They display the elapsed time.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-45 P 3/28

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
The indication is in minutes and seconds from 0 to 59 min 59 s, and in hours and minutes from
1 h to 99 h 59 min. (Seconds are not displayed beyond 59 min 59 s).
(9) NAVAIDs
When the ADF-OFF-VOR selector on either the pilot's or co-pilot's EFIS control panel is set
to ADF or VOR, the onside ND displays the following characteristics of the corresponding
NAVAID in white for VOR, or in green for ADF (left side for receiver 1 and right side for receiver
2):
‐ Type of NAVAID (ADF or VOR);
‐ Shape and color of the associated bearing pointer (if the bearing pointer is in view);
‐ NAVAID identification (or frequency by default);
‐ DME distance, if the selected VOR is a VOR-DME NAVAID. The ADF identification and the
DME distance never appear at the same time.
‐ Mode of tuning:
• M for a NAVAID manually tuned by the pilot via the MCDU (underlined and dimmed),
• R for a NAVAID tuned from an RMP (Radio Management Panel) (underlined and
dimmed),
• Nothing for a NAVAID automatically tuned by the FMGEC.
If reception fails, the ND stops displaying the associated data (except for the identification or
frequency).
‐ If there is a mismatch between the aircraft and VOR reference, the following messages are
displayed next to the NAVAID parameters:
• In case ROSE NAV or ARC mode is selected: CORR (magenta).
• In case ROSE VOR or ROSE LS mode is selected: MAG or TRUE (amber) according to
VOR reference.
(Refer to DSC-22_20-60-130 General)
(10) Range marks
The range scale value, selected on the EFIS control panel (10 to 320 NM), governs the scale of
the ND.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-45 P 4/28

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
ROSE LS MODE
Ident.: DSC-31-45-00000737.0001001 / 02 JUN 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) ILS Course Pointer (Magenta)

This symbol points at the selected ILS course.
The ILS course is either selected by the FMGC (autotuned or manually) or manually selected
by the flight crew via the RMP backup mode.
(2) Localizer Deviation Bar (Magenta)
This bar moves laterally with respect to the course pointer. Its scale has two white dots on each
side of the zero deviation. Each dot corresponds to a deviation of approximately ± 0.8 °.
If the lateral deviation exceeds 1/4 dot (0.2 °) above 15 ft RA, both the bar and the scale flash.
(3) Glide Deviation (Magenta)
This diamond moves on a vertical scale consisting of two white dots on each side of the yellow
reference line. Each dot corresponds to deviation of approximately ± 0.4 °.
If the deviation exceeds one dot above 100 ft RA, both the scale and the diamond flash.
(4) Selected ILS Information
This area displays the ILS frequency (magenta), selected course (magenta), and identification
(magenta).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-45 P 5/28

FCOM C→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(5) ILS APP Message (Green)

This message appears when:
‐ The flight crew selects an ILS approach on the MCDU, and
‐ The FMS flight phase is DES, APPR, or GO-AROUND, or the FMS phase is CRZ and the
along track distance to destination is less than 250 NM.
Note: ILS 1 information appears on PFD 1 and ND 2.
ILS 2 information appears on PFD 2 and ND 1.
ROSE VOR MODE

Ident.: DSC-31-45-00000736.0001001 / 05 NOV 15
Applicable to: ALL
(1) VOR Course Pointer (Cyan)

This symbol points at the selected VOR course.
The VOR course is either automatically selected by the FMGEC or manually selected by the
flight crew via the MCDU pages or the RMP backup mode.
(2) Lateral Deviation Bar (Cyan)
This bar indicates the VOR deviation on a lateral scale.
Each dot corresponds to 5 ° of lateral deviation. When the lateral deviation exceeds 10 °, the
bar remains displayed on the outer dot.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-45 P 6/28

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
The arrow on the bar provides the TO/FROM indication.

(3) VOR Information (White and cyan)
This area displays the frequency and identification (if decoded by the receiver) of the selected
VOR in white, the selected course in cyan, and the tuning mode in white.
(4) VOR APP Message (Green)
This message appears when the flight crew selects a VOR approach on the MCDU.
ROSE NAV MODE/ARC MODE

Ident.: DSC-31-45-00000739.0012001 / 03 APR 13
Applicable to: ALL
ROSE NAV and ARC modes provide the same information, but ARC mode limits it to the forward
90 ° sector.
The ROSE NAV and ARC mode displays are oriented with respect to the aircraft heading.
Note: The compass rose is oriented to magnetic or true north, depending on the NORTH REF
pushbutton selection.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-45 P 7/28

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-45 P 8/28

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(1) Range Marks and Values

The values displayed on the ND are:
In ROSE NAV mode 1/4 of the selected range for the inner circle.
1/2 of the selected range for the heading scale circle.
In ARC mode 1/4 of the selected range for the first inner arc.
1/2 of the selected range for the second inner arc.
3/4 of the selected range for the third inner arc.
(2) Flight Plan
The crew can use the MCDU to select various types of flight plan:
‐ The active flight plan (the flight plan the aircraft is actually following when the NAV mode is
engaged) is represented by a continuous green line. The ND shows only the part of the flight
plan that is ahead of the aircraft, as well as the waypoints that are still to be overflown and
the waypoint from which the aircraft is coming.
The ND does not show a SID or a STAR, except for the last waypoint of the SID and the first
waypoint of the STAR, when the selected range is 160 or 320 NM.
If the primary flight plan is not active, it is represented by a dotted green line.
‐ A continuous blue line portrays the missed approach procedure, and a dashed blue line
portrays the flight plan to the alternate.
The missed approach and the alternate flight plan are displayed when:
• In ARC or ROSE NAV mode, a missed approach waypoint or an alternate flight plan
waypoint is displayed on the onside MCDU.
• In PLAN mode a missed approach or alternate waypoint is displayed in the 2L field of the
onside MCDU.
‐ The secondary flight plan is represented by a continuous white line. The ND continues to
display the active flight plan.
‐ Temporary flight plan
The revised portion of the flight plan is represented by a dotted yellow line.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-45 P 9/28

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
‐ Flight plan capture

When the aircraft is off the primary flight plan and is flying toward it in HDG mode with the
NAV mode armed, the ND shows the new active flight plan as a continuous green line if the
FMGEC has computed the intercept path.
The part of the flight plan before the interception point shows as a dotted green line.
‐ Abeam/Radial vectors
The pilot can select on the MCDU to have the display of:
• Either the radial of a selected waypoint perpendicularly to the aircraft present track
(Abeam), or
• The selected radial of a waypoint (Radial).
These vectors are displayed using a dashed blue line.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-45 P 10/28

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(3) Waypoint
The ND can display various kinds of waypoints:
Flight plan waypoints
The ND displays these as green diamonds (white, for TO waypoints). When the flight
crew selects the WPT option on his EFIS control panel, all waypoints other than flight plan
waypoints are displayed in magenta.
Pseudo waypoint
Point of the flight path where the aircraft is predicted to reach a selected altitude or speed.
Pseudo waypoint Definition
Level symbol (top of climb or level-off position), at the position where the aircraft reaches:
• The FCU-selected altitude (blue arrow) or
• It is displayed in magenta, if it corresponds to a constraint
• It does not appear when the aircraft is within 100 ft above, or below, the selected altitude.
Top of descent, or continue descent symbol:

• White, if DES is not armed
• Blue, if DES is armed.
Start of climb symbol:

• White, if CLB is not armed
• Blue, if CLB is armed.
Intercept point symbol:

• Indicates the point at which the aircraft will intercept the FMGEC-computed descent profile
• White, if DES is not armed
• Blue, if DES is armed.
Speed change symbol (magenta):

• Indicates the point at which the speed has to change.
Decelerate point symbol (magenta):

• Indicates the point at which the aircraft is predicted to decelerate for approach (and thus switch
to the approach phase)
• Magenta, if in managed speed and NAV or approach mode is engaged
• White, if in selected speed or HDG/TRK mode
• Automatic decelerations only occur when displayed in magenta.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-45 P 11/28

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
‐ ALT CSTR symbol set around the constrained waypoint:

• Magenta, when the ALT CSTR is predicted to be satisfied.
• Amber, when the ALT CSTR is predicted to be missed.
• White, when the ALT CSTR is not taken into account by the guidance, and NAV mode is
engaged.
(ETP)
‐ TIME MARKERS or EQUI-TIME POINT (ETP) symbol appears in green, to indicate where the
aircraft will reach the time marker or equitime point.
(HHMM)
ENERGY CIRCLE symbol (green arc):

• Is centered on the aircraft position and oriented to the current track line.
• Represents the Required Distance to Land.
• Only displayed in the descent and approach phases, when a selected lateral mode is engaged
(HDG or TRK).
• Energy circle computation assumes engine anti ice ON during descent and approach phases
(Refer to FCOM PRO-SUP-22).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-45 P 12/28

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(4) TO Waypoint
This is the next waypoint to be overflown, except when a DIR TO with ABEAM PTS has been
performed (in this case, the DIR TO waypoint is displayed on the top of the screen instead of
the NEXT ABEAM waypoint).
This area of the screen also shows:
‐ Waypoint identification (white)
‐ Track to go (green)
‐ Distance to go (green)
‐ Estimated time of arrival (green), assuming the aircraft will fly directly from its present
position to the TO waypoint at the current ground speed.
(5) Minimum Off Route Altitude (MORA)
Provided CSTR is selected and range is selected equal to or above 40 NM a digital readout
(Flight Level) is displayed which represents the Minimum Off Route Altitude allowed in a circle
of 40 NM around the aircraft. Nothing is displayed, if MORA for the chosen flight route is not
available in the FMGES database.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-45 P 13/28

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(6) NAVAIDs
The display uses specific symbols for NAVAIDs:
DME or TACAN
VOR
VOR/DME
NDB
The symbol appears:

‐ In green if the NAVAID is a current waypoint of the flight plan
‐ In white if it is the TO waypoint
‐ In blue when the NAVAID is tuned for display either automatically by the FMGEC or
manually through the MCDU
‐ In magenta when the NAVAID is not part of the flight plan and is called for display as
an option (corresponding option pushbutton pressed on the FCU EFIS control panel).
(7) Airport
Airport included in the flight plan:
‐ If the runway is not specified, the airport is represented by a star and the
identification is displayed in white.
Example: * LSGG
‐ If the runway is specified, it is represented by an oriented runway symbol in white.
Optional airport information

The airports that are not displayed as part of the flight plan may be called for display
(ARPT pushbutton on the EFIS control panel).
They are represented by a star and the identification in magenta.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-45 P 14/28

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(8) ILS Course (Magenta)

When the pilot pushes the LS pushbutton switch on the EFIS control panel, and if an ILS
station has been selected, the display shows an ILS course symbol.
(9) ILS Marker Beacons
The screen shows these as waypoints (diamonds).
When the aircraft overflies a marker beacon, the corresponding symbol flashes:
Blue for the outer marker
Amber for the middle marker
White for the inner marker.
(10) Cross Track Error
This is the aircraft’s lateral deviation from the active leg of the flight plan (related to the
great circle route). It is indicated in nautical miles (NM), with the letter R (right) or L (left),
according to the position of the aircraft with respect to the flight plan.
(11) Procedures turns and Holding Patterns
These appear only when they are part of the flight plan. For the 160 and 320 NM range
scales, each one is represented by a white arrow that originates at the associated fix and
indicates the direction of the turn.
For shorter range scales and if the procedure turn or the holding pattern is in the next or the
active leg, the display shows the full circuit or pattern.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-45 P 15/28

FCOM ←E 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
PLAN MODE
Ident.: DSC-31-45-00000744.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
This mode statically displays the flight plan legs on a map oriented to true north. The map is centered
on a map reference point that the pilot selects by slewing to it on his MCDU.
The map reference point is the waypoint displayed on the second line of the MCDU F-PLN page. It
can either be the active waypoint (next waypoint to be overflown), or any other waypoint of the flight
plan.
The pilot can slew the overall flight plan and display it in PLAN mode.
The pilot chooses the scale of the map with the range selector. (The diameter of the outer circle
corresponds to the selected range).
Data on navaids, and their characteristics and associated bearing pointers, are not available in this
mode.
(1) Aircraft Position and True Track

The orientation of the yellow aircraft symbol always indicates the aircraft's true track. Its
position represents the aircraft position given by the FMGS.
(2) Map Reference Point
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-45 P 16/28

FCOM F→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(3) Crosstrack Error

Refer to DSC-31-45 Rose NAV Mode/ARC Mode.
WEATHER RADAR INDICATION

Ident.: DSC-31-45-00015254.0001001 / 28 FEB 14
Applicable to: ALL
Refer to DSC-34-60-Weather Radar-Controls and indicators-Weather Radar indication on ND
ENGINE STANDBY PAGE

Ident.: DSC-31-45-00000747.0006001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
Each pilot may display the engine standby page on their respective ND via the ND selector on the
EFIS control panel.
The displayed information is N1, N2, EGT, FF, FOB, slats/flaps position, alpha floor, idle message
and limit modes (same presentation as the upper part of the primary engine page).
For more information on this page, refer to the POWERPLANT Chapter (Refer to DSC-70-90-40
Engine/Warning Display).
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-45 P 17/28

FCOM ← F to H 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
FLAGS AND MESSAGES DISPLAYED ON ND

Ident.: DSC-31-45-00015299.0023001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL
(1) HDG flag (red)

If the heading data is not displayed, the rose, arc and associated symbols disappear.
A HDG flag flashes for 9 s, on the upper part of the ND, then remains steady.
(2) CHECK HDG flag (amber)
For more information, Refer to DSC-31-05-60 Messages on the Display Units (DUs) - General.
(3) Center Part Messages
‐ The screen displays a MODE CHANGE message in green if there is a discrepancy between
the selected mode on the EFIS control panel and the mode sent from the onside FMGEC, or
while the DMC is preparing a new page for display
‐ The screen displays a RANGE CHANGE message in green if there is a discrepancy
between the range selected on the EFIS control panel and the range sent from the onside
FMGEC. A MODE CHANGE message has priority over a RANGE CHANGE message
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-45 P 18/28

FCOM I→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
‐ The screen displays a MAP NOT AVAIL message in red for several reasons:
• The MODE CHANGE or RANGE CHANGE message has been displayed more than 6 s
• A disagreement between DMC and FMGEC has been detected while EFIS control panel is
failed (default mode ROSE NAV 80 NM)
• The FMGEC is not able to indicate the flight plan reference point (back up mode) while
PLAN mode is selected
• The FMGEC has failed
• The FMGEC has delivered an invalid aircraft position.
‐ The screen displays a W/S SET RNG 10 NM message if a predictive windshear alert is
triggered and the range is above 10 NM.
‐ The screen displays a W/S CHANGE MODE message if a predictive windshear alert is
triggered and the ND is not in ARC or ROSE mode. The message appears in red or amber
corresponding to the windshear alert.
(4) LOC Flag (red)
If LOC data fails, this flag flashes for 9 s, then remains steady.
(5) G/S Flag (red)
If G/S data fails, this flag flashes for 9 s, then remains steady.
(6) VOR Flag (red)
In ROSE VOR mode, when the VOR bearing is not valid, this flag flashes for 9 s, then remains
steady.
(7) VOR 1(2) or ADF 1(2) or DME 1(2) Flag (red)
If a navigation receiver fails, the appropriate one of these flags flashes for 9 s, then remains
steady.
(8) VOR Course flag
If the VOR course fails, a red CRSXXX flag appears.
If there is Non-Computed Data (NCD), a blue CRS - - - flag appears.
(9) Other messages
MAP PARTLY DISPLAYED (amber) : In case of incomplete data transmission between the
FMGEC (priority criteria) and DMC, or if the DMC
cannot draw the complete MAP.
NAV ACCUR UPGRAD (white), or : Signals a change in navigation accuracy.
NAV ACCUR DOWNGRAD (amber)
SPECIF VOR/D UNAVAIL (amber) : If the NAVAID, that is tuned for the selected
approach or departure, is not available.
BACK UP NAV (amber) : If the MCDU backup navigation mode is activated.
OFF SIDE FM CONTROL (amber) : If the offside FM supplies the ND.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-45 P 19/28

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
CHK FLT PLN POSITION (amber) : On ARC or ROSE NAV mode, if the DMC detects a
disagree between the acquisition and the display of
the flight plan.
SELECT TRUE REF (amber) : When entering the polar area, if the TRUE North
reference is not selected by the pilot (MAG/TRUE
p/b).
CHECK NORTH REF (amber) : The NORTH REF pushbutton selection does not
match the airport MAG/TRUE bearing reference (as
stored in the FMGES navigation database), either
at the departure airport (during preflight), or at the
destination airport (when entering the ARRIVAL
area).
↓ (Green) : Overflow arrow, displayed when more than one of
the following messages are present at the same
time:
‐ NAV ACCUR DOWNGRAD (inhibited when the
navigation mode is IRS/GPS)
‐ NAV ACCUR UPGRAD (inhibited when the
navigation mode is IRS/GPS)
‐ SPECIF VOR-D UNAVAIL
‐ SELECT TRUE REF
‐ CHECK NORTH REF
‐ GPS PRIMARY
‐ GPS PRIMARY LOST.
GPS PRIMARY (white, boxed white) : This message appears when GPS PRIMARY mode
is available, or has been recovered. The pilot can
clear this message by pressing the CLR key on the
MCDU.
GPS PRIMARY LOST (amber, boxed : This message appears when GPS PRIMARY is not
white) available, and is not clearable by pilot action.
(10) OFST R(L) XX message (yellow)
This message is displayed, when a temporary or an offset flight plan is entered. The offset
value is given in NM.
Note: For TCAS messages (Refer to DSC / 34 SURV / 60 TCAS / 20 Controls and
Indicators / TCAS Messages).
(11) GPS APP message (green)
This message is displayed, when a GPS approach has been selected.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-45 P 20/28

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(12) PRED W/S flag (amber)

The WINDSHEAR switch on the weather radar panel is set to AUTO, and a Predictive
Windshear System fault is detected. This message appears on ground, or when flaps and slats
are extended.
It is associated with a single chime. The radar image remains available, provided that the fault
does not affect the radar mode.
(13) CHECK EWD, CHECK CAPT (F/O) PFD, CHECK SD, CHECK CAPT (F/O) ND (amber)
For more information, Refer to DSC-31-05-60 Messages on the Display Units (DUs) - General.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-45 P 21/28

FCOM ←I 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
GPWS
Ident.: DSC-31-45-00009015.0090001 / 09 OCT 14
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-45 P 22/28

FCOM J→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(1) GPWS terrain picture

The ND presents the GPWS terrain picture, when the TERR ON ND switch is set to ON, and
the ND is not in PLAN or ENG mode. The terrain picture replaces the weather radar image.
Terrain data is displayed independently of the aircraft relative altitude. The terrain appears in
different colors and densities, depending on the aircraft's altitude relative and absolute to the
terrain:
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-45 P 23/28

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Note: ‐ Areas without available terrain data in the GPWS database appear in magenta
‐ The reference altitude is computed based on the current aircraft altitude or, if
descending more than 1 000 ft/min, the altitude expected in 30 s
‐ In case of flight above the maximum elevation number, the relief between the
minimum and maximum displayed elevations is displayed by using three different
green levels.
‐ The “TERR CHANGE MODE” indication is displayed in red (or amber), in the case of a
predictive mode warning (or caution) alert, if the current selected display mode is PLAN
‐ The “TERR REDUCE RANGE” indication is displayed in red (or amber), in the case of a
predictive mode warning (or caution) alert, if the selected range is 160 NM or 320 NM.
(3) TERR indication
To differentiate between the terrain and weather display, the weather radar TILT is replaced by
a blue TERR, and the terrain display sweeps from the center outward to both ND sides.
(4) Warning and caution messages
TERR AHEAD/OBST AHEAD (amber) : For a caution.
TERR AHEAD/OBST AHEAD (red) : For a warning.
When triggered, these messages flash for 9 s, then remain steady until the caution or warning
alert condition disappears.
TERR RNG (red) : For a RANGE error warning.
TERR TST (amber) : Appears during the GPWS test, when the terrain pattern is
displayed, and there is no failure.
(5) Terrain or obstacle caution alert
Generated when a conflict exists between the terrain caution envelope, ahead of the aircraft,
and terrain/obstacles data stored in the database. The conflict area is shown in solid yellow.
(6) Terrain or obstacle warning alert
Generated when :
‐ A conflict exists between the terrain/obstacle warning envelope, ahead of the aircraft, and
the terrain/obstacle data stored in the database
‐ The aircraft is able to climb over the terrain/obstacle.
The conflict area is shown in solid red.
Note: When an alert is generated (either caution or warning) and TERR ON ND is not
selected, the terrain is automatically displayed and the TERR ON ND pushbutton ON
light comes on.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-45 P 24/28

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(7) Lowest and highest elevations

Minimum and maximum elevations encountered ahead of the aircraft, within the selected ND
range. The color code of the elevation figures is the same as for the GPWS terrain picture.
Note: The elevations shown on the ND (ROSE or ARC mode) correspond to the terrain
(obstacles  ) included in the selected ND range, ahead of the aircraft.
(8) Avoid Terrain warning
The conflict area is indicated by a red and black crosshatched pattern.
Generated when:
‐ There is a conflict between the terrain warning envelope, ahead of the aircraft, and the
terrain data stored in the database
‐ The aircraft is not able to climb over the terrain with sufficient safety margin.
Note: When an alert is generated (either caution or warning) and TERR ON ND is not
selected, the terrain is automatically displayed and the TERR ON ND pushbutton ON
light comes on.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-45 P 25/28

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
GPWS
Ident.: DSC-31-45-00009015.0004001 / 22 MAY 12
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-45 P 26/28

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(1) GPWS terrain picture

The ND displays the GPWS terrain picture, when the TERR ON ND switch is selected ON, and
the ND is not in PLAN or ENG mode. The terrain picture replaces the weather radar image.
The terrain appears in different colors and densities, in accordance with its relative height:
Note: Areas without available terrain data in the GPWS database appear in magenta.
‐ The “TERR: CHANGE MODE” indication is displayed in red (or amber), in the case of a
predictive mode warning (or caution) alert, if the current selected display mode is PLAN.
‐ The “TERR: REDUCE RANGE” indication is displayed in red (or amber), in the case of a
predictive mode warning (or caution) alert, if the selected range is 160 NM or 320 NM.
(3) TERR indication
To differentiate between the terrain and the weather display, the weather radar TILT is replaced
by a blue TERR, and the terrain display sweeps from the center outward to both ND sides.
(4) Warning and caution messages
TERR AHEAD (amber) : For a caution
TERR AHEAD (red) : For a warning.
When triggered, these messages flash for 9 s, then remain steady until the caution or warning
alert condition disappears.
TERR RNG (red) : For a RANGE error warning.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-45 P 27/28

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
TERR TST (amber) : Appears during the GPWS test, when the terrain pattern is
displayed, and there is no failure.
(5) Terrain caution alert
Generated when a conflict exists between the terrain caution envelope, ahead of the aircraft,
and the terrain data stored in the database. The conflict area is shown in solid yellow.
(6) Terrain warning alert
Generated when:
‐ a conflict exists between the terrain warning envelope, ahead of the aircraft, and the terrain
data stored in the database.
‐ the aircraft is able to climb over the terrain.
The conflict area is shown in solid red.
(7) Avoid Terrain warning
Generated when:
‐ There is a conflict between the terrain warning envelope, ahead of the aircraft, and the
terrain data stored in the database.
‐ The aircraft is not able to climb over the terrain with sufficient safety margin.
The conflict area is indicted by a red and black crosshatched pattern.
Note: When an alert is generated (either caution or warning), and TERR ON ND is not
selected, the terrain is automaticaly displayed, and the TERR ON ND pushbutton ON
light comes on.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-45 P 28/28

FCOM ←J 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW EFIS CONTROLS
OPERATING MANUAL
EFIS CONTROL PANEL WITH OANS  ZOOM FUNCTION

Ident.: DSC-31-50-00018571.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The On-board Airport Navigation System (OANS) is an optional function that provides the flight crew
with a moving airport map on the ND. The OANS is designed to improve the flight crew awareness of
airport surfaces. Refer to DSC-34-35 Airport Navigation.
The OANS requires a dedicated EFIS control panel with a ZOOM notch on the range knob-selector.
If OANS is not installed or is deactivated, a DEACT placard is present below the ZOOM notch on the
EFIS control panel.
The flight crew can turn the knob-selector to the ZOOM notch, however the map displayed on the
ND will remain at 10 NM range and a led will turn on to indicate that the knob-selector is in ZOOM
(DEACT) position. Turn back the knob-selector as necessary to select the required range.

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
EFIS DMC PANEL

Ident.: DSC-31-50-00000760.0003001 / 01 APR 11
Applicable to: ALL
(1) OFF/BRT knobs

• These knobs turn the PFD and ND display units on and off, and control their brightness.
• The display brightness automatically adjusts for changing light conditions. It may also be
adjusted manually.
PFD Brightness Control Knob

FCOM B→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
Rotating this knob all the way counterclockwise switches off the PFD. In this case, the PFD
image is automatically displayed on the NDU, but the pilot may recover the ND by means of the
PFD-ND XFR pushbutton.
ND Brightness Control Knob
The outer knob controls only the brightness of both the weather radar image and the GPWS
terrain display.
The inner knob controls the general brightness of the ND symbols.
Rotating this knob all the way counterclockwise switches off the NDU.
(2) PFD/ND Pushbutton
Pushing this button interchanges the PFD and the ND.
If the PFDU fails, the PFD transfers automatically to the NDU.
(3) EFIS DMC sel
NORM: The DMC 1 supplies CAPT EFIS DUs and DMC 2 supplies F/O EFIS DUs.
3 : The onside DMC is replaced by DMC3.
2 or 1 : The onside DMC is replaced by DMC 2 or 1.
Some switching configurations generate FMA message. Refer to DSC-22_30-100 Special
Messages (FMA Columns 2 and 3) for details.

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
EFIS CONTROL PANEL

Ident.: DSC-31-50-00000759.0001001 / 12 FEB 13
(1) Barometer Reference Display Window

Range : 745 hPa to 1 050 hPa.
(2) Barometer Reference Selector
a. Outer ring: For selection of the units for the barometer reference, either hectoPascals (hPa)
or inches of mercury (in Hg).
Note: The selected unit does not appear on the PFD.
b. Inner knob: For selection of the reference value, displayed in the barometer reference
display window and on the PFD below the altitude scale.
At FCU initialization, the window displays 1 013 or 29.92, depending on the selected unit.
‐ Pulling the knob selects the standard baro reference setting. The PFD then displays
“STD.” (Rotating the knob has no effect.)
‐ Pushing the knob from the STD position makes the last selected QNH baro setting
available.

FCOM C→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(3) FD Pushbutton
Pushing this button removes the FD bars from the associated PFD (or removes the flight path
director symbol if the TRK FPA reference is selected).
The pushbutton light goes out.
Pushing it again restores the FD bars (or the FPD symbol) and lights the green pushbutton
light.
(4) LS Pushbutton
Pushing this button displays the localizer and glide slope scales on the PFD.
Deviation symbols appear if there is a valid ILS/GLS  signal.
The green pushbutton light comes on.
(5) Mode Select Switch
This switch selects a navigation display for the onside ND.
(6) Range Select Switch
This switch selects a range scale for the onside ND.
Note: If the mode or the range data fails, the default selection is the ROSE NAV mode and
80 NM range.
(7) ADF-VOR Select Switches
These switches select ADF or VOR bearing pointers and DME distance on the onside ND, as
well as the corresponding navaid data characteristics in any mode except PLAN mode.
(8) Optional Data Display Pushbutton
Pushing this button displays optional data in addition to the data permanently displayed in
PLAN, ARC, or ROSE NAV modes. The green pushbutton light comes on.
Only one option can be activated at a time.

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
EFIS CONTROL PANEL

Ident.: DSC-31-50-00000759.0003001 / 12 FEB 13
(1) Barometer Reference Display Window

Range: 745 hPa to 1 100 hPa.
(2) Barometer Reference Selector
a. Outer ring: For selection of the units for the barometer reference, either hectoPascals (hPa)
or inches of mercury (in Hg).
Note: The selected unit does not appear on the PFD.
b. Inner knob: For selection of the reference value, displayed in the barometer reference
display window and on the PFD below the altitude scale.
At FCU initialization, the window displays 1 013 or 29.92, depending on the selected unit.
‐ Pulling the knob selects the standard baro reference setting. The PFD then displays
“STD.” (Rotating the knob has no effect.)
‐ Pushing the knob from the STD position makes the last selected QNH baro setting
available.

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(3) FD Pushbutton
Pushing this button removes the FD bars from the associated PFD (or removes the flight path
director symbol if the TRK FPA reference is selected).
The pushbutton light goes out.
Pushing it again restores the FD bars (or the FPD symbol) and lights the green pushbutton
light.
(4) LS Pushbutton
Pushing this button displays the localizer and glide slope scales on the PFD.
Deviation symbols appear if there is a valid ILS/GLS  signal.
The green pushbutton light comes on.
(5) Mode Select Switch
This switch selects a navigation display for the onside ND.
(6) Range Select Switch
This switch selects a range scale for the onside ND.
Note: If the mode or the range data fails, the default selection is the ROSE NAV mode and
80 NM range.
(7) ADF-VOR Select Switches
These switches select ADF or VOR bearing pointers and DME distance on the onside ND, as
well as the corresponding navaid data characteristics in any mode except PLAN mode.
(8) Optional Data Display Pushbutton
Pushing this button displays optional data in addition to the data permanently displayed in
PLAN, ARC, or ROSE NAV modes. The green pushbutton light comes on.
Only one option can be activated at a time.

FCOM ←C 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
CHRONOMETER (GLARESHIELD)
Ident.: DSC-31-50-00000762.0001001 / 27 JAN 11
Applicable to: ALL
(1) CHRONO Pushbutton

Pushing this button displays chronometer time on the onside ND.
Pushing it again freezes the displayed value.
Pushing it a third time resets the chronometer, and the chronometer time disappears from the
display.
MEMO DISPLAY
Ident.: DSC-31-50-00017075.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
EFIS SWTG : This memo appears in green, when either the CAPT EFIS DMC selector or the
F/O EFIS DMC selector is not in the NORM position.

FCOM D to E 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW CLOCK - GENERAL
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-31-55-10-00000763.0007001 / 14 FEB 11
Applicable to: ALL
A fully independent clock is on the right side of the control panel.

It sends time to the Central Maintenance Computer, the Flight Data Interface Unit, and the Flight
Management and Guidance Computer.
The clock has two electrical supplies, one of which is a direct connection to the aircraft's battery hot
bus.
The clock performs four functions:
‐ It displays “UTC” (GMT) time in hours, minutes, and seconds, on the center counter.
‐ It displays elapsed time (ET) (from engine startup) in hours, and minutes, on the lower counter.
‐ It drives the chronometer (CHR), which measures a time interval (from the pushing of the
CHRONO button) in minutes and seconds, and displays it with a needle and in numbers on the
upper counter.
‐ It can replace the UTC with the date.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-55-10 P 1/2

FCOM A 07 APR 11
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW CLOCK - GENERAL
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-55-10 P 2/2

FCOM 07 APR 11
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW CLOCK - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
GENERAL
Ident.: DSC-31-55-20-00000764.0004001 / 14 FEB 11
Applicable to: ALL
(1) UTC (GMT) counter

This counter displays the present time in 24 h format from 0 to 23 h 59 min 59 s.
(2) Elapsed Time (ET) counter
This counter registers the aircraft’s flight time from 0 to 99 h and 59 min.
(3) Chrono (CHR) counter
This counter registers elapsed time from 0 to 99 min 59 s. It is controlled by the CHR
pushbutton.
(4) CHR pushbutton
First push : Starts the CHR counter
Second push: Stops the CHR counter, and keeps the display at its last indication.
(5) Reset (RST) pushbutton
When pressed, the CHR counter restarts from 0, if the chrono is running.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-55-20 P 1/4

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
(6) ET selector
“RUN” : The ET counter starts
“STP” : The ET counter stops counting
Spring-loaded : The ET counter goes blank. The selector returns to its STP position when
“RST” the selector is released.
Note: A cumulative elapsed time can be achieved by alternatively setting this switch to the
"RUN" and "STP" position.
(7) DATE/SET button
First push : Sets the clock to date mode. The UTC time display is replaced by the date
(day/month/year).
Second push : Sets the clock to time mode. The date display disappears.
Note: In order to select the date mode, switch the UTC selector to “GPS” or “INT” .
(8) UTC selector
GPS : The time (or date, if selected) is displayed, and this data is synchronized with
GPS information.
Note: ‐ If the signal between the GPS and the clock is not detected, or if the signal is
detected, but the GPS data is invalid, the clock automatically runs on its internal
time.
‐ The clock will automatically resynchronize with the GPS information, as soon as the
GPS data is available.
INT : The internal time (or date, if selected) is displayed.
Note: ‐ The clock’s internal time is always synchronized with the latest valid GPS
information unless the pilot enters a different internal time, via the SET function.
‐ If there is no valid GPS information at power up, the internal time will be 00: 00: 00,
until the clock is initialized, or until valid GPS information is available.
SET : Allows the internal time and date to be initialized.
OPERATION IN INTERNAL MODE

Ident.: DSC-31-55-20-00005549.0001001 / 20 SEP 16
Applicable to: ALL
DATE INITIALIZATION
Set the UTC selector to SET. The minute digits flash, and the seconds’ digits are blank.
To increase data, turn the DATE/SET pushbutton clockwise.
To decrease data, turn the DATE/SET pushbutton counterclockwise.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-55-20 P 2/4

UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
‐ First, press on DATE/SET: To set the hour.

‐ Second, press on DATE/SET: To set the year.
‐ Third, press on DATE/SET: To set the month.
‐ Fourth, press on DATE/SET: To set the day.
Switch the UTC selector to INT, position and the clock will start with the seconds’ digits at 00.
Note: This process must be completed in less than one minute. Otherwise, it will be necessary
to reset the CMC, in order to synchronize the lower ECAM time display with the cockpit
clock display. Resetting the CMC is a maintenance operation.
PRECAUTION IN CASE OF ATC DATALINK COMMUNICATION
If the clock is set to internal (INT) mode and the flight crew manually sets the time and date, the
clock does not comply with the time precision required for ATC datalink communication (+/- 1 s
UTC). This may lead to the rejection of messages, or to the acceptance of obsolete messages:
‐ The CPDLC function will send CPDLC messages with an erroneous date/time
‐ The CPDLC function will accept obsolete uplink messages and may reject uplink messages with
a correct date/time
‐ The uplink messages for oceanic and departure clearance will be displayed in the Datalink
Control and Display Unit (DCDU) with an erroneous time
‐ The ADS-C function will continue to operate, but in a degraded mode.
To comply with the time precision requirement for ATC datalink communication, the flight crew
must either:
‐ Use the clock in GPS mode, or
‐ Use the clock in INT mode and synchronize the clock with the GPS at least one time per day.
This synchronization ensures that the UTC time drift is below +/- 1 s UTC.
GPS SYNCHRONIZATION IN INTERNAL MODE
When the clock is set to INT mode, the UTC time is only based on the internal clock and is not
synchonized with the GPS. To reset the drift that results from the UTC internal time, the flight crew
must perform the following actions:
‐ Set the UTC selector of the clock to the GPS mode and keep this setting during at least 10
seconds
‐ Then reset the UTC selector of the clock to INT mode.
These actions result in a resynchronization of the internal clock with the GPS.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-55-20 P 3/4

FCOM ←B 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-55-20 P 4/4

FCOM 22 MAR 17
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FLT RECORDERS - FLIGHT DATA RECORDING SYSTEM
OPERATING MANUAL
DESCRIPTION
Ident.: DSC-31-60-10-00017892.0005001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
The Flight Data Recording System, which records the mandatory parameters, consists of the
following components:
‐ A Flight Data Interface and Management Unit (FDIMU)
‐ A Digital Flight Data Recorder (DFDR)
‐ A three-axis Linear Accelerometer (LA)
The FDIMU collects and processes parameters from the SDACs, DMCs, FWCs, FCDCs, BSCU,
EIVMUs, FCU, the DFDR event pushbutton, the GND CTL pushbutton and the Clock.
It stores the mandatory flight parameters in the DFDR.
The DFDR can store the last 25 h data, at least. It stores this data on a fireproof and shockproof
device. An underwater locator beacon is attached to the DFDR.
The linear accelerometer measures the acceleration of the aircraft along each of the three axes.
The QAR  is a recorder that stores the same data as the DFDR. However, the QAR  is more
accessible for the maintenance crew.
The recording system is automatically active:

‐ On ground, during the first 5 min after the aircraft electric network is energized.
‐ On ground, after the first engine start.
‐ In flight (whether the engines are running or not).
On the ground, the recording system automatically stops 5 min after the second engine shuts down.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-60-10 P 1/2

FCOM A→ 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FLT RECORDERS - FLIGHT DATA RECORDING SYSTEM
OPERATING MANUAL
On the ground, the crew can manually start the recording system by pressing the GND CTL
pushbutton.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-60-10 P 2/2

FCOM ←A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FLT RECORDERS - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
OVERHEAD PANEL
Ident.: DSC-31-60-20-00000841.0001001 / 09 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL
(1) RCDR GND CTL pushbutton (springloaded)

ON : The Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR) and the Flight Data Recorders are active. The
ON light is on.
AUTO : The Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR) and the Flight Data Recorders are active,
according to the logic.
The system automatically switches from ON to AUTO at the first engine start, and also in case
of an electrical transient.
PEDESTAL
Ident.: DSC-31-60-20-00000843.0001001 / 09 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL
(1) DFDR EVENT pushbutton

- Pressing this button (briefly) sets an event mark on the Flight Data records.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-60-20 P 1/2

FCOM A to B 08 NOV 12
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340
FLIGHT CREW FLT RECORDERS - CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
OPERATING MANUAL
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-60-20 P 2/2

FCOM 08 NOV 12
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340 FLT RECORDERS - AIRCRAFT CONDITION
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL MONITORING SYSTEM (ACMS)
DESCRIPTION
Ident.: DSC-31-60-30-00000846.0002001 / 16 MAR 11
Applicable to: ALL
The ACMS is used to monitor various aircraft system parameters in order to make maintenance
easier and to allow formulating operational recommendations.
The ACMS can generate system reports. The Airbus Standard Reports are preprogrammed reports
available at aircraft delivery. The operator can create its own reports.
The ACMS uses the Flight Data Interface and Management Unit (FDIMU) to acquire the relevant
aircraft system parameters. The FDIMU is connected to the rest of the ACMS as shown below.
The system may be programmed using the MCDUs. The crew can select any report to be displayed
on the MCDUs.
The Printer prints the flight phase programmed reports or any report selected on the MCDU.
This printing may be automatic or in response to the ACMS PRINT pushbutton.
The ACMS may send automatic reports via ACARS  .
An optional Digital Recorder may be installed to extend the recording capacity.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-60-30 P 1/2

FCOM A 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY
AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
A330/A340 FLT RECORDERS - AIRCRAFT CONDITION
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL MONITORING SYSTEM (ACMS)
CONTROLS ON PEDESTAL
Ident.: DSC-31-60-30-00000850.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: ALL
(1) ACMS PRINT pushbutton

This pushbutton is used to immediately print a specific report, depending on the flight phase.
The crew may then use the MCDU to select and instantly print another report.
JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-31-60-30 P 2/2

FCOM B 22 MAR 16
UNCONTROLLED COPY

A330 FCOM 07feb18 GENDSC TOMEII

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A330 FCOM 07feb18 GENDSC TOMEII

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

A330 FCOM 07feb18 GENDSC TOMEII

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A330/A340

REFERENCE: JAI A330/A340 FLEET FCOM ISSUE DATE: 07 FEB 18

DSC-23-10-20 Radio Tuning

DSC-23-10-30 Intercommunication System

DSC-23-10-40 Cockpit Voice Recorder

DSC-23-20 Internal Communication

DSC-23-20-20 Cabin Interphone System

DSC-23-20-30 Service Interphone System

DSC-23-20-40 Passenger Address

DSC-23-30 External Communication

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-PLP-TOC P 1/2

Continued from the previous page

DSC-23-30-20-20 Controls and Indicators

DSC-23-40 Emergency Communication

DSC-23-40-30 Emergency Locator Transmitter

DSC-23-47 Onboard Mobile Telephony System

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-PLP-TOC P 2/2

The communications system comprises the following subsystems:

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-10 P 1/2

Intentionally left blank

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-10 P 2/2

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-20 P 1/4

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-20 P 2/4

RADIO MANAGEMENT PANEL

(1) Frequency displays

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-20 P 3/4

(3) Radio comm. selection keys

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-20 P 4/4

AUDIO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

The audio management system allows the flight crew to use :

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-30 P 1/4

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-30 P 2/4

CABIN INTERCOMMUNICATION DATA SYSTEM

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-30 P 3/4

‐ Emergency evacuation signalling

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-30 P 4/4

The cockpit voice recorder (CVR) records :

CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-40 P 1/4

(1) GND CTL sw (spring-loaded)

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-40 P 2/4

(4) Headset and Boomset jacks

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-40 P 3/4

Intentionally left blank

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-40 P 4/4

AUDIO CONTROL PANEL

(1) Transmission Keys

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-50 P 1/8

(2) Reception knob

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-50 P 2/8

AUDIO CONTROL PANEL

(1) Transmission Keys

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-50 P 3/8

(2) Reception knob

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-50 P 4/8

SIDE STICK RADIO SELECTOR

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-50 P 5/8

LOUDSPEAKER VOLUME KNOB

JAI A330/A340 FLEET DSC-23-10-50 P 6/8